SYH IE-Net 76

Industrial Ethernet
___________________
Preface
Basics of communication
1
___________________
with Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET
Industrial Ethernet
Network structures and

2
___________________
network configuration
3
___________________
Examples of applications
SCALANCE network
4
___________________
components
Communications processors
5
___________________
for PCs
System Manual
Communications processors
6
___________________
for SIMATIC S7
7
___________________
Compact switch module
8
___________________
Gateways
Passive components and
9
___________________
accessories
A
___________________
Appendix
02/2013
C79000-G8976-C242-08
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products

Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NRNBERG
GERMANY
Order number: C79000-G8976-C242-08

02/2013 Technical data subject to change
Copyright Siemens AG 2007 - 2013.

All rights reserved
Preface
Target group and motivation
The networking manual accompanies you through all phases of preparation and
implementation of network projects. It provides you with an overview of the structure and
configuration of Industrial Ethernet networks with the aid of SIMATIC NET.
On the one hand, the target groups are decision makers and planners; with this document,
they can gain an overview of the technical principles, the SIMATIC NET product range and
the most important practical applications. On the other hand, it provides configuration
engineers and commissioning personnel with extensive information data to which they can
refer when setting up their network systems.
Structure of the document

The book consists of several parts, structured as follows:
Table 1
Structure of the Networking Manual
Segment
Content and target group
Basics
The first chapters are intended for decision makers and planners.
In Chapters 1 and 2, the basics of network communication technology, the
special features of Industrial Ethernet and the essential characteristics of
SIMATIC NET products are presented.
Chapter 3 contains examples of the most common network topologies and use
cases and describes the components required for them. The chapter is not only
instructive; you can also use it as a practical starting point for planning your own
systems.
Chapters 1 to 3
SIMATIC NET product lines

Chapters 4 to 8
Passive components and accessories
Chapter 9
These chapters are also intended for decision-makers and planners.

These chapters introduce the product lines of SIMATIC NET. Here, you will find
the main characteristics of the SCALANCE switches, security and wireless
components - the emphasis being on their technical properties.
This chapter is intended for planners, configuration engineers and
commissioning engineers.
You will gain an overview of passive components such as cables and plug-in
connectors for connection to the product families described earlier. You will find
comprehensive reference data as required during the planning and
commissioning of a plant.
Industrial Ethernet
System Manual, 02/2013, C79000-G8976-C242-08
Preface
Orientation in the documentation

Apart from the System Manual you are currently reading, the following documentation is also
available from SIMATIC NET on the topic of Network Manual:
"Passive network components" system manual
This system manual contains installation instructions for several of the most common
components and guidelines for setting up networked automation plants in buildings.
System manual "RCoax"
This system manual contains both an explanation of the fundamental technical aspects
as well as a description of the individual RCoax components and their functionality.
Installation/commissioning and connection of RCoax components and their operating
principle are explained. The possible applications of the various SIMATIC NET
components are described.
System manual - "Passive Network Components IWLAN"
This system manual explains the entire IWLAN cabling that you require for your IWLAN
application. For a flexible combination and installation of the individual IWLAN
components both indoors and outdoors, a wide ranging selection of compatible coaxial
accessories are available. The system manual also covers connecting cables as well as a
variety of plug-in connectors, lightning protectors, a power splitter and an attenuator.
Compact operating instructions
These instructions contain wide-ranging descriptions of the components of the product,
installation and setting up of SIMATIC NET devices as well as reference data and the
relevant dimension drawings.
Operating Instructions and other documents

Despite every effort being made to provide a complete and thorough picture, this System
manual cannot replace the Operating Instructions and reference documents of the individual
devices and components. You will find the detailed documentation of the individual
components on the Manual Collection DVD.
SIMATIC NET glossary

Explanations of the specialist terms used in this documentation can be found in the SIMATIC
NET glossary.
You will find the SIMATIC NET glossary here:
SIMATIC NET Manual Collection
The DVD ships with certain SIMATIC NET products.
On the Internet under the following entry ID:
50305045 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50305045)
Industrial Ethernet
Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1
Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet .................................................................................... 11

1.1
Terminology .................................................................................................................................11
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.2.1
1.2.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
Industrial Ethernet........................................................................................................................12
Basics of Industrial Ethernet ........................................................................................................12
PROFINET ...................................................................................................................................14
Basics of PROFINET ...................................................................................................................14
PROFINET IO and PROFINET CBA ...........................................................................................16
SIMATIC NET ..............................................................................................................................18
Transmission procedures and real-time response.......................................................................20
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.3.7
Technologies of Industrial Ethernet .............................................................................................22

Communications media ...............................................................................................................22
Active and passive network components.....................................................................................23
Management functions.................................................................................................................26
Power over Ethernet ....................................................................................................................27
Fault tolerance and redundancy ..................................................................................................29
Access Methods...........................................................................................................................30
Layer 3 functions..........................................................................................................................31
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
Network security ..........................................................................................................................33

Basics...........................................................................................................................................33
Firewalls .......................................................................................................................................33
"Virtual Private Networks" (VPNs) ...............................................................................................35
Cell protection concept ................................................................................................................36
1.5
Switches and switched LANs.......................................................................................................36
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.5
1.6.6
1.6.7
1.6.8
1.6.9
1.6.9.1
1.6.9.2
1.6.10
Wireless LAN ...............................................................................................................................38

What is wireless LAN? .................................................................................................................38
Differences between wireless LAN and wired networks..............................................................38
Preferred areas of application for WLANs ...................................................................................39
The standards of the "IEEE 802.11" series .................................................................................40
IEEE 802.11n ...............................................................................................................................40
Encryption and data security........................................................................................................44
Avoiding collisions in wireless networks ......................................................................................45
Structure of an IWLAN .................................................................................................................46
Network structures .......................................................................................................................47
Infrastructure mode......................................................................................................................47
Ad hoc networks ..........................................................................................................................53
Other wireless technologies.........................................................................................................54
Network structures and network configuration ......................................................................................... 55

2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
Network structures .......................................................................................................................55

Network topologies ......................................................................................................................55
Linear structure ............................................................................................................................55
Star structure................................................................................................................................57
Industrial Ethernet
Table of contents
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
Ring structure.............................................................................................................................. 60
Redundant linking of network segments with electrical and FO components ............................ 62
VLAN ........................................................................................................................................... 64
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
Media redundancy....................................................................................................................... 65
Options of media redundancy ..................................................................................................... 65
Media redundancy in ring topologies .......................................................................................... 65
MRP ............................................................................................................................................ 67
MRPD.......................................................................................................................................... 69
HSR............................................................................................................................................. 69
RNA / PRP .................................................................................................................................. 70
STP / RSTP / MSTP.................................................................................................................... 71
Link aggregation.......................................................................................................................... 72
Examples of applications ......................................................................................................................... 73

3.1
Optimization of a power screwdriver control ............................................................................... 73
3.2
Process automation in hazardous areas..................................................................................... 75
3.3
Automation of gantry cranes ....................................................................................................... 77
3.4
Controlling material transportation with SCALANCE components ............................................. 79
3.5
Crane carriage control for a high-bay warehouse....................................................................... 81
3.6
Connecting a PROFIBUS network to a PROFINET installation ................................................. 83
3.7
Redundant coupled rings with a connection to an office network............................................... 85
3.8
Data protection during mobile communication............................................................................ 87
3.9
Protection of the production network when networking with the office network ......................... 89
3.10
Gigabit network in the pharmaceuticals industry ........................................................................ 91
3.11
Communications components for extreme climatic conditions ................................................... 93
SCALANCE network components............................................................................................................ 95

4.1
Product families........................................................................................................................... 95
4.2
Common properties of all SCALANCE devices .......................................................................... 96
4.3
Web Based Management for configuring networks .................................................................... 98
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.3.1
4.4.3.2
4.4.3.3
4.4.4
4.4.4.1
4.4.4.2
4.4.4.3
4.4.5
4.4.5.1
4.4.5.2
4.4.5.3
SCALANCE X switches and media converters........................................................................... 99

Type designations and properties............................................................................................... 99
Functions of SCALANCE X devices ......................................................................................... 102
SCALANCE X005 ..................................................................................................................... 106
Description ................................................................................................................................ 106
Functions................................................................................................................................... 106
Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 107
SCALANCE XB000 ................................................................................................................... 108
Description ................................................................................................................................ 108
Characteristics .......................................................................................................................... 108
Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 109
SCALANCE X100 unmanaged ................................................................................................. 110
Description ................................................................................................................................ 110
Characteristics .......................................................................................................................... 111
Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 112
Industrial Ethernet
Table of contents
4.4.6
4.4.6.1
4.4.6.2
4.4.6.3
4.4.6.4
4.4.7
4.4.7.1
4.4.7.2
4.4.7.3
4.4.8
4.4.8.1
4.4.8.2
4.4.8.3
4.4.8.4
4.4.9
4.4.9.1
4.4.9.2
4.4.9.3
4.4.9.4
4.4.9.5
4.4.10
4.4.10.1
4.4.10.2
4.4.10.3
SCALANCE X100 media converters .........................................................................................113

Description .................................................................................................................................113
Features and functions ..............................................................................................................114
Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................115
Application examples .................................................................................................................116
SCALANCE X200/X200 IRT ......................................................................................................118
Description .................................................................................................................................118
Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................122
SCALANCE X300 ......................................................................................................................125
Description .................................................................................................................................125
Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................128
Media modules and SFP transceivers .......................................................................................132
SCALANCE X400 ......................................................................................................................134
Description .................................................................................................................................134
Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................137
Media modules...........................................................................................................................138
Extender modules ......................................................................................................................140
SCALANCE X500 ......................................................................................................................142
Description .................................................................................................................................142
Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................145
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.4.1
4.5.4.2
4.5.4.3
4.5.5
4.5.5.1
4.5.5.2
4.5.5.3
4.5.6
4.5.6.1
4.5.6.2
4.5.6.3
4.5.7
4.5.7.1
4.5.7.2
4.5.7.3
4.5.8
4.5.8.1
4.5.8.2
4.5.8.3
4.5.9
4.5.9.1
4.5.9.2
4.5.9.3
SCALANCE W components for Industrial Wireless LAN...........................................................149

SCALANCE W devices ..............................................................................................................149
Type designations......................................................................................................................151
Functions of WLAN devices.......................................................................................................152
SCALANCE W784 .....................................................................................................................155
Description .................................................................................................................................155
Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................158
SCALANCE W786 .....................................................................................................................159
Description .................................................................................................................................159
Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................161
SCALANCE W788-x M12/ -x RJ-45 and client modules ...........................................................163
Description .................................................................................................................................163
Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................165
SCALANCE W788-xPRO/ -xRR and client modules .................................................................167
Description .................................................................................................................................167
Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................169
SCALANCE WLC711, W788C and W786C ..............................................................................171
Description .................................................................................................................................171
Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................174
Antennas ....................................................................................................................................175
How it works...............................................................................................................................175
Product overview .......................................................................................................................177
Area of application .....................................................................................................................181
Industrial Ethernet
Table of contents
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.2.1
4.6.2.2
4.6.3
4.6.3.1
4.6.3.2
4.6.4
4.6.4.1
4.6.4.2
SCALANCE M routers and modems......................................................................................... 184

SCALANCE M devices.............................................................................................................. 184
SCALANCE M873 and M875.................................................................................................... 186
Description ................................................................................................................................ 186
Features and functions.............................................................................................................. 188
SINAUT MD741-1 ..................................................................................................................... 190
Description ................................................................................................................................ 190
SINAUT MD720-3 ..................................................................................................................... 193
Description ................................................................................................................................ 193
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.3.1
4.7.3.2
4.7.3.3
4.7.4
SCALANCE S security module ................................................................................................. 197

SCALANCE S ........................................................................................................................... 197
Functions of SCALANCE S devices ......................................................................................... 199
SCALANCE S602/S612/S623 .................................................................................................. 202
Description ................................................................................................................................ 202
Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 205
SOFTNET Security Client ......................................................................................................... 207
4.8
4.8.1
4.8.2
Network management software ................................................................................................ 210

SINEMA server ......................................................................................................................... 210
Primary Setup Tool ................................................................................................................... 211
4.9
4.9.1
Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 214

C-PLUG Configuration Memory ................................................................................................ 214
Communications processors for PCs..................................................................................................... 217

5.1
CP 1604 .................................................................................................................................... 219
5.2
CP 1616 .................................................................................................................................... 220
5.3
CP 1612 A2............................................................................................................................... 221
5.4
CP 1613 A2............................................................................................................................... 222
5.5
CP 1623 .................................................................................................................................... 223
5.6
CP 1628 .................................................................................................................................... 224
Communications processors for SIMATIC S7........................................................................................ 225

6.1
Communications processors for SIMATIC S7-200 ................................................................... 228
6.2
6.3
6.4
Communications processors for SIMATIC S7-1200 ................................................................. 242
Compact switch module......................................................................................................................... 245

7.1
CSM 377 ................................................................................................................................... 247
7.2
CSM 1277 ................................................................................................................................. 249
7.3
LOGO! CSM.............................................................................................................................. 252
Gateways............................................................................................................................................... 255
8.1
IE/PB Link PN IO....................................................................................................................... 258

Industrial Ethernet
Table of contents
8.2
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO ...............................................................................................................259
8.3
IE/AS-i Link PN IO .....................................................................................................................260
8.4
IE/WSN-PA Link.........................................................................................................................261
8.5
Order no. for gateways ..............................................................................................................262
Passive components and accessories ................................................................................................... 263

9.1
Contacts for special cables and special lengths ........................................................................263
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.3.1
9.2.3.2
9.2.3.3
9.2.3.4
9.2.3.5
9.2.3.6
9.2.3.7
9.2.3.8
9.2.3.9
9.2.3.10
9.2.3.11
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.2.6
9.2.6.1
9.2.6.2
9.2.6.3
9.2.7
9.2.7.1
9.2.7.2
9.2.7.3
9.2.7.4
9.2.7.5
9.2.7.6
9.2.8
9.2.8.1
9.2.8.2
Electrical networks .....................................................................................................................264

Electrical cables .........................................................................................................................264
General ......................................................................................................................................266
IE FC TP cable...........................................................................................................................269
IE FC TP standard cable GP 2x2...............................................................................................271
IE FC TP flexible cable GP 2x2 .................................................................................................272
IE FC TP torsion cable 2x2 ........................................................................................................273
IE FC TP trailing cable 2x2 ........................................................................................................274
IE FC TP trailing cable GP 2x2 ..................................................................................................275
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP 2x2...................................................................................................276
IE FC festoon cable GP 2x2 ......................................................................................................277
IE FC TP food cable 2x2............................................................................................................278
IE FC TP marine cable 2x2 GP..................................................................................................279
IE FC TP flexible cable GP 4x2 .................................................................................................280
IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 4x2 .............................................................................................281
IE connecting cable M12............................................................................................................282
IE Hybrid Cable ..........................................................................................................................284
IE TP cord ..................................................................................................................................286
Introduction to TP cord...............................................................................................................286
IE TP cord 2x2 ...........................................................................................................................286
IE TP cord 4x2 ...........................................................................................................................288
Plugs ..........................................................................................................................................289
IE FC RJ-45 plugs 2x2...............................................................................................................289
IE FC RJ-45 plug 4x2.................................................................................................................292
IE FC RJ-45 plug PRO (push-pull).............................................................................................294
IP 67 hybrid cable connector .....................................................................................................296
IE FC M12 plug PRO 2x2 ..........................................................................................................297
IE FC M12 Plug PRO 4x2 ..........................................................................................................298
Outlets........................................................................................................................................300
IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet .......................................................................................................300
IE FC outlet RJ-45 .....................................................................................................................302
9.3
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.3.1
9.3.3.2
9.3.3.3
9.3.3.4
9.3.3.5
9.3.3.6
9.3.3.7
9.3.3.8
Optical networks ........................................................................................................................304

Optical transmission technology ................................................................................................304
Optical cables.............................................................................................................................305
Glass FO cables ........................................................................................................................306
FOC links ...................................................................................................................................306
SM FO robust cable GP (4E9/125)............................................................................................308
MM FO robust cable GP (2G50/125).........................................................................................309
FO Standard Cable GP 50/125 m............................................................................................310
FO Ground Cable 50/125 m.....................................................................................................312
FO trailing cable 50/125 m.......................................................................................................314
FO FRNC Cable 50/125.............................................................................................................316
FC FO glass fiber-optic cable 62.5/200/230 m ........................................................................318
Industrial Ethernet
Table of contents
9.3.3.9
9.3.3.10
9.3.3.11
9.3.3.12
9.3.3.13
9.3.4
9.3.4.1
9.3.4.2
9.3.4.3
9.3.4.4
9.3.4.5
9.3.4.6
9.3.5
9.3.5.1
9.3.5.2
9.3.5.3
9.3.5.4
9.3.5.5
9.3.5.6
9.3.5.7
INDOOR FO indoor cable 62.5/125 m .................................................................................... 321

Flexible FO trailing cable (62.5/125 m) ................................................................................... 323
SIENOPYR Duplex FiberOptic Marine Cable 62.5/125 m ...................................................... 324
FC FO standard cable GP 62.5/200/230 m ............................................................................ 326
FC FO trailing cable 62.5/200/230 m ...................................................................................... 327
Plastic fiber-optic cables ........................................................................................................... 329
Overview ................................................................................................................................... 329
POF Standard Cable GP 980/1000 .......................................................................................... 329
POF Trailing Cable 980/1000.................................................................................................... 330
PCF standard cable GP 200/230 .............................................................................................. 332
PCF trailing cable 200/230........................................................................................................ 333
PCF trailing cable GP 200/230 ................................................................................................. 334
Plugs ......................................................................................................................................... 336
BFOC plug................................................................................................................................. 336
Single mode FO LC plug........................................................................................................... 337
Multimode FO LC plug .............................................................................................................. 338
FO FC SC plug.......................................................................................................................... 339
FO FC BFOC plug..................................................................................................................... 340
SC RJ plug ................................................................................................................................ 341
IE SC RJ Plug Pro..................................................................................................................... 342
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.1.1
9.4.1.2
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.3.1
9.4.3.2
9.4.3.3
9.4.4
9.4.4.1
9.4.4.2
9.4.4.3
9.4.4.4
Power supply............................................................................................................................. 344

Power cable .............................................................................................................................. 344
Energy cable 2 x 0.75 ............................................................................................................... 344
Energy cable 5 x 1.5 ................................................................................................................. 345
Power connecting cable M12-180/M12-180 ............................................................................. 347
Cable connectors ...................................................................................................................... 348
Power Plug Pro ......................................................................................................................... 348
7/8" plug-in connector ............................................................................................................... 350
Power M12 plug Pro.................................................................................................................. 351
Power supply............................................................................................................................. 352
Power supply PS791-1PRO...................................................................................................... 352
Power M12 cable connector PRO............................................................................................. 354
7/8" Power T-Trap PRO ............................................................................................................ 355
Signaling contact M12 cable connector PRO ........................................................................... 356
Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 359
A.1
Overview of the standards relevant for network installation ..................................................... 359
A.2
Content of the standards........................................................................................................... 361
A.3
Application of the standards...................................................................................................... 362
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 363
Industrial Ethernet
10
Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet

1.1
Terminology
Industrial Ethernet
The term "Industrial Ethernet" covers a series of expansions to the Ethernet standard IEEE
802.3 with which communication suitable for an industrial environment is implemented. The
main aims are as follows:
Deterministic data transmission - guaranteed response times and data rates
Safeguarding against component failure
Network topologies adapted to a particular plant with the emphasis on linear (bus),
redundant network structures.
The components must meet the following requirements:
Equipment designed for industry, for example signaling contacts, protected cables and
connectors
Capability of withstanding extreme environmental conditions, for example extreme
temperatures, vibration, dust, dampness, electromagnetic interference.
PROFINET
PROFINET is the name of the standard for Industrial Ethernet (IEC 61158/61784) developed
and maintained by the PROFIBUS user organization.
PROFINET unites protocols and specifications with which Industrial Ethernet meets the
requirements of industrial automation technology.
These include, for example:
Real-time conditions
Environment strongly affected by EMI
Demanding requirements for safety, reliability and availability.
This world is in stark contrast to an office environment where high data throughput and largearea networking are the main objectives. Further differences between the two network types
can be found in the numbers and heterogeneity of the nodes and their intermeshing.
SIMATIC NET
SIMATIC NET stands for a wide range of network components grouped under the motto
"Totally Integrated Automation" to reflect the modern fully integrated implementation of
automation solutions. PROFINET is the protocol used by SIMATIC NET components within
the framework of Industrial Ethernet.
Industrial Ethernet
11

1.2 Industrial Ethernet
1.2
Industrial Ethernet
1.2.1
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Properties of Industrial Ethernet

Industrial Ethernet is a powerful communication network complying with the international
standard IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet) and was designed for the requirements in an industrial
environment.
Ethernet was developed for the office environment and is subject to certain restrictions due
to its origins. Industrial Ethernet therefore offers significant expansions of the Ethernet
technology for the industrial environment:
Protection of investment by connecting existing fieldbus systems
Network components for use in a tough industrial environment
Rugged and simple connection on-site
FastConnect cabling system with RJ-45 technology
Assembly of POF and PCF fiber-optic cable
High transmission performance even with large numbers of nodes thanks to the end-toend availability of components with 100 Mbps transmission rates complying with Fast
Ethernet and 1000 Mbps with Gigabit Ethernet on all network components.
Ethernet with real-time capability, even "hard real time"
Integrated security concepts for protection against unauthorized access
High availability of the networks thanks to redundant functionality, for example ring
redundancy and redundant power supply
Permanent monitoring of the network components with simple and effective signaling
concept
Almost unlimited communication performance with scalable performance available when
necessary with switching technology.
Networking of different areas of application such as office and production
"Rapid Roaming" in Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN) for extremely fast handover of
mobile nodes between different access points and therefore fast cyclic data
communication (iPCF and iPCF-MC).
Dual client for higher availability.
Communication throughout the enterprise with the options of linking over WAN (Wide
Area Network) such as ISDN or Internet
Precise time stamping of events in the entire system with plant-wide timekeeping
Industrial Ethernet
12

Fast Ethernet
The Fast Ethernet standard IEEE 802.3u is an expansion of the existing standard (IEEE
802.3). Fast Ethernet is based essentially on the classic Ethernet standard for twisted pair
cable.
Ethernet and Fast Ethernet have the following common features:
the CSMA access method
the glass fiber-optic cable used and category 5 twisted pair cables
Fast Ethernet includes the following expansions / modifications:
Data transmission rate up to 100 Mbps
Autosensing, automatic detection of the transmission rate
Autonegotiation, automatic detection of the functionality of the interface of the partner
Full duplex mode
Auto polarity exchange, automatic adaptation of the polarity if the receive cable pair is
incorrectly connected (RD+ and RD-swapped over)
MDI/MDIX autocrossover, prevents malfunctions if transmit and receive cables are
swapped over.
Gigabit Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet is an expansion of the Ethernet specifications to increase the data
transmission rate to 1000 Mbps, 1Gbps or 10 Gbps.
The relevant standards are as follows:
IEEE 802.3z for transfer via glass fiber
IEEE 802.3ab for electrical cable.
The increase in the transmission speed is achieved not only by adaptation of the protocol but
also by using category "5e" or "6" twisted pair cables that are particularly immune to
interference.
Differences compared with PROFINET

PROFINET expands Industrial Ethernet with the following additional properties:
Transmission mode and real-time response:
It can be guaranteed that frames are transferred within a specified time.
Deterministic; put simply:
The same conditions always lead to the same results and there are no undefined
statuses.
See also
Transmission procedures and real-time response (Page 20)
Fault tolerance and redundancy (Page 29)
Access Methods (Page 30)
Industrial Ethernet
13

1.2.2
PROFINET
1.2.2.1
Basics of PROFINET
What is PROFINET?
PROFINET is the innovative and open Industrial Ethernet standard (IEC 61918, for
PROFINET also IEC 61158/61784) for industrial automation.
PROFINET uses the existing IT standards and allows end-to-end communication from the
field level to the management level as well as plant-wide engineering.
Aims of PROFINET
The aims of PROFINET are as follows:
Open Ethernet standard for automation based on Industrial Ethernet.
Industrial Ethernet and standard Ethernet components can be used together, however
Industrial Ethernet devices are more rugged and therefore better suited to an industrial
environment (temperature, noise immunity etc.).
Use of TCP/IP and IT standards
Automation of applications with real-time requirements
Seamless integration of fieldbus systems
PROFINET communication
PROFINET communication is divided into non real time (NRT), real time (RT) and
isochronous real time (IRT) communication, see section "Transmission procedures and realtime response (Page 20)".
PROFINET profiles
PROFINET transfers data transparently. The interpretation of the data is the responsibility of
the user. The profiles are stipulations agreed by manufacturers and users relating to certain
properties, performance characteristics and behavior of devices and systems.
PROFIdrive
The PROFIdrive profile (IEC 61800-7) defines the device behavior and the method of
accessing internal device data for electric drives on PROFIBUS and PROFINET.
The profile describes in detail how the communications functions direct data exchange,
constant bus cycle time and isochronous real time should be used in drive applications. It
also specifies all the device properties that influence the interface to a controller
connected via PROFIBUS or PROFINET. These include the state machine (sequence
control), the encoder interface, the standardization of values, the definition of standard
frames, access to drive parameters etc.
The PROFIdrive profile supports both central and distributed motion control concepts.
Industrial Ethernet
14

PROFIsafe
The PROFIsafe profile (IEC 61508 / EN 954-1) defines how the safety-related devices
achieve fail-safe communication so that they can be used for safety-related applications.
The profile is a software solution that is implemented as an additional layer (PROFIsafe
layer) in the devices (e.g. operating system of the CPU). The safety-relevant data is
included in the frame in addition to the standard data and forms the PROFIsafe frame.
Existing solutions can be expanded without needing to change cabling.
PROFIsafe prevents errors such as address corruption, loss, delay etc when transferring
messages by consecutively numbering the PROFIsafe data, time monitoring, authenticity
monitoring using passwords and optimized CRC protection.
PROFIenergy
With the PROFIenergy profile, individual consumers or entire production units can be
turned off and on. This is coordinated centrally by a higher-level controller; networking is
via PROFINET. During long pauses, this allows as much energy as possible to be saved.
Plant sections that are turned off for a short time contribute to the uniform distribution of
energy and optimum use of energy.
It is also possible to read out measurement variables relating to consumption.
PROFIenergy is defined so that the necessary function blocks can be included easily in
existing automation solutions.
Implementation of PROFINET in SIMATIC

PROFINET is implemented in the SIMATIC products as follows:
Communication between field devices is implemented in SIMATIC with PROFINET IO.
Communication between the controllers as components in distributed systems is
implemented in SIMATIC by PROFINET CBA (Component-Based Automation).
Installation technology and network components are available under the SIMATIC NET
brand name.
For remote maintenance and network diagnostics, the tried and tested IT standards from
the office world are used (e.g. SNMP = Simple Network Management Protocol for
network parameter assignment and diagnostics).
Documentation of PROFINET on the Internet

Numerous publications on the topic of PROFINET can be found at the Internet address
(http://www.profibus.com) of PROFIBUS International.
You will find further information on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/profinet).
See also
PROFINET IO and PROFINET CBA (Page 16)
Industrial Ethernet
15

1.2.2.2
PROFINET IO and PROFINET CBA
What is PROFINET IO?

Within the framework of PROFINET, PROFINET IO is a communications concept for the
implementation of modular, distributed applications.
With PROFINET IO, you create automation solutions in the same way as familiar from
PROFIBUS DP.
Implementation of PROFINET IO is implemented by the PROFINET standard for
programmable controllers (IEC 61158-x-10).
The STEP 7 engineering tool supports you when setting up and configuring an automation
solution.
In STEP 7, you therefore have the same application view regardless of whether you are
configuring PROFINET devices or PROFIBUS devices. The user program looks the same for
PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP. The same function blocks and system status lists are
used (were expanded for PN IO).
What is PROFINET CBA?

Within the framework of PROFINET, PROFINET CBA (Component-Based Automation) is an
automation concept concentrating on the following aspects:
Implementation of modular applications
Machine-machine communication
With PROFINET CBA, you create a distributed automation solution based on off-the-shelf
components and partial solutions. This concept meets the requirements for greater
modularization in mechanical engineering and plant engineering with extensive distribution of
intelligent processing.
With Component-Based Automation, you implement complete technological modules as
standardized components that can be used in large plants.
You create the modular, intelligent components in PROFINET CBA in an engineering tool
that may differ from device manufacturer to device manufacturer. Components made up of
SIMATIC devices are created with STEP 7 and interconnect these with the SIMATIC iMAP
tool.
Interaction between PROFINET IO and PROFINET CBA

PROFINET IO systems can be included in machine-machine communication with the aid of
PROFINET CBA. From a PROFINET IO system, a PROFINET component is created, for
example in STEP 7. With SIMATIC iMAP you can configure plants made up of several such
components. The communications connections between the devices are simply configured
graphically as interconnection lines.
The following figure shows a distributed automation solution with several components that
communicate via PROFINET. The right-hand component contains IO devices and an IO
controller on PROFINET IO.
Industrial Ethernet
16

352),1(7&%$
FRPSRQHQW
6,0$7,&
L0DS
352),1(7
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
352;<
,QWHOOLJHQWILHOG
GHYLFHRQ(WKHUQHW
352),1(7,2
352),%86
&RPSRQHQWZLWK
GLVWULEXWHG,2RQ
(WKHUQHW
&RPSRQHQWZLWK
GLVWULEXWHG,2RQ
352),%86
Figure 1-1
352),1(7
FRPPXQLFDWLRQ
PROFINET CBA - modular concept
Industrial Ethernet
17

Distinction between PROFINET IO and PROFINET CBA

PROFINET IO and CBA are two different views of programmable controllers on Industrial
Ethernet.
352),1(7
,2GDWDYLHZ
352),1(7,2
&RPSRQHQWYLHZ
352),1(7&%$
'LVWULEXWHGLQWHOOLJHQFH
'LVWULEXWHG,2V
3ODQWZLGHHQJLQHHULQJ
8VXDO,2YLHZLQ67(3
3&'
352),1(7&RPSRQHQW'HVFULSWLRQ
*6'
*HQHULF6WDWLRQ'HVFULSWLRQ
,7VWDQGDUGVVWDQGDUGDSSOLFDWLRQV
SURWRFROVFRQWUROOHUHWF
Figure 1-2
Distinction between PROFINET IO and PROFINET CBA
Component-Based Automation divides the entire plant into different functions. These
functions are configured and programmed.
PROFINET IO provides you with an image of the plant that is very similar to the PROFIBUS
view. You continue to configure and program the individual programmable controllers.
1.2.3
SIMATIC NET
SIMATIC NET in the automation world

SIMATIC NET is the product name for networks and network components. The network
solutions of SIMATIC NET are an integral component of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA).
With TIA, Siemens is the only manufacturer to provide a totally integrated basis for
implementing customer-specific automation solutions.
Industrial Ethernet
18

The data can be exchanged between all levels - from the field level to the production
management level right through to the enterprise management level.
The SIMATIC NET network components have uniform system interfaces and are
coordinated with each other. In addition to the previous wired solutions, wireless
communication is gaining ground in industry. SIMATIC NET provides products for enterprisewide transmission of data over local area networks, intranet, Internet or wireless networks.
Telecontrol and
substation
control
Laptop
PC
Remote access,
e.g. via
teleservice
S71200 with
CP12427
Controller
Controller
Control and
monitoring system
Motion Control
Systems
Telecontrol and
substation control
PC/PG/IPC
Database
Server
IWLAN
Controller
Security
Numeric
Control
PROFINET
Industrial Ethernet
Access
Point
Controller
Controller
Notebook
IWLAN
RCoax Cable
PC/PG
Industrial Ethernet
Switches
Access
Point
Controller
PC/PG/IPC
Link
Field device for

intrinsically safe area
Wireless
Devices
Coupler
Link
PROFIBUS PA
RF180C
ASM456
Field devices
Mobile
Panel
Field devices
Code
reading
systems
Drives
RFID
system
SIMOCODE
Access
Point
Link
Power
supply
LOGO!
Sensors
SINAMICS
Field device
Slaves
Slaves
Signalling column
Figure 1-3
G_IK10_XX_50187
Compact feeder
arrangement
Client
Module
Controller
Industrial Ethernet and PROFINET in the SIMATIC NET environment
The distinguishing properties of SIMATIC NET include the following:

Complete integration from the field level to the enterprise level,
Coverage of the field area with Industrial Ethernet,
Promotion of mobile communication,
Integration of the IT technologies.
With these communication network options, SIMATIC products and intelligent devices can
be combined locally according to your requirements. Flexibility and openness of the
standards of SIMATIC communications networks make it possible to link different systems
and to implement extensions.
Thanks to its scalable performance, SIMATIC NET allows the implementation of enterprisewide communication from the simplest device to the complex system. The SIMATIC NET
components used with Industrial Ethernet are particularly powerful. The devices of the
SCALANCE product family represent the latest and most advanced generation of active
SIMATIC NET network components.
Industrial Ethernet
19

Technical requirements
Communications networks are a central component of modern automation solutions.
Industrial networks have to fulfill special requirements, for example:
Linking of automation systems, PCs as well as simple sensors, actuators and computers
Robust against electromagnetic interference, mechanical stress and pollution
Integration of existing systems and expandability
IT communication to integrate modern information technology
Simple cabling technology
Flexible adaptation to the production requirements
Availability of information at any location
Correct transfer of information and at the right time
Integrated diagnostics
Deterministic - no undefined statuses
Fast data exchange between parts of the plant
Integrated security functions preventing unauthorized access
Sale-safe standard communication over the same connection
Industrial networks belong to the LANs (Local Area Networks) and allow communication
within a limited area.
1.2.4
Transmission procedures and real-time response
Overview
Factory automation
Motion Control
PROFINET
Industrial
Ethernet
250 s
TCP/IP
Real-Time
Isochronous Real-Time
G_IK10_XX_30116
100 ms
IT services
Industrial Ethernet
20

Non real-time communication (NRT communication)

The NRT communication is for communication that is not time-critical and corresponds to
communication in Industrial Ethernet using the TCP/IP protocol family. Everything that is
transferred using Industrial Ethernet can also be transferred via PROFINET, for example
HTTP, TCP, UDP, SNMP, ARP.
Real-time communication (RT communication)

Real time means that a system processes external events within a specific time. If the
reaction is predictable, this is known as a deterministic system.
A high data rate alone is no guarantee for real-time response, since delays are possible at
"bottlenecks" in the network. Instead, the network protocol must ensure that time critical
frames are given preferential treatment.
RT communication is suitable for transfer of alarms and cyclic data. Special switches must
be used here. All SIMATIC NET switches are suitable for this. There is, however, not yet any
need for particular communication planning in the form of a special configuration.
In RT communication the cyclic data are transferred between the IO controller and IO device,
however, without the "best possible synchronicity".
Unsynchronized IO devices automatically exchange data using RT communication.
Isochronous real-time communication (IRT communication)

In PROFINET with IRT, communication over Ethernet is divided into individual cycles. Each
cycle consists of two phases, an IRT channel reserved for extremely time-critical data, and
an "open channel", within which RT and non-time critical frames can be sent.
This allows time-critical and uncritical data to be sent on the same connection. At the same
time, however, a certain data rate (and therefore a transmission time) is reserved for the
critical data and real-time capability can therefore be guaranteed.
Properties of isochronous real time
With the implementation of the data transfer procedure IRT in Ethernet controllers, the
ERTEC ASICs (Enhanced Real-Time Ethernet Controller), update times of 250 s and a
jitter accuracy of the transmit clock of less than 1 s can be achieved.
In PROFINET V2.3, the methods fast forwarding, dynamic frame packing and fragmentation
were implemented. With these methods, update times of up to 31.25 s can be reached.
IRT is used in areas with particularly stringent requirements for response times that cannot
be exceeded. This is the case, for example, for motion control applications, which require
reaction and update times in the range of a few milliseconds. Special switches must be used
here. In SIMATIC NET, the suitable switches have "IRT" in their names.
Industrial Ethernet
21

1.3 Technologies of Industrial Ethernet
1.3
Technologies of Industrial Ethernet
1.3.1
Communications media
Selection of media
Industrial Ethernet provides you with three different technologies to solve your automation
task:
Electrical cabling
Fiber-optic cables
Wireless/radio
Guide to selection
The following table shows with of the three communications media is best suited to which
requirements:
Twisted pair network
Fiber-optic network
*
Wireless linking
Suitability for high transmission rates
Inter-building networking
--
EMC
Simple cable installation
1)
Range of cables for special use cases Cables for indoors; trailing cable; Cables for indoors and outdoors;
marine cable, FastConnect
trailing cable; halogen-free cable
cables
--
The effect of failure of a network

section
With a ring, no effect; with simple

structures the network breaks
down into two isolated
subnetworks
With a ring, no effect; with simple

structures the network breaks
down into two isolated
subnetworks
If there are overlapping

wireless cells, the client
roams to another AP
Maximum distance between two

network nodes / access points
100 m
FE (100 Mbps)
Up to several kilometers
depending on the
environmental conditions,
testing with
www.siemens.de/snst
50 m POF
100 m PCF
5000 m multimode
Up to 200 km single mode
GE (1000 Mbps)
750 m multimode
120 km single mode
10 GE (10000 Mbps)
Preassembled cables
Redundant network structures
750 m multimode
40 km single mode
yes
yes
electrical ring or duplication of

the infrastructure (bus, star, tree)
electrical ring or duplication of the

infrastructure (bus, star, tree)
-Dual client
Suitable
* Suitable to some extent
-- Not suitable / not relevant
1) Longer distances possible
Industrial Ethernet
22

1.3.2
Active and passive network components
Active and passive network components

Industrial Ethernet networks are created using active and passive network components:
Active network components are for example switches, access points, client modules,
media converters and link modules.
Passive network components are, for example, power cables and plug connectors.
The following tables contain a selection of network components for PROFINET/Industrial
Ethernet.
Table 1- 1
Active network components for PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet

Components
Remarks
SCALANCE X switches
To interconnect nodes on Industrial

Ethernet and to set up networks with more
complex topologies
PN/IO Link
Used to couple PROFINET to PROFIBUS
SCALANCE S
"Security Module" to secure networks

against unauthorized access
Media and extender modules
To expand the functionality of

SCALANCE X switches
Fiber-optic cable
(optical)
SCALANCE X switches
see above
Radio
(wireless)
SCALANCE W access point and

client modules
Components for wireless transmission of

Ethernet
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO
For wireless coupling of Industrial Ethernet

to PROFIBUS DP
SCALANCE M
For the wireless linking of Industrial

Ethernet-based programmable controllers
on the UMTS/GSM mobile wireless
network
Copper
(electrical)
Industrial Ethernet
23

Table 1- 2
Passive network components for PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet
Medium
Connectors
Cable type / transmission medium

Standard
Copper
(electrical)
RJ-45 cable connector Two-pair, symmetrical and shielded copper cable

ISO/IEC 61754-24
IEC 61158
IE FC RJ-45 plug
IE FC TP standard cable GP 2x2
90/145/180
IE FC TP flexible cable GP 2x2
M12 cable connector
IE FC TP trailing cable GP 2x2
D-coded
IE TP torsion cable GP 2x2
IE FC TP trailing cable 2x2
IE FC TP marine cable 2x2
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP 2x2
Fiber-optic cable
(optical)
SC RJ plug
ISO/IEC 61754-24
POF FO cable (Plastic Optical Fiber)

ISO/IEC 60793-2-40
PCF FO cable (Plastic Cladded Fiber)
ISO/IEC 60793-2-30
PCF standard cable GP
PCF trailing cable
PCF trailing cable GP (for SC RJ plug)
BFOC (Bayonet Fiber

Optic Connector)
ISO/IEC 60874-10
SC plug
ISO/IEC 60874-14
Glass fiber cable - multimode fiber (62.5/125 m)

ISO/IEC 60793-2-10
Fiber-optic standard cable
INDOOR fiber-optic indoor cable
Flexible fiber-optic trailing cable
SIENOPYR shipping duplex FO cable (for BFOC
connectors)
Glass fiber cable - multimode fiber (50/125 m)
ISO/IEC 60793-2-10
FO standard cable GP
FO trailing cable
FO trailing cable GP
FO ground cable (for BFOC and SC connectors)
Radio
(wireless)
N-Connect
IEEE 802.11
R-SMA
IWLAN N-Connect/R-SMA male/male
SMA
IWLAN N-Connect male/male
QMA
IWLAN QMA/N-Connect male/female

IWLAN R-SMA/SMA male/male
Industrial Ethernet
24

Note
Cable assembly
FastConnect cables can be assembled particularly fast and simply on site. This means that
RJ-45 cabling technology, an existing standard, is also available in a version suitable for
industry.
Product overview
You will find detailed overview of the available modules and accessories in the chapters 4 8.
Passive components for Industrial Ethernet and accessories

You will find an overview of the passive components and other accessories in chapter 9
Passive components and accessories (Page 263).
Passive components for IWLAN

You will find detailed overview of the passive components in the "Passive network
components IWLAN" system manual.
See also
SCALANCE X switches and media converters (Page 99)
SCALANCE W components for Industrial Wireless LAN (Page 149)
SCALANCE M routers and modems (Page 184)
SCALANCE S security module (Page 197)
Communications processors for PCs (Page 217)
Communications processors for SIMATIC S7 (Page 225)
Compact switch module (Page 245)
Electrical networks (Page 264)
Optical networks (Page 304)
Power supply (Page 344)
Accessories (Page 214)
Industrial Ethernet
25

1.3.3
Management functions
SNMP
With the aid of Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), you can monitor and control
the network elements (e.g. routers, servers, switches, printers, computers etc) from a central
station. SNMP controls the communication between the monitored devices and the
monitoring station.
SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c
In versions v1 and v2c, SNMP has no security mechanisms. Each user in the network can
access data and also change parameter assignments using suitable software.
For the simple control of access rights without security aspects, community strings are used.
The community string is transferred along with a query. If the community string is correct, the
SNMP agent responds and sends the requested data. If the community string is not correct,
the SNMP agent discards the query.
SNMP data packets are not encrypted and can easily be read by others. The monitoring is
handled by "SNMP agents". SNMP agents are programs that execute on the devices to be
monitored and send SNMP data packets to an SNMP manager. The data is described in a
Management Information Base (MIB). The RFC 1213 document contains the definition of the
MIB-2 important for SNMP.
SNMP v3
Compared with the previous versions SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c, SNMP v3 introduces a
comprehensive security concept.
SNMP v3 supports
Fully encrypted user authentication
Encryption of the entire data traffic
Access control of the MIB objects at the user/group level
Note
To further improve security, separate the administration network from the remaining
network as a separate unit if this is possible.
DynDNS
Dynamic Domain Name Servers (DynDNS) allow applications to be reached on the Internet
using a host name, for example myHost.org. Even if these applications do not have a fixed
IP address and the host name is not registered. If, for example, you register a SCALANCE
device for a DynDNS service, you can reach the device from the external network using a
host name, for example SCALANCE.dyndns.org.
Industrial Ethernet
26

1.3.4
Power over Ethernet
Power supply via the Ethernet cable

In the IEEE 802.3af/at standard, the option of supplying devices with direct current was
standardized. To achieve this, either the wire pairs of the network cable not used for data
transfer are used or the supply voltage is modulated onto the data lines (phantom power).
The supply voltage and the load specified in the 802.3af standard differs from the 802.3at
standard. The standards are abbreviated as PoE or PoE plus.
The following voltages or power are available:
Table 1- 3
PoE parameters
Characteristic
802.3af (also 802.3at type 1 or PoE)
802.3at type 2 (also PoE plus)
Power available on the powered device 12.95 W

(PD)
25.50 W
Maximum power output of the power

sourcing equipment (PSE)
15.40 W
34.20 W
Voltage range on the power sourcing

equipment (PSE)
44.0-57.0 V
50.0-57.0 V
Voltage range on the end device (PD)
37.0-57.0 V
42.5-57.0 V
Maximum current flow
350 mA
600 mA per node
Maximum cable resistance
20 (category 3)
12.5 (category 5)
Power management
When the connection is first

established, 3 power classes are
negotiated
When the connection is first

established, 4 power classes are
negotiated or there is continuous
negotiation in steps of 0.1 W
Reduction of the maximum operating

temperature of the cable
None
5 C for an active mode (2 pairs)
Supported cable types
CAT 3 and CAT 5
CAT 5, CAT 5e, CAT 6
Supported modes
Mode A (endspan), mode B (midspan)
Mode A (endspan), mode B (midspan)
Industrial Ethernet
27

Modes
Mode A
Phantom power via the data wires with
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Mode B
Power supplied via the unused wires with
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX
In both cases, a 4-pair Ethernet cable is required since the contacts 4-5 and 7-8 are used
for power supply. All CAT 5 and CAT 5e cables meet these requirements.
Safety circuit to protect devices without PoE capability

To ensure that you do not damage any devices without PoE capability by using PoE or PoE
plus, a safety circuit is defined:
If the PSE identifies a resistance of 25 k between the power wires, the end device is
capable of PoE. The power is slowly increased by the PSE.
If the PSE detects other resistance values, the power is not increased or it is turned off.
Classification of the power sourcing equipment (PSE)

Endspan
With endspan, the power is supplied via a switch that can reach a device over an
Ethernet cable. The switch must be capable of PoE. The two modes can be used in
parallel if the devices with PoE capability support this.
Midspan
Midspan is used when the switch is not PoE-compliant. The power is supplied by an
additional device between the switch and end device. In this case, only data rates of
10/100 Mbps can be achieved because the power is supplied on redundant wires.
SIMATIC NET devices with PoE

Various devices of the SCALANCE W and SCALANCE X series are capable of PoE.
PoE according to 802.3af (also 802.3 type 1)
X108PoE (PSE)
X308-2M PoE, XR300 PoE (PSE)
W7xx PRO and W7xx RR (PD)
PoE plus according to IEEE 802.3at type 2
XR500 (PSE)
W7xx RJ-45 and W700 M12 (PD)
Industrial Ethernet
28

1.3.5
Fault tolerance and redundancy
Overview
Fault-tolerant systems are designed to reduce production downtime. Availability can be
enhanced, for example, by means of component redundancy. Communication systems are
thus extended to automation systems.
Redundant systems in industrial Ethernet are characterized by the multiple (redundant)
presence of important automation components. When a redundant component fails,
processing of the program is not interrupted.
Redundancy is achieved by duplicating the part components such as CPU, network, CP, etc.
Monitoring and synchronization mechanisms ensure that if the active redundant connection
path fails, the previously passive (redundant) connection path takes over the communication
automatically. The connection itself remains established.
Redundant connection of several rings

The following graphic illustrates the principle of fault tolerance based on a network consisting
of several optical (yellow) and electrical (yellow) rings. The interconnection of the rings is
redundant.
Figure 1-4
Optical and electric ring linked redundantly by SCALANCE X
The secondary rings (at the bottom) are connected redundantly with the main ring (at the
top): Of the two connections, one is inactive and is only activated when the other fails.
Industrial Ethernet
29

1.3.6
Access Methods
Switching mechanisms
PROFINET is based consistently on Fast Ethernet at 100 Mbps and on switch mechanisms
and has further developed this technology for real-time applications.
Compared with other methods this has the advantage that each node can send at any time
since it always has a free point-to-point connection to the next switch. The connection is
bidirectional. The nodes can send and receive in both directions at the same time (full
duplex).
Switches in SIMATIC meet real-time requirements with PROFINET using two transmission
techniques: "Store and Forward" and "Cut through".
Store and forward

With the transmission technique "Store and Forward", the switch stores the frames and then
places them in a queue. The frames are now forwarded selectively to the port that has
access to the addressed node.
If the device supports the international standard IEEE 802.1Q, the frames are sorted into
different queues depending on their priority. The frames with the highest priority are
processed first.
Advantage
With the "Store and Forward" transmission technique, the frames are checked for their
correctness and validity. This prevents bad or damaged frames being distributed through the
network.
Cut through
With the transmission technique "Cut Through", the entire frame is not stored temporarily in
a buffer but is forwarded directly to the target port as soon as the first 6 bytes (destination
address) have been read and the destination port has been identified.
The times that the data packet requires to pass through the switch are minimal and not
dependent on the frame length. The data is only stored temporarily using the store and
forward mechanism according to its priority when the section between the target part and the
port of the next switch is in use.
With PROFINET switches, Cut Through is implemented by using ERTEC ASICs, for
example in the SCALANCE IRT switches.
See also
Switches and switched LANs (Page 36)
Industrial Ethernet
30

1.3.7
Layer 3 functions
Introduction
The term layer 3 function effectively means routing. The term routing describes the
specification of paths (routes) for communication between different networks. This decides
how a data packet travels from subnet A to subnet B.
Devices with layer 3 functionality are also known as layer 3 switches. Layer 3 switches can
operate both at OSI layer 2 (MAC address) or at OSI layer 3 (IP address).
A layer 3 switch can assign various subnets to its ports, e.g. subnet A and subnet B. This
allows large networks to be divided into smaller subnets with their own address space.
Reasons for dividing into subnets include, for example, the separation of the Ethernet
network to reduce data traffic, the separation of sensitive areas from the main network and
the division of the network into logical workgroups.
The data packets are forwarded either using the Cut Through or the Store and Forward
technique.
Static routing
In static routing, the paths that a data packet can take are entered permanently (statically) in
the routing table.
Dynamic routing
With dynamic routing, the paths that a data packet can take are identified dynamically
between the routers involved, see also "Dynamic routing with OSPF".
Router redundancy with VRRP

With the aid of the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol the failure of a router in a network
can be countered. VRRP, for example, provides the option of setting up device redundancy
for the default gateway of the end devices.
Several physical routers in a network segment are grouped together to form a logical group.
A virtual MAC and IP address then apply for this area. One router of this group is made
master. This master adopts the virtual MAC and IP address of the area. The other routers of
this group are then backup routers. If the master fails, another router from the group takes
over the virtual MAC and IP address and the tasks of the failed router. This means that the
network area affected can continue to communicate with the outside world. The network
segment can no longer be reached only after the failure of the last router in the group. Due to
the backup router adopting the virtual MAC and IP address, no other actions are necessary
for the other routers in the area of the segment. Routing tables or the ARP cache do not
need to be updated. This minimizes the consequences of device failure.
Industrial Ethernet
31

Dynamic routing with OSPFv2

Open Short Path First is a routing protocol developed by the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF). With OSPF, CIDR (Classless Inter-Domain Routing) and VLSM (Variable
Length Subnet Mask) are also implemented.
The routers setup a, neighborhood database (LSDB = Link State DataBase). The
neighborhood database is the heart of OSPF and contains information on the topology of the
network.
To set up the neighborhood database, the router needs to learn its direct neighbor routers.
To do this, the router sends out Hello packets following initialization. The neighbor routers
exchange packets (LSA - Link State Advertisements) that describe the content of their
database. When the exchange of information with the neighbor router is completed the
neighborhood database of the neighbor routers is the same.
The neighborhood database is used to calculate routes based on the SPF algorithm
(Shortest Path First). The algorithm creates a hierarchical tree structure (Shortest Path Tree)
in which each destination with the shortest (loop-free) and lowest cost route is entered. The
algorithm uses the costs of the path as a metric. What is used to calculate the costs is not
defined. The costs can be, for example, the data rate of the connection or the reliability of the
connection. The entries from the tree are adopted in the routing table. If several routes with
the same costs exist for a destination, the data is transferred via different routes to achieve
load distribution.
The routers continuously test the state of the connection between themselves by exchanging
Hello packets. If a connection is disrupted, the router sends a message to its neighbor
router. The neighbor router updates its database and sends the message to its neighbor
router and so on until the modification has passed through the entire network.
To limit the size of the routing table, OSPF can divide a network (autonomous system) into
hierarchical areas. Each area has its own neighborhood database and its own shortest path
tree.
By dividing into areas, if there is change in the topology, the entire network is not loaded with
messages so that OSPF manages with relatively low overheads.
If several neighbor routers can be reached in an area, the designated router (DR) and the
backup designated router (BDR) are identified based on Hello packets. By identifying the
designated router, the topology is simplified. The designated router then sends the message.
To send a frame from area 1 to area 2, the frame is first sent to the area border router (ABR)
of area 1. The ABR connects its area to the backbone area. The ABR of area 1 sends the
frame to the router in the backbone area that forwards the frame to the ABR of area 2. The
backbone area (area 0) is used to distribute routing information about the reachability of
areas between area border routers. A frame is sent to another AS via an Autonomous
System Area Border Router (ASBR). On the ASBR, one interface is connected to another
AS, for example an AS that uses the RIP routing protocol.
With OSPF, messages can be authenticated. Only trustworthy routers can take part in the
routing with OSPF.
Industrial Ethernet
32

1.4 Network security
1.4
Network security
1.4.1
Basics
Security in automation technology

In principle, the security of every network with a connection to the outside world is at risk of
being compromised. Attacks from the outside can take the form of widespread viruses or
other malware, but may also involve sabotage or data espionage with an attacker
deliberately attempting to take control of a network or to access relevant information.
The potential damage caused by such an attack (if it succeeds) is high and can involve not
only serious production and machine downtimes but also a loss of customer confidence.
Security of the networks should therefore always be given high priority, even more so today
because island solutions are no longer practicable and automation networks normally also
require access to the Internet.
1.4.2
Firewalls
"Gatekeeper" function
Put simply, a firewall is a device or a software application inserted between the network and
the outside world as a "gatekeeper" to protect the network. The firewall represents the only
access to the local area network from outside and the entire data traffic crossing the
boundaries of the network is directed via the firewall. This means that the firewall can block
unwanted and potentially dangerous access from the outside. Various techniques are
available.
Packet filter
A packet filter inspects data packets entering or leaving the network, their sender and
receiver addresses and the "port", or service, to which the data packet will be transferred.
Such services might be E-mail, file transfer with FTP, database access, SSH for encrypted
transfer etc.
Filter rules stored in the firewall now block the access to certain addresses or certain
services. Firewalls can implement complex filter rules in which, for example, service "A" is
available only for IP addresses "B" and "C" but is not allowed for other communications
partners.
Industrial Ethernet
33

"Stateful Inspection"
"Stateful Inspection" goes a step further than the packet filter and takes into consideration
the "context" within the communication in addition to the addresses and ports.
In concrete terms, this means, for example, that Web pages sent be an external server to an
internal computer can only pass through the firewall if the internal computer has actually
requested this page.
Such techniques are, for example, relevant for preventing "Denial of Service" attacks (DoS)
in which an external intruder sends queries to the computer under attack from numerous
computers at the same time in the hope of overloading and paralyzing the network. Since,
however, the stateful inspection detects these illegitimate queries at the boundary of the
local area network, local traffic continues unaffected by the DoS attacks.
"Network Address Translation" (NAT)

"Network Address Translation" ("NAT") is a function with which a router replaces the
addresses of the local nodes involved in data traffic with its own IP address whenever the
traffic goes beyond the network boundaries. Incoming replies are only assigned to the actual
addressees with their IP addresses after passing the firewall.
This mechanism can be used for ergonomic reasons since to the outside only one single IP
address is required for any number of local nodes.
It does, however, also provide a certain protection from attacks since only one single
address is visible to the outside namely that of the firewall. A "naive" attack would always be
aimed at the firewall directly and not at the local computers being protected behind it.
"Network Address Port Translation" (NAPT)

Compared with NAT, NAPT goes one step further. With NAPT, in addition to the IP
addresses, the ports of the local nodes are also replaced. Incoming replies are then
assigned back to the corresponding IP addresses and ports of the local nodes.
"Personal firewalls"
For professional applications, the firewalls normally used are separate devices. The
alternative to these devices are "personal firewalls" in the form of software running on the
target computers themselves.
Personal firewalls cannot, however, provide the same security as dedicated devices. Errors
in the operating system or badly programmed or configured personal firewalls allow an
attacker to avoid the "gatekeeper" filter function and to attack the target computer or target
network despite the firewall.
Industrial Ethernet
34

1.4.3
"Virtual Private Networks" (VPNs)
The function of Virtual Private Networks

A VPN means that a public network is used to transfer private data by "embedding" the
private communication in the traffic of the public network.
The nodes of the VPN have the impression that they are connected directly to each other.
They are not aware of the intermediate steps inserted in the transmission via the public
network. For this reason, the mechanisms are known as "tunneling" through the public
network. Using VPNs, for example, two subnets at a considerable physical distance from
each other can be connected so that the users can address them as one unit.
Security of VPNs
The term "private" relates primarily to the use of VPNs and not to the confidentiality of the
data: VPNs are not automatically secure since the data traffic is not encrypted from the very
beginning. If, however, suitable encryption techniques are used, communication via the VPN
is practically safe from eavesdropping.
See also
Encryption and data security (Page 44)
Industrial Ethernet
35

1.5 Switches and switched LANs
1.4.4
Cell protection concept
Basics
With the cell protection concept, a plant network is divided into individual protected
automation cells to ensure security for the automation systems; within these cells, all the
devices can communicate securely with each other. In the sense of the cell protection
concept, production units, for example, are worthy of protecting.
The following graphic illustrates this. A production cell is protected from unauthorized access
from the remaining enterprise network by a SCALANCE S firewall.
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE XR324-12M
SCALANCE S612
SIMATIC S7-1200
Figure 1-5
1.5
G_IK10_XX_10296
Automation cell
Cell protection concept
Switches and switched LANs

If a network needs to be divided into several (logical and physical) subunits, switches are
used at the connection points of the network sections.
Switches are active components that can receive and send at several ports independently.
There are equipped with intelligence that allows them to forward received messages only via
the port connected to the segment in which the actual addressee is located. This can be
connected directly to the port or via a further switch.
Since all direct connections are point-to-point and since the medium used allows full duplex
communication, it is no longer possible for collisions to occur.
Industrial Ethernet
36

1.5 Switches and switched LANs
Switched connection paths: "Shared LANs" and "Switched LANs"

"Shared LANs" are networks on which a message being transmitted blocks the network for
all other nodes; in other words, there can only be one sender at any one time. A wireless
network is a simple example of such a shared LAN.
"Switched LANs" are set up using switches and are characterized by the connection paths
for each data packet being switched based on the target address. Different data packets can
be in transit in the network at the same time on different connection paths. The data packets
only run through segments that lead to the recipient. All the SCALANCE X products belong
to the products that operate according to the switching method and therefore create
"switched LANs".
Functions of switches
Essentially, switches have the following functions:
Connection of subnets
Switches connect several collision domains. This allows extensive networks to be set up
with numerous nodes and simplifies network expansion. The distances achieved depend
on the fiber-optic interfaces used in the devices and the FOR fibers used. You will find
information about the distances that can be covered in the section "Passive components
and accessories (Page 263)".
Containing load
By filtering the data traffic based on the Ethernet (MAC) addresses, local data traffic
remains local. The data is distributed to all ports/network nodes using the direct switching
method. Only data intended for nodes in other sublets is switched from the input port to
the appropriate output port of the switch. To make this possible, a table assigning
Ethernet (MAC) addresses to output ports is created by the switch in a "teach-in" mode.
Limitation of errors to the network segment affected
By checking the validity of a data packet on the basis of the checksum which each data
packet contains, the switch ensures that bad data packets are not transported further.
Collisions in one network segment are not passed on to other segments.
Advantages of switched LANs

The advantages of such switched LANs are:
Good performance (since the messages only block the sections of cable actually between
the sender and receiver),
Avoidance of data collisions because the sender does not block the entire network
High availability particularly in topologies that include redundancy,
If a connection path is blocked in a redundant topology (due to a cable break or
component failure), switches can still redirect the messages over an alternative path and
maintain communication. A network with a ring topology (see below) is a classic example
of using switches in this way.
Option of forming subnets and network segments,
Simple rules for network configuration,
Simple, expansion is possible without affecting the existing network.
Industrial Ethernet
37

1.6 Wireless LAN
Application example: Redundant ring

Using an IE switch as the redundancy manager in a ring with redundancy manager
(Page 60) provides greater availability. If there is an interruption on the connection between
these switches, the IE switch used as redundancy manager acts like a switch and in a very
short time creates a line (bus) from the ring. As a result, a functional, end-to-end structure is
restored.
1.6
Wireless LAN
1.6.1
What is wireless LAN?
WLAN
A wireless LAN or WLAN is a "Wireless Local Area Network"; in other words a network
based on wireless covering a limited area. WLAN is based on the IEEE 802.11 standard.
IWLAN
The Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN) technology is a further development of WLAN for
industrial applications. In contrast to WLAN, IWLAN provides predictable data traffic
(deterministic) and defines response times for high-speed applications. This makes it
possible to transfer process-critical data, for example alarms. By implementing a wireless
solution, you can replace hard-wired connections that are subject to natural wear and tear,
for example contact conductors. Use cases for wireless solutions such as overhead
monorails, driverless transport systems or user-specific operator control and maintenance
devices.
To protect data traffic, rugged and immune modules are used on the one hand and on the
other hand the data is encrypted.
1.6.2
Differences between wireless LAN and wired networks
Cable as opposed to radio waves

The use of cables and wires for communication has certain advantages because this makes
an exclusive medium available:
The transmission properties in a hard-wired network are defined and remain the same as
long as the cable, routers or similar are not replaced. Since a wired network is limited in
locality, it is possible to recognize at any time which nodes are connected to a LAN (Local
Area Network) and which are not.
Industrial Ethernet
38

1.6 Wireless LAN
On the other hand, the effort and cost of cabling increases with the number of nodes and, at
the same time, the potential for broken cables and other hardware faults. Finally,
communication with freely moving nodes using wired methods is practicable only in
exceptional situations. Wireless links also allow sections to be covered that would be
problematic using cables, for example roads, water.
In these situations, wireless networks are an advantage. The advantage is in the mobility of
the individual components and their flexible use.
"Wireless" as such is a limited resource. Due to its nature as a "shared medium" it is not
possible to increase the capacity as would be possible, for example, by simply laying more
cable. This means that with the increasing number of nodes, the effective data rate that can
be reached by the individual nodes sinks.
Complexity of the RF field

Radio waves propagate through space are and deflected by obstacles or weakened when
passing through. This means that an RF field with a complex structure is created that
changes when the obstacles move. The area illuminated by one or more transmitters is not
sharply defined. There is also no clear delineation of the RF field and the transmission
characteristics of the individual nodes in the wireless network fluctuate depending on their
position. Lastly, it is also practically impossible to detect a "silent listener" in a wireless
network.
These properties need to be taken into account in terms of the reliability of the wireless link
and the security of a network against eavesdropping and immunity to interference. Wireless
networks are, however, just as reliable, secure and resilient as hard-wired networks if trained
employees are deployed who are aware of the particular demands of a wireless network.
1.6.3
Preferred areas of application for WLANs
Preferred areas of application

In many environments, their special qualities make wireless networks the preferred, and in
some cases only practical medium.
These include:
Connection of mobile nodes both among themselves and with stationary nodes,
Connection of mobile nodes with wired networks (Ethernet etc.),
Contact with rotating nodes (cranes, carousels, ...),
Connection of nodes with restricted mobility (monorail suspension tracks, high-bay
storage racks, ...), as a replacement for slip contacts or trailing cables,
Establishing wireless bridges between physically separate wired subnets (different
buildings, across streets, over water, ...),
Communication with nodes in inaccessible areas.
Industrial Ethernet
39

1.6 Wireless LAN
1.6.4
The standards of the "IEEE 802.11" series
Standardization of WLANs
IEEE
The acronym "IEEE" stands for the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, an
organization that has taken on the task of developing, publishing and promoting electronic
and electrotechnical standards and that can be compared in some ways with DIN.
The IEEE 802.11 group

Under the project number "802", a number of working groups were given the task of
developing standards for setting up and operating networks. A known example is the "802.3"
working group that is concerned with the standards for Ethernet connections.
The "802.11" working group concentrates on the specifications for wireless LAN, the IEEE
802.11 standard. The most important expansions of the standard are "802.11 a/h", "802.11
b/g" and "802.11n".
"802.11" standards
The following table provides an overview of the features of the individual standards.
802.11 "a"/"h"
802.11 "b"
802.11 "g"
802.11 "n"
Frequency band
5 GHz
2.4 GHz
2.4 GHz
2.4 GHz + 5 GHz
Gross data rate
54 Mbps
11 Mbps
54 Mbps
600 Mbps
OFDM
DSSS
OFDM
MIMO
Modulation
Expansions of the 802.11 standard include the following:

802.11 "e": Introduces QoS to provide better support for real-time applications (VoIP,
streaming),
802.11 "i": Replaces the no longer tenable WEP encryption mechanism with WPA or
WPA2.
802.11 "p": Introduces WLAN technology for motor vehicles with which an interface for
applications involving intelligent traffic systems is created.
1.6.5
IEEE 802.11n
The standard IEEE 802.11n is an expansion of the 802.11 standard and was approved in
2009.
Previous Standards worked either in the 2.4 GHz frequency band (IEEE 802.11g /b) or in the
5 GHz frequency band (IEEE 802.11a). IEEE 802.11n can operate in both frequency band.
In the IEEE 802.11n standard, there are mechanisms implemented in PHY and MAC layers
that increase the data throughput and improve the wireless coverage.
Industrial Ethernet
40

1.6 Wireless LAN
With SCALANCE W700 devices, a data throughput up to 450 Mbps (gross) is possible due
to support of the following mechanisms. This maximum data throughput is possible only if
the mechanisms are used at the same time.
MIMO antenna technology

MIMO (Multiple Input - Multiple Output) is based on an intelligent multiple antenna system.
The transmitter and the receiver have several spatially separate antennas. The spatially
separate antennas transmit the data streams at the same time. Up to four data streams are
possible. The data streams are transmitted over spatially separate paths and return over
different paths due to diffraction, refraction, fading and reflection (multipath propagation).
The multipath propagation means that at the point of reception a complex, space- and timedependent pattern results as a total signal made up of the individual signals sent. MIMO
uses this unique pattern by detecting the spatial position of characteristic signals. Here, each
spatial position is different from the neighboring position. By characterizing the individual
senders, the recipient is capable of separating several signals from each other.
Access Point
SCALANCE
W788-1 M12
Wall
Client
SCALANCE
W748-1 M12
Data stream
G_IK10_XX_30305
Cabinet
Maximum ratio combining (MRC)

In a multiple antenna system, the wireless signals are received by the individual antennas
and combined to form one signal. The MRC method is used to combine the wireless signals.
The MRC method weights the wireless signals according to their signal-to-noise ratio and
combines the wireless signals to form one signal. The signal-to-noise ratio is improved and
the error rate is reduced.
Industrial Ethernet
41

1.6 Wireless LAN
Spatial mutliplexing
With spatial multiplexing, the data to be transmitted can be distributed over several
transmitting antennas according to specified rules. The devices currently use a maximum of
three antennas. The data stream is therefore divided among three transmitting antennas. As
a result different data streams are transferred at the same time over three transmission
paths. This allows the data throughput to be greatly increased. The spatially differing data
streams are known as spatial streams. The number of spatial streams specified for an
IWLAN (Industrial WLAN) is a measure of the transmission rate. Per data stream, a
maximum of 150 Mbps is transferred according to IEEE 802.11n. With four antennas and
four data streams, this results in a maximum of 600 Mbps and with three antennas and three
data streams 450 Mbps. Ideally the net data throughput is then somewhere higher than 200
Mbps which means a net transmission rate almost ten times higher than conventional WLAN
standards.
Client
SCALANCE
W748-1 M12
Data stream 1
Data stream 2
Data stream 3
G_IK10_XX_30304
Access Point
SCALANCE
W788-1 M12
Industrial Ethernet
42

1.6 Wireless LAN
Channel bonding
With IEEE 802.11n, data can be transferred via two directly neighboring channels. The two
20 MHz channels are put together to form one channel with 40 MHz. This allows the channel
bandwidth to be doubled and the data throughput to be increased.
To be able to use channel bonding, the recipient must support 40 MHz transmissions. If the
recipient does not support 40 MHz transmissions, the band is automatically reduced to 20
MHz. This means that an IEEE 802.11n access point can communicate within the network
with 802.11a/b/g/h and with 802.11n products.
Communication according to IEEE 802.11a /b/g/h standard
SCALANCE
W788-1PRO
SCALANCE
W746-1PRO
2 x 20 MHz channels
Maximum data rate: 54 Mbps
Communication according to IEEE 802.11n standard
SCALANCE
W788-1 M12
SCALANCE
W748-1 M12
1 x 40 MHz channel
Maximum data rate: 450 Mbps
Frame aggregation
With IEEE 802.11n, it is possible to group together individual data packets to form a single
larger packet; this is known as frame aggregation. There are two types of frame aggregation:
Aggregated MAC Protocol Data Unit (A-MPDU) and Aggregated MAC Service Data Unit (AMSDU).
The frame aggregation reduces the packet overheads. Frame aggregation can only be used
if the individual data packets are intended for the same receiving station (client).
Accelerated guard interval

The guard interval prevents different transmissions being mixed together. In
telecommunications, the guard interval is also as intersymbol interference (ISI).
The guard interval of IEEE 802.11a /b/g is 800 ns. IEEE 802.11n can use the reduced guard
interval of 400 ns.
Industrial Ethernet
43

1.6 Wireless LAN
1.6.6
Encryption and data security
WPA2 and AES ("Advanced Encryption Standard")

WPA2 is recognized today as a standard and differs from WPA essentially in its encryption
method: The weaknesses identified in WPA no longer exist in the AES method used in
WPA2.
If a "sensible" passwords are selected that it are adequately long and cannot be guessed,
messages encrypted with AES are considered proof against eavesdropping with the current
state of the art (Spring 2007).
WPA ("Wi-Fi Protected Access")

WPA is the further development of WEP. Apart from technical modifications in the actual
encryption algorithm, the protocol was also adapted:
Passwords for network access (authentication) are stored on a central server
("RADIUS"),
The key for frame transmission changes dynamically making statistical attacks more
difficult,
The MAC address is worked into the key (in other words, unique hardware identification)
of the sender making it more difficult to falsify the sender of the message.
WEP ("Wired Equivalent Privacy")

WEP is the oldest and at the same time the least secure encryption method with which
WLAN transmission is protected against unauthorized intruders according to the 802.11
standard.
With this method, a user password is used as a key from which a series of pseudo random
numbers is generated. Each character of the frame to be transmitted is then encoded with
next number of this series and decoded at the receiver.
Today, WEP is considered insufficiently secure.
EAP ("Extensible Authentication Protocol")

The acronym EAP covers a wide framework of different authentication mechanisms for
network access. In other words, EAP is not an authentication method itself but describes the
mechanism according to which the client and server can agree on a method.
Industrial Ethernet
44

1.6 Wireless LAN
1.6.7
Avoiding collisions in wireless networks
CSMA/CA with RTS/CTS

Ethernet uses the bus access method CSMA/CD. This acronym stands for Carrier Sense
Multiple Access with Collision Detection. After the node that is ready to send has listened to
the cable and recognized that it is free (Carrier Sense, CS), the data is sent.
The sending node can detect a collision (Collision Detection, CD) when other nodes are
sending at the same time (Multiple Access, MA) based on a disrupted level and then back
off.
This mechanism is used in just the same way in a wireless network apart from the fact that
collisions are deliberately avoided (Collision Avoidance, CA) to avoid reducing the net data
throughput unnecessarily. For this reason wireless LANs do not use the CSMA/CD method
with which collisions can occur and be detected, but rather the CSMA/CA method (Carrier
Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance).
Instead of physically listening in on the channel, a communications protocol is used that
reserves the channel for a specific time. Before sending, a node checks whether or not the
medium is free.
In this so-called RTS/CTS method, the node wishing to transmit sends a short test signal
("Ready To Send" - RTS). The actual transmission begins after the recipient has replied to
this with "Clear To Send" (CTS). If a collision occurs, the retransmission follows after a
pause not selected at random but according to priority. With this strategy, communication
remains deterministic.
Industrial Ethernet
45

1.6 Wireless LAN
1.6.8
Structure of an IWLAN
Basic structure of a WLAN

WLANs do not have a physical topology like traditional wired networks. There are no
"buses", "rings" or "stars". Instead wireless networks are divided into cells.
6ZLWK
352),1(7&38
RU&3
1RWHERRNZLWK
SODQQLQJVRIWZDUH
6,1(0$(
$FFHVV3RLQW
6&$/$1&(
:352
352),1(7
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
$FFHVV3RLQW
6&$/$1&(
:55
$FFHVV3RLQW
6&$/$1&(:
,:/$15&RD[&DEOH
0RELOH
3DQHOV
,:/$1
3%/LQN
31,2
352),%86
&OLHQWPRGXOH
6&$/$1&(:
6ZLWK
&3/HDQ
ZLWKLQWHJUDWHG
SRUWVZLWFK
(76
6,1$0,&6
Figure 1-6
*B,.B;;B
(76
(7SUR
Simple WLAN structure with two access points/wireless cells, RCoax cable and
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO gateway
Here, access points take over the role of switches. End nodes are connected to the network
by activating "clients". Larger networks can be achieved by setting up several wireless cells
each under the control of an access point. The connection between individual cells is also
via access points.
The access points function as their own wireless cells between which mobile nodes can
move. ("Roaming")
Shared medium instead of switched medium

Wireless networks operate on the shared medium principle, in other words, only one node
can send at any one time. As the number of nodes increases, the effective achievable data
rate for individual nodes sinks.
Industrial Ethernet
46

1.6 Wireless LAN
1.6.9
Network structures
1.6.9.1
Infrastructure mode
In infrastructure mode, communication is handled via an access point. The nodes (clients)
need to log on with the access point and transmit on the channel specified by the access
point. The access point can manage the access rights of the clients and assign time slices to
them for communication so that real-time and deterministic communication is assured.
In the simplest case there is a group of clients in the wireless range of the access point.
Such a network is also known as a standalone network.
If the wireless range of an access point is not adequate either because the range is too short
or too few clients can be served, the network can be divided into several wireless cells. All
clients within the wireless cell are within the range of a central access point (AP). The other
clients only ever communicate with their access point and not directly with other clients. By
connecting external antennas, the range and coverage can be adapted to the application.
This means, for example that omnidirectional antennas in closed rooms can achieve
distances between 30 m and 100 m.
Standalone networks
Coordination by an access point:
This configuration does not require a server and the SCALANCE W access point does not
have a connection to a wired Ethernet. In this case, a central access point functions like a
switch receiving the frames from the individual nodes (clients) and forwarding them.
Industrial Ethernet
47

1.6 Wireless LAN
Controller-based network structure

The IWLAN controller SCALANCE WLC711 allows central management of up to 64
controller-based access points. The IWLAN controller automatically recognizes new access
points, establishes the connection to them and manages and coordinates both access points
and clients. Due to the layer 3 architecture, access points are also managed that are located
in various layer 2 subnets. This function allows wireless expansion of an existing Ethernet
network without changes being necessary to the existing network structure.
With the IWLAN controller, the IWLAN Wireless infrastructure can be divided into logical,
service-based networks (Virtual Network Services). Different services, security requirements
and access criteria can be managed reliably and different user groups, for example
administrators, commissioning engineers or visitors can use the entire wireless network.
Various applications such as Voice-over-IP (VoIP), video and Internet access can use the
same infrastructure.
Office network
Plant network
Uninterrupted roaming between office and plant network

WLAN
phone
S7-300 with
CP 343-1
SCALANCE
WLC711
IWLAN Controller
Enterasys
AP2610
(IEEE
802.11a/b/g)
PDA
Industrial Ethernet
Enterasys
AP3640
(IEEE
802.11a/b/g/n)
Network
management
SCALANCE
W786-2HPW
(IEEE 802.11a/b/g)
IP phone
SCALANCE
W788C
(IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n)
Router
Database
SCALANCE
W748-1 RJ45
Ethernet
Laptop
Enterasys Wireless Controller

S7-300 with CP 343-1 ERPC
Figure 1-7
G_IK10_XX_30175
IP
phone
system
Enterprise-wide WLAN based on Enterasys Wireless Controller and SCALANCE WLC IWLAN controller
Redundant operation of two SCALANCE WLC711 devices increases the availability of the
wireless network. With the IWLAN controller, only the controller-based access points of the
SCALANCE W78xC series can be used.
Apart from central management and configuration of the wireless network, the IWLAN
controller WLC711 also allows logging of errors, monitoring of the wireless network and
documentation of network statistics.
Industrial Ethernet
48

1.6 Wireless LAN
Multichannel configuration
If neighboring SCALANCE W access points use the same frequency channel, this can lead
to longer response times due to any collisions that may occur. If the configuration shown in
the figure is implemented as a single-channel system, computers A and B cannot
communicate at the same time with the SCALANCE W access points in their cells.
If neighboring SCALANCE W access points are set up for different frequencies, this leads to
a considerable improvement in performance. As a result, neighboring cells each have their
own medium available and the delays resulting from time-offset transmission no longer
occur.
The channel spacing should be as large as possible; a practical value is 25 MHz. Even in a
multichannel configuration, all SCALANCE W access points can be configured with the same
network name.
1
A
2
1
B
2
Figure 1-8
Multichannel configuration on channels 1 and 7 with four SCALANCE W access points
Industrial Ethernet
49

1.6 Wireless LAN
Wireless Distribution System (WDS)

WDS allows direct connections between SCALANCE W access points and or between
SCALANCE W and other WDS-compliant devices. These are used to create a wireless
backbone or to connect an individual SCALANCE W to a network that cannot be connected
directly to the cable infrastructure due to its location.
1
A
1
1
B
1
Figure 1-9
Implementation of WDS with four SCALANCE W access points
Industrial Ethernet
50

1.6 Wireless LAN
Redundant Wireless LAN (RWLAN)

RWLAN allows a redundant, wireless connection between two SCALANCE W access points
with at least two WLAN interfaces. This is used to set up a redundant wireless backbone that
cannot be implemented as a wired network due to its location but nevertheless has high
demands in terms of availability.
Industrial Ethernet
51

1.6 Wireless LAN
Roaming
Clients moving between wireless cells: "Roaming"
To allow mobile nodes to be able to roam seamlessly from one access point to the next, the
individual wireless cells must overlap. This is transparent for the application. The access
points need to be interconnected via Industrial Ethernet or a wireless distribution system
(WDS).
6
5DGLRFHOO
5DGLRFHOO
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
)LHOG3*
1RWHERRN
$FFHVV3RLQW
6&$/$1&(
:0
$FFHVV3RLQW
6&$/$1&(
:0
6,0$7,&+0,
3&
&OLHQW0RGXOH
6&$/$1&(
:5-
6,0$7,&+0,
6&$/$1&(b
;
3&
6,0$7,&+0,
6&$/$1&(b
;
6
&OLHQW0RGXOH
6&$/$1&(
:5-
3&
6,0$7,&+0,
6&$/$1&(
;
6
$XWRPDWHG*XLGHG9HKLFOH6\VWHP$*96
6
*B,.B;;B
&OLHQW0RGXOH
6&$/$1&(
:5-
The figure above shows how a moving node (in this case an automated guided vehicle
system) is handed over between two wireless cells: The client module runs regular scans of
the wireless signals on all the channels stipulated by the standard being used. The client
module then connects to the access point with the channel on which it finds the best
reception. If the limit between wireless cell 1 and wireless cell 2 is reached, the connection to
the access point of wireless cell 1 is terminated. From this time on, the access point of
wireless cell 2 is responsible for the client module.
The time required for the change (handover time) is in the order of 100 ms. A significant
reduction in handover times can be achieved with Rapid Roaming using the iPCF method
("industrial Point Coordination Function"). Both the access point and client must support
Rapid roaming, for example SCALANCE W788-1RR and W788-2RR.
Industrial Ethernet
52

1.6 Wireless LAN
1.6.9.2
Ad hoc networks
Ad hoc networks
In ad hoc mode, nodes communicate with each other directly (connection 4) without
involving an access point. The nodes access common resources (files or even devices, for
example printers) of the server (connections 1 to 3 in the figure). This is, of course, only
possible if the nodes are located within the wireless range of the server or are within each
other's wireless range. Ad hoc networks can only be operated with the 802.11 "b" standard.
2
1
4
3
As an alternative, wireless networks can be configured in "infrastructure mode".
Industrial Ethernet
53

1.6 Wireless LAN
1.6.10
Other wireless technologies
Industrial Wireless Control

Industrial wireless control is the connection of widely distributed process stations to one or
more central control systems. Various wireless methods are used for the communication
required for monitoring and control. This makes service possible on installations without fixed
telephone lines. An Internet access is also not necessary for the installation.
GPRS
The General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) is a mobile wireless technology for packetswitched data transmission via GSM networks (Global system for mobile
communications). The GSM wireless channels are divided into eight time slots. One time
slot represents one transmission channel.
Packet-switched data transmission means that in contrast to line-switched data
transmission (as with GSM), no transmission channel is reserved permanently. The
sender divides the message into individual packets with additional information (packet
sequence, recipient address). With the aid of the GPRS system, the packets are
forwarded through various time slots of the network. This makes it possible to use free
capacity. A GPRS session can also use several time slots at the same time. The recipient
then puts together the packets in the correct order. GPRS allows data exchange without
connection establishment and billing only according to the transferred amount of data.
Packet switching is made possible by IP technology. GPRS is used mainly for access in
IP-based networks, for example the Internet.
EGPRS
The Enhanced General Packet Radio Service (EGPRS) is an expansion of GPRS and is
also known as Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution (EDGE). EGPRS uses a
different modulation technique (8-PSK) from GPRS that is more efficient. This means that
a data rate up to four times faster can be achieved with EGPRS.
UMTS
UMTS is the acronym for Universal Mobile Telecommunications System and is also
known as a mobile wireless standard of the third generation (3G). The maximum
transmission rate is 384 kbps.
WirelessHART
HART (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer) is the wireless connection of field devices
in process automation for advanced diagnostics.
WirelessHART also uses the ISM frequency band (2.4 GHz and with maximum of 250 kbps)
and automatically establishes meshed networks. The span of the network is greater than the
nominal wireless range of an individual node. The network organizes itself by having all the
connection information evaluated by a network manager. With this information, redundant
paths are made available automatically that can bridge the failure of individual nodes. The
main focus during the development of WirelessHART was simple commissioning and
maintenance of the self-organizing networks so that configuration involved only minimum
effort. The main area of application of WirelessHART is in the regular transmission of small,
non time critical-amounts of data at long intervals over relatively long distances. Thanks to
the low energy consumption, battery working lives of several years are achieved.
Industrial Ethernet
54
Network structures and network configuration

2.1
Network structures
2.1.1
Network topologies
Network topologies are oriented according to the requirements of the equipment to be

networked. The most common topologies include bus, star and ring structures. In practice,
plants usually consist of mixed structures. These can be implemented both with electrical
cables as well as with optical cables (fiber-optic cables).
Glass fiber-optic cables are used for long distances. For short distances, plastic fiber-optic
cables such as Polymer Optic Fiber (POF) or plastic covered glass fibers such as Polymer
Cladded Fiber (PCF) can be used.
2.1.2
Linear structure
Linear bus
The linear bus is the simplest network structure. It is characterized by a network backbone to
which the individual nodes are connected directly or over a branch (only one node is
permitted per branch).
The advantage of the linear bus topology is its simple setup and low hardware
investment. It is suitable, for example, for networking of rigidly linked machines over a
wide area as found in assembly lines.
The disadvantages of bus topologies are that the resources are not put to optimum use
and that there is no redundancy: A break on the cable at any point cannot be bridged.
Connecting the ends of the linear bus, on the other hand, creates a ring with which these
disadvantages can be avoided.
Industrial Ethernet
SIMATIC S7-1200
with CSM 1277
Field PG
Figure 2-1
SIMATIC S7-1200
with CSM 1277
G_IK10_XX_10271
SIMATIC S7-1200
with CSM 1277
Linear bus network topology based on the example of Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet
55

2.1 Network structures
A further restriction for networks with a linear bus structure is the physical arrangement of
the network nodes. Depending on their position, the backbone may need take long detours
which may, in turn, lead to problems with frame delay times. In a linear network topology, the
network components such as switches typically have only one or few connection points for
network nodes. Linear bus structures can also be created with devices with two integrated
network interfaces.
Setup
The bus structure can be implemented with SCALANCE X switches. Any TP ports can be
used to cascade and form a linear bus. The number of SCALANCE X switches that can be
cascaded depends on the response times of the applications operating over this linear bus.
Electrical cables
There may be a maximum distance of 100 m between two of these devices.
Optical cables
At 100 Mbps, the maximum distance between 2 devices can be as follows:
Multimode, glass, up to max. 5 km
LD: Single mode, glass up to max. 26 km
LH+: Single mode, glass up to max. 70 km
At 1 Gbps, the maximum distance between 2 devices can be as follows:
Multimode, glass, up to max. 750 m
LD: Single mode, glass up to max. 10 km
LH: Single mode, glass up to max. 40 km
LH+: Single mode, glass up to max. 70 km
ELH: Single mode, glass up to max. 120 km
See also
SCALANCE X100 unmanaged (Page 110)
Industrial Ethernet
56

2.1.3
Star structure
"Star"
The difference between the star topology and linear bus topology is that one switch functions
as the central node from which the spokes branch off to the individual nodes. The individual
nodes of the network therefore have separate point-to-point links with the active network
component (i.e. with the switch).
The immediate effect is that the messages only run via the spokes between sender and
recipient, in other words network performance improves significantly because several nodes
can communicate at the same time.
In practice, these may be a mixture of fiber-optic and twisted-pair cables depending on what
is required of the individual links. Typical applications are Ethernet office networking or the
networking of production cells in manufacturing with Industrial Ethernet.
6&$/$1&(;
6ZLWK&3
6&$/$1&(
;RU
;/'
6&$/$1&(
;RU
;/'
6&$/$1&(
;
6&$/$1&(
;RU
;/'
6&$/$1&(
$FFHVV3RLQW
:352
(76
(76
(76
(76
(76
352),1(7,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW7ZLVWHG3DLU
352),1(7,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW)LEHU2SWLF
Figure 2-2
*B,.B;;B
)LHOG3*
Star topology based on the example of Industrial Ethernet with a gateway to Industrial
Wireless LAN
The use of a switch optimizes data throughput in the network. Messages are transferred
only on the star segments between sender and recipient and the segments of the other
nodes remain unaffected by them. If a node fails, the communication between the other
network nodes remains intact.
Compared with ring or linear bus structures, however, the investment in cabling increases
considerably due to the long distances back to the star center.
Typical use cases for star networks are switching cubicles, individual machines or
manufacturing cells.
Industrial Ethernet
57

Examples of simple star structures

3&ZLWK
&3$
&3
6&$/$1&(
;
6
6
&3
,3&ZLWK
&3$
&3
Figure 2-3
3DQHO3&
*B,.B;;B
&3
Star structure with SCALANCE X005
The number and technology of the connections to the end nodes (electrical/optical) depends
on the number of relevant ports on the switch: In the example above, the SCALANCE X005
can support five 10/100 Mbps cables with RJ-45 connectors and no fiber-optic connections.
With an FC TP standard cable, the end nodes can be located up to 100 m from the switch.
Industrial Ethernet
58

&DELQHW
6ZLWK
&3$GYDQFHG
,3&ZLWK
&3$
&3
03
,()&
2XWOHW
5-
,(73&RUG
6,0$7,&)LHOG3*
6ZLWK
&3
Figure 2-4
6ZLWK
&3
03
,3&ZLWK
&3$
&3
*B,.B;;B
6ZLWFKHV
6&$/$1&(;
0ELWV
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW)&&DEOH[
6ZLWK
&3
Star network structure with SCALANCE X124
More complex network structures can be set up by using switches with a higher number of
ports. (In the example above, a SCALANCE X124 with 24 electrical ports.) In terms of the
numbers of nodes and the physical span of the network, this is practicable only up to a
certain limit.
If more extensive networks need to be configured, it is advisable to use more switches and
the extra subnets that result.
See also
SCALANCE X005 (Page 106)
SCALANCE X100 unmanaged (Page 110)
Industrial Ethernet
59

2.1.4
Ring structure
"Ring"
If the ends of a bus are connected via an additional connection, this results in a ring
structure. The switches connected together in a ring do not need to be interconnected only
with FO cables or only electrical cables. A mixed electrical-optical ring is also permitted.
A special redundancy mechanism ensures that the ring structure remains a logical bus in
normal situations and prevents frames from circulating. If a section of the ring fails, the
mechanism quickly makes a substitute path available in the ring: The message now travels
the long way round via the intact network section instead of over the direct interrupted path
and reaches its recipient via this detour. The network does not break down into two
segments.
Operator Stations
Operator Stations
...
...
SCALANCE
X414-3E
SCALANCE
X414-3E
SCALANCE
X308-2
Gigabit
server
S7-200
1000 Mbit/s
3rd party system
SCALANCE
X408-2
10/100 Mbit/s
S7-300
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW7ZLVWHG3DLU
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW)LEHU2SWLF
Figure 2-5
H-System
*B,.B;;B
S7-400
H-System
Ring topology based on the example of Industrial Ethernet with glass fiber-optic cables
The effects of a network component being disrupted are restricted to the failed
component and to the end devices connected to it. If a ring section is interrupted, for
example by a cable break, communication continues without any disruption.
The reconfiguration time is faster here than in the office world and meets the requirements of
the automation world.
Industrial Ethernet
60

Example: Structure of a redundant network with SCALANCE X switches

With the aid of a redundancy manager (RM), the two ends of a bus can be closed to form a
redundant ring. All the media converters SCALANCE X100/200/300/400 and X500 devices
can be used in this ring. The role of the RM can be handled by the SCALANCE
X200/X300/400 and X500 devices.
The RM monitors the line connected to it, if there is an interruption, it closes the ring and
restores a functioning bus configuration. A maximum of 50 of the SCALANCE X devices
mentioned above are permitted in an optical ring. Here, a reconfiguration time of less than
0.3 seconds is achieved. The RM mode on the SCALANCE X devices is configured in the
software. The maximum length of the fiber-optic cable between two devices is 3000 m for
multimode fiber and 200 km for single mode fiber. This means that a maximum of 150 km
(multimode) can be achieved for the entire optical ring consisting of 50 switches.
6
3&
6
6
6ZLFK
6&$/$1&(
;,57
3&
6
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
6
6ZLWFK
6&$/$1&(
;
6ZLWFK
6&$/$1&(
;
6ZLWFK
6&$/$1&(
;
,3&
3&
6
,3&
6
6
Figure 2-6
*B,.B;;B
6
SCALANCE X: Configuration with high-speed redundancy in the electrical ring
See also
Network topologies (Page 55)
Industrial Ethernet
61

2.1.5
Redundant linking of network segments with electrical and FO components
General
SCALANCE X switches support not only ring redundancy within a ring but also redundant
linking of several rings or open network segments (linear bus). In the redundant link, two
rings are connected together over two Ethernet connections. This is achieved by configuring
a master/slave device pair in one ring so that the devices monitor each other and, in the
event of a fault, redirect the data traffic from the normally used master Ethernet connection
to the substitute (slave) Ethernet connection.
Standby redundancy
2SHUDWRU6WDWLRQ
2SHUDWRU6WDWLRQV
6
6&$/$1&(
;,57
6&$/$1&(
;
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
0ELWV
/LFKWZHOOHQOHLWHU
6&$/$1&(b;
6
6
6&$/$1&(;,57
DOV6WDQGE\6ODYH
6&$/$1&(;,57
DOV6WDQGE\0DVWHU
0ELWV
6
6&$/$1&(
;
6&$/$1&(
;,57
6
Figure 2-7
*B,.B;;B
,3&
Example of redundant linking of two SCALANCE X-200 IRT rings
For a redundant link as shown in the figure, two devices must be configured as standby
redundancy switches within a network segment. Here, network segments are rings with a
redundancy manager (RM, in the example, the SCALANCE X202-2IRT switches). Instead of
rings, network segments might also be linear.
Industrial Ethernet
62

The two X202 devices connected in the configuration exchange data frames with each other
to synchronize their operating statuses (one device is master and the other slave). If there
are no problems, only the link from the master to the other network segment is active. If this
link fails (for example due to a link-down or a device failure), the slave activates its link as
long as the problem persists.
See also
SCALANCE X200/X200 IRT (Page 118)
Industrial Ethernet
63

2.1.6
VLAN
Virtual Local Area Network

VLANs are virtual network segments in a physical network that are assigned to the nodes
during configuration. In contrast to the physical network, a VLAN is not spatially restricted.
This allows nodes to be put together in logical groups according to their function (VLAN
groups). VLANs can be set up without modifying the physical network.
SCALANCE X and SCALANCE W support port-based VLAN. For the parameter assignment
of the VLANs, a VLAN ID is assigned to the individual ports of a SCALANCE device.
Multicast and broadcast frames are possible only within the boundaries created by the
logical network structure; in other words, between ports with the same VLAN ID.
This segmentation not only reduces network load because broadcasts can be limited to a
practical number of end systems. VLANs also increase the security of a network since no
node can listen in any longer on the data traffic of other nodes unless they are a member of
this VLAN.
To identify which packet belongs to which VLAN, the Ethernet frame is expanded by 4 bytes
(VLAN tagging). This expansion includes not only the VLAN ID but also priority information.
Industrial Ethernet
64

2.2 Media redundancy
2.2
Media redundancy
2.2.1
Options of media redundancy

There are various options available to increase the network availability of an Industrial
Ethernet network with optical or electrical linear bus topologies:
Mesh networks
Parallel connection of transmission paths
Closing a linear bus topology to form a ring topology
2.2.2
Media redundancy in ring topologies
Structure of a ring topology

Nodes in a ring topology can be external switches and/or the integrated switches of
communications modules.
To set up a ring topology with media redundancy, you bring together the two free ends of a
linear bus topology in one device. Closing the linear bus topology to form a ring is achieved
with two ports (ring ports) of a device in the ring. This device is the redundancy manager. All
other devices in the ring are redundancy clients.
7HVWIUDPHV
5HGXQGDQF\PDQDJHU
5HGXQGDQF\FOLHQWV
7HVWIUDPHV
Figure 2-8
Devices in a ring topology with media redundancy
Industrial Ethernet
65

The two ring ports of a device are the ports that establish the connection to its two
neighboring devices in the ring topology. The ring ports are selected and set in the
configuration of the relevant device. In STEP 7 and on the S7 Ethernet CP modules
themselves, the ring ports are indicated by an "R" after the port number.
Note
Before physically closing the ring, download the configuration of your STEP 7 project to the
individual devices.
How media redundancy works in a ring topology

When using media redundancy, the data paths between the individual devices are
reconfigured if the ring is interrupted at one point. Following reconfiguration of the topology,
the devices can once again be reached in the resulting new topology.
In the redundancy manager, the 2 ring ports are disconnected from each other if the network
is uninterrupted. This prevents circulating data frames. In terms of data transmission, the ring
topology is a linear bus topology. The redundancy manager monitors the ring topology. It
does this by sending test frames both from ring port 1 and ring port 2. The test frames run
round the ring in both directions until they arrive at the other ring port of the redundancy
manager.
An interruption of the ring can be caused by loss of the connection between two devices or
by failure of a device in the ring.
If the test frames of the redundancy manager no longer arrive at the other ring port, the
redundancy manager connects its two ring ports. This substitute path once again restores a
functioning connection between all remaining devices in the form of a linear bus topology.
The time between the ring interruption and restoration of a functional linear topology is
known as the reconfiguration time.
If the redundancy manager fails, the ring becomes a functional linear bus.
Media redundancy methods

The following media redundancy methods are supported by SIMATIC NET products:
HSR (High Speed Redundancy)
Reconfiguration time: 0.3 seconds
MRP (Media Redundancy Protocol)
Reconfiguration time: 0.2 seconds
The mechanisms of these methods are similar. With both methods, up to 50 devices can
participate in the ring. HSR and MRP cannot be used in the ring at the same time.
If you want to introduce media redundancy in a ring topology in your STEP 7 project, select
MRP.
Industrial Ethernet
66

2.2.3
MRP
The "MRP" method conforms to the Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP) specified in the
following standard:
IEC 62439-2 Output 1.0 (2010-02) Industrial communication networks - High availability
automation networks Part 2: Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP)
The reconfiguration time after an interruption of the ring is a maximum of 0.2 seconds.
Requirements
Requirements for problem-free operation with the MRP media redundancy protocol are as
follows:
MRP is supported in ring topologies with up to 50 devices. Exceeding this number of
devices can lead to a loss of data traffic.
The ring in which you want to use MRP may only consist of devices that support this
function.
These include, for example, some of the Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X switches,
some of the communications processors (CPs) for SIMATIC S7 and PG/PC or nonSiemens devices that support this function.
All devices must be interconnected via their ring ports.
MRP" must be activated on all devices in the ring (see MRP configuration in PROFINET
IO").
The connection settings (transmission medium / duplex) must be set to full duplex and at
least 100 Mbps for all ring ports. Otherwise there may be a loss of data traffic.
To do this, set all the ports involved in the ring to "Automatic settings" in the "Options" tab
of the properties dialog during STEP 7 configuration.
Industrial Ethernet
67

Topology
The following schematic shows a possible topology for devices in a ring with MRP.
8
1
2
3
5HGXQGDQF\GRPDLQ
9
5
4
10
6ZLWK&3$GYDQFHG
+0,VWDWLRQ
6&$/$1&(;VZLWFK
(QJLQHHULQJVWDWLRQ
3&ZLWK&3
(76
6ZLWK&3$GYDQFHG
(70
(7SUR
Figure 2-9
Example of a ring topology with the MRP media redundancy protocol
The following rules apply to a ring topology with media redundancy using MRP:
All the devices connected within the ring topology are members of the same redundancy
domain.
One device in the ring is acting as redundancy manager.
All other devices in the ring are redundancy clients.
Non MRP-compliant devices can be connected to the ring via a SCALANCE X switch or via
a PC with a CP 1616.
Prioritized startup
If you configure MRP in a ring, you cannot use the "prioritized startup" function in PROFINET
applications on the devices involved.
If you want to use the "prioritized startup" function, then disable MRP in the configuration.
In the STEP 7 configuration, set the role to "Not a node in the ring".
Industrial Ethernet
68

2.2.4
MRPD
MRPD - Media Redundancy with Planned Duplication

The MRPD procedure is specified in IEC 61158 Parts 5 and 6 type 10 "PROFINET". It allows
bumpless redundant linking of devices.
The cyclic IRT frames are duplicated and the PROFINET devices connected to the ring send
their data in both directions. The devices receive this data at both ring ports and this reduces
the reconfiguration time of the ring. As with MRP, a redundancy manager prevents
circulating data frames.
Requirements
Devices with ERTEC hardware support.
SCALANCE X-200IRT as of firmware version 5.0
STEP 7 as of version V5.5 SP1
2.2.5
HSR
HSR - High Speed Redundancy

HSR is the name of a redundancy method for networks with a ring topology. The switches
are interconnected via ring ports. One of the switches is configured as the redundancy
manager (RM). The other switches are redundancy clients. Using test frames, the
redundancy manager checks the ring to make sure it is not interrupted. The redundancy
manager sends test frames via both ring ports and checks that they are received at the other
ring port. The redundancy clients forward the test frames.
If the test frames of the RM no longer arrive at the other ring port due to an interruption, the
RM switches through its two ring ports and informs the redundancy clients of the change
immediately.
Standby redundancy
Standby redundancy is a method with which several rings each of which is protected by
high-speed redundancy can be linked together redundantly. In the ring, a master/slave
device pair is configured and these monitor each other via their ring ports. If a fault occurs,
the data traffic is redirected from one Ethernet connection (standby port of the master or
standby server) to another Ethernet connection (standby port of the slave)
Industrial Ethernet
69

Requirements
HSR is supported in ring topologies with up to 50 devices. Exceeding this number of
devices can lead to a loss of data traffic.
The following devices support HSR:
SCALANCE X400, SCALANCE X300, SCALANCE X200
All devices must be interconnected via their ring ports.
2.2.6
RNA / PRP
Redundant Network Access (RNA)

In Siemens Industry, RNA stands for devices and software that support the PRP redundancy
protocol. Suitable devices have "RNA" appended to their names.
A device with RNA capability is used to connect devices not capable of redundancy to
redundant networks. This makes the use of PRP possible for end devices even if the device
itself does not have PRP capability. Devices with RNA capability are located in two
independent networks with the same MAC and IP address.
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)

The basis of the PRP redundancy method (IEC 62439-3) is the transmission of the frames
via two different networks. PRP is only possible when two end devices are connected via two
independent networks (LAN A and LAN B). Each of these end devices is represented in both
networks with the same MAC and IP address. The two networks can be made up of standard
components and only one of the two end components needs to be capable of RNA, for
example SCALANCE X204RNA.
At the sender end, the SCALANCE X204RNA duplicates the frame coming from the sender.
The frame is then sent on LAN A and LAN B.
At the receiving end, the SCALANCE X204RNA forwards the first frame to arrive to the
addressee. The second frame is discarded. This achieves N-1 redundancy without
reconfiguration (= bumpless switchover).
If there is a disruption, only one frame arrives at the SCALANCE X204RNA. This means that
at least one of the two frames sent simultaneously arrives unless both networks are
disrupted. This means that there is no reconfiguration time of the network.
Industrial Ethernet
70

2.2.7
STP / RSTP / MSTP
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

STP (IEEE 802.1D standard) is the method with which loops are prevented in redundant
network structures.
With this method, it is not end devices that know the path from the sender or recipient, but
rather the switches. The switches continuously exchange configuration frames with each
other known as BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Unit). Due to the MAC addresses of the
packets passing through, the switches get to know the topology of the network
independently. The network is considered to be a tree.
Sequence
After initialization of the switches, a root bridge is selected. Each switch has an ID that it
passes on to the group. The switch with the lowest bridge ID becomes the root bridge.
All other paths are decided by this root bridge. The other switches select one of their ports as
a root port in the direction of the root bridge. This selection is also made using BPDUs that
the root bridge sends to the switches. The port of switch that receives the BPDU of the root
bridge first adopts the status of root port.
The designated ports are selected from the remaining ports connected to another switch.
This is also done by sending BPDUs. This time the switches send frames to the connected
partners. The port via which the frame reaches the recipient quickest becomes the
designated port.
The other port is deactivated. If there is a disruption or device failure, the network needs to
be reconfigured. The devices start to negotiate new paths only when the interruption occurs.
This can take up to 30 seconds.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

RSTP (IEEE 802.1D-2004 standard) is a further development of STP. RSTP differs from
STP essentially in that the devices are already collecting information about alternative routes
during normal operation and do not need to gather this information after a disruption has
occurred. This allows the reconfiguration time for an RSTP-controlled network to be reduced
to less than 1 second.
This was achieved by the following functions:
Edge ports
A port that is defined as an edge port is activated immediately after connection
establishment. If a BPDU is received at an edge port, the port loses its role as edge port
and takes part in RSTP again. If no further BPDU is received after a certain time has
elapsed (3 x hello time), the port returns to the edge port status.
Point-to-point (direct communication between two neighboring devices)
By directly linking the devices, a status change (reconfiguration of the ports) can be made
without any delays.
Industrial Ethernet
71

Alternative port (substitute for the root port)
A substitute for the root port is configured. If the connection to the root bridge is lost, the
device can establish a connection over the alternate port without any delay due to
reconfiguration.
Reaction to events
A Rapid Spanning Tree reacts to events, such as a connection abort, without delay.
There is no waiting for timers as in spanning tree.
Counter for maximum number of bridge hops
The number of bridge hops a package is allowed to make before it automatically
becomes invalid.
In principle, therefore with rapid spanning tree, alternatives for many parameters are
preconfigured and certain properties of the network structure taken into account to reduce
the reconfiguration time.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

MSTP is a further development of RSTP. MSTP is defined in the IEEE 802.1s standard,
subsequently IEEE 802.1Q.
Among other things, it provides the option of operating several RSTP instances or VLAN
groups within different virtual networks (VLAN - Virtual Local Area Network) so that; for
example; paths that would block the simple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol for data traffic
globally can be available within individual VLANs.
2.2.8
Link aggregation
Link aggregation
With link aggregation, several parallel physical connections with the same transmission
speed are grouped together to form a logical connection with a higher transmission rate. This
method based on IEEE 802.3ad is also known as port trunking or channel bundling.
Link aggregation works only with full duplex connections with the same transmission rate in
point-to-point mode. This achieves multiplication of the bandwidth or transmission rate. If
part of the connection fails, the data traffic is handled via the remaining parts of the
connection.
To control and monitor, the Link Aggregation Control Layer (LACL) and the Link Aggregation
Control Protocol (LACP) are used.
Industrial Ethernet
72
3.1
Optimization of a power screwdriver control
Task
Handheld compressed air screwdrivers are used in the final assembly of motor vehicles and
they can be supplied via mobile stations on overhead monorails. These units need to be
replaced by new, motor-driven screwdriver stations and the customer would like to do away
with the previously necessary sliding contacts that were always subject to wear and tear.
Solution
3
SIMATIC S7-300
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE
W788-1RR
RCoax
6
SCALANCE
W747
SCALANCE
X208PRO
SINAMICS
G110
10
9
SIMATIC ET 200S
The new solution is based on Industrial Wireless LAN. To allow wireless data
communication, an RCoax cable is laid along the path of the screwdriver stations. The
RCoax cable is connected to the antenna output of a SCALANCE W788-1RR access
point. This means that there is a defined RF field available around the RCoax cable. Via the
Ethernet interface of the access point, there is a connection to the plant controller and the
server of the assembly line .
The communications partner on the screwdriver stations is a SCALANCE W747 client

module.
Industrial Ethernet
73
3.1 Optimization of a power screwdriver control
The data exchange with all components of the mobile station is handled by a SCALANCE
X208PRO switch. The station is controlled via a panel PC and the screwdriver controller
.
The new screwdriver stations are moved by a geared motor connected via the distributed
I/O.
Benefits
Low investment costs thanks to fewer screwdriver stations.
Reduction of maintenance costs and downtimes with reliable wireless and therefore nonwearing data transmission to mobile communications partners.
Shorter downtimes if a fault occurs thanks to the C-PLUG (configuration plug) in the
SCALANCE devices. Devices can be replaced without a programming device and without
specialist personnel.
Higher productivity and process reliability because all data of the plant controller (for
example workpiece IDs, screwdriver data and assembly information) is also available
directly on the screwdriver stations. Other applications for quality control are also easy to
integrate.
The SCALANCE devices used in the "RR" version are particularly rugged (for example
degree of protection IP65) and are designed specifically for use in industry.
Industrial Ethernet
74
3.2 Process automation in hazardous areas
3.2
Process automation in hazardous areas
Task
The aim was to allow mobile access to the process data of the entire plant in a hazardous
area (production of polyoxymethylene thermoplastic). Extremely complicated constraints had
to be taken into account when interfacing to the existing PCS 7 plant. The wireless network
had to work in an industrial building made of reinforced concrete with unspecified fittings
over seven floors. Added to this, were the chemical load and the high temperature
differences resulting from the production process.
Solution
1
2
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE X208PRO
EX
Zone 2
SCALANCE
W786-2RR
All the SIMATIC S7-400 and SIMATIC S7-300 controllers involved in the production
process are connected to the SIMATIC PCS 7 server via Industrial Ethernet.
A SCALANCE X208PRO controls data exchange with the access points.

In the hazardous area, several SCALANCE W786-2RR access points ensure stable
illumination of the RF field. This device type was selected because it meets all the
requirements reliably: The degree of protection IP65 in conjunction with an extended
temperature range of -40 to +70 C and the high mechanical stability providing resistance to
vibration and shock ensure high availability of the entire system.
Industrial Ethernet
75
3.2 Process automation in hazardous areas
Note the information on the use of modules in hazardous area zone 2. You will find
information on this including a list of approved SIMATIC modules on the Internet at:
13702947 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/13702947)
Search keys: Explosion protection, Ex modules
With mobile operator stations, all the information relating to the entire plant can be called
up anywhere and at any time.
Benefits
A modular structure and scalability make any necessary expansions simpler.
Price advantage because industrial components from SIMATIC NET meet users'
requirements without them having to take any additional measures.
Simple integration in the PCS 7 system and simple configuration of the SCALANCE
components used thanks to Web-based management.
Industrial Ethernet
76
3.3 Automation of gantry cranes
3.3
Automation of gantry cranes
Task
Two gantry cranes are used in a cold rolling mill to handle the steel coils. Fully automated
and fail-safe control of these cranes is required because damage to the steel coils puts up
costs considerably. The intention was to minimize maintenance effort and to reduce
operating costs. The fail-safe monitoring of the 14 entrances and exits of the 16,000 m2
storage area was also required.
Solution
The following graphic shows the components of the crane control and the interfacing of
the production control system and the access monitoring for the open air storage area
.
1
SCALANCE W-788-1PRO
4
2
SCALANCE W-788-1PRO
SIMATIC
S7-400F
SCALANCE
X-200
SCALANCE
X-200
PROFIBUS
SCALANCE W-788-1PRO
2x SIMOREG
Master Drives
SIMATIC ET200 S PN IO + FIO

1
2
Figure 3-1
2x Master Drive
Master Drive
14
SIMATIC S7-300F
10
SCALANCE W-788-1PRO
Schematic representation of the crane control
Data exchange between the production control system and the gantry crane is via two
SCALANCE W788-1PRO access points. The use of wireless communication means that no
trailing cables are required between the stationary and mobile station.
A SIMATIC S7-400F controls all crane movements (lifting, lowering, grasping, travel).
Industrial Ethernet
77
3.3 Automation of gantry cranes
For the communication between the production control system and an access point , a
SCALANCE X-200 is used. With this switch, safety-oriented data for the access monitoring is
exchanged via PROFIsafe.
Each entrance/exit is monitored by an ET 200S PN IO.
A SIMATIC S7-300F processes all the data of the access monitoring and can, when
necessary, stop the movement of the crane via the connected access point .
Benefits
By using Industrial Wireless LAN, no cables need to be laid for communication.
SCALANCE W788-1PRO access points are designed to be suitable for industry and are
therefore capable of withstanding the mechanical load caused by shock and vibration
when used on the crane bridges. The devices with degree of protection IP65 can be used
without problems in areas subject to dampness and spray water.
Lower operating costs thanks to maintenance-free components.
With PROFINET and the PROFIsafe profile, safety-oriented data can also be transferred
with no additional effort.
Industrial Ethernet
78
3.4 Controlling material transportation with SCALANCE components
3.4
Controlling material transportation with SCALANCE components
Task
Transportation vehicles in a building need to be controlled using wireless. These vehicles
move steel pipes with a weight of several tons. One important aspect was easy scalability if
additional vehicles are used. Another requirement was the reliable accessibility of the
vehicles in all areas of the building and high mechanical stability of the devices used on the
vehicles in particular with regard to vibration.
Solution
The following graphic shows the topology of the implemented solution and the interfacing to
the existing IT structure:
1
SIMATIC
WinCC
SIMATIC S7-400 +
CP443-1 Advanced
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE
X414-3E
PROFINET
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE X204-2
SCALANCE
W784-1RR
SCALANCE W747-1
PROFINET
PROFINET
Industrial
Ethernet
SCALANCE W747-1
7
S7-300 +
CP 343-1 Lean
Industrial
Ethernet
S7-300 +
CP 343-1 Lean
The plant is controlled via a WinCC system that accepts user input and displays feedback
from the individual system components.
Here, controllers from other operational areas are also connected to allow
synchronization of the transportation vehicles with other steps in production.
Industrial Ethernet
79
3.4 Controlling material transportation with SCALANCE components
The data from the central controller is forwarded to the access points via Industrial
Ethernet switches SCALANCE X414-3E and SCALANCE X204-2.
Industrial Wireless LAN is used for the wireless communication with the vehicles. In the
production plant, several SCALANCE W784-1RR access points ensure a full-coverage
IWLAN RF field. iPCF can be used with these devices. This minimizes the handover times
when the vehicle moves from one wireless cell to another.
To allow this, each vehicle is equipped with a SCALANCE W747-1 client module. The
control information received via wireless is forwarded via the Ethernet interface of the W7471 client to a SIMATIC S7-300 controller. There, data traffic is handled by a CP 343-1 Lean
.
Benefits
The selected solution has the following advantages for the users:
Wireless LAN suitable for industry that meets all the requirements in terms of reliability
and mechanical stability.
Maximum availability even when changing wireless cells thanks to iPCF.
Simple integration in a WinCC system.
Optimization of the IWLAN installation thanks to the SINEMA E software.
Maintenance-free and problem-free scalability.
Industrial Ethernet
80
3.5 Crane carriage control for a high-bay warehouse
3.5
Crane carriage control for a high-bay warehouse
Task
An existing SIMATIC S5 controller of a case picking high-bay warehouse system needs to be
modernized. The customer also hopes to reduce plant costs by using modern and futureproof components.
Solution
STEP 7
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE
S612
Industrial Ethernet
MP270
PROFINET
5
S7 315-2 /
CP343-1 Advanced
SCALANCE
X208
S7 416-2 /
CP443-1 Advanced
SCALANCE
W784-1
IWLAN/PB Link
PN IO
PROFIBUS
9
ET 200S
The controller of the high-bay warehouse can be reached via the factory network and it
will also be configured via this path.
To protect against unauthorized access, the entire crane system is protected by a
SCALANCE S612.
Starting with a SCALANCE X208, the individual components form a star topology that
includes not only four multi-panels MP270 as operator control and monitoring systems
but also the controllers for the crane carriage .
Industrial Ethernet
81
3.5 Crane carriage control for a high-bay warehouse
IWLAN was selected for the communication between the stationary parts of the system
and the mobile crane carriage. This meant that the previously required cable festoons were
no longer necessary. Broken cables and the associated maintenance effort would therefore
no longer be a problem. Two SCALANCE W784-1 access points ensure reliable wireless
coverage in the area in which the crane carriage moves.
Each crane carriage is equipped with an IWLAN Link that converts wireless control
signals for PROFIBUS and forwards them to the ET 200S on each crane carriage. In
conjunction with absolute value encoders, this achieves precise movement and positioning
of the crane carriage.
Benefits
Reliable and high-speed communication with PROFINET IO and Industrial Wireless LAN.
Protection of investment by using IWLAN/PB Links. The existing PROFIBUS I/O can
continue to be used unchanged.
By integrating the absolute value encoders in the distributed ET 200S, additional cabling
is unnecessary.
Absence of maintenance and operational safety thanks to wireless transmission between
the stationary part of the system and the crane carriage.
Although remote access to the system via the factory network is possible, a SCALANCE
S612 protects against unauthorized access.
If requirements change, the system can be easily expanded or adapted.
Industrial Ethernet
82
3.6 Connecting a PROFIBUS network to a PROFINET installation
3.6
Connecting a PROFIBUS network to a PROFINET installation
Task
In a brickworks, raw bricks are transported to the drying kiln by a reciprocating conveyor .
The functions of the reciprocating conveyor are controlled by an S7-300. The movements of
the reciprocating conveyor are synchronized with the production process in the stationary
parts of the works with which the conveyor communicates via a wireless PROFIBUS modem
. The doors of the drying kiln open automatically when the conveyor arrives and close
again automatically. The stationary part of the works also has a wireless PROFIBUS modem
and the ET 200 I/O and operator control stations required for production.
SIMATIC S7-300
CPU 315-2 MPI/DP
1
ET 200M
2
PROFIBUS
This solution alone eliminates numerous problems that occurred previously with the trailing
cables but nevertheless there were occasional short interruptions in communication. The
reason was that the transmission speed of the wireless PROFIBUS communication was not
fast enough for this situation.
Solution
The new solution consists of Industrial Wireless LAN and PROFINET IO. This combines a
high data rate in the wireless communication with a communications concept for modular
distributed applications based on Ethernet.
ET 200M
SIMATIC S7-300
CPU 315-2 PN/DP
IWLAN/PB
Link PN IO
6
8
7
PROFINET
PROFIBUS
SCALANCE
W744-1PRO
10
SCALANCE
W788-1PRO
PROFINET
Industrial Ethernet
83
3.6 Connecting a PROFIBUS network to a PROFINET installation
The CPU 315-2 PN/DP used on the conveyor has a PROFINET interface to connect
distributed field devices. For the wireless communication, a SCALANCE W744-1PRO is
connected as a client module.
In the stationary part of the works, an IWLAN/PB Link PN IO allows unchanged use of the
ET 200M modules.
A SCALANCE W788-1PRO is used as the access point and the operator control stations
can access the entire system via its Ethernet interface.
Benefits
High data throughput and high reliability in communication with the reciprocating
conveyor without trailing cables or sliding contacts.
Transparent network with wireless PROFINET/PROFIBUS gateway.
When necessary, a PC with a WLAN interface can be used for diagnostics and for
process visualization.
Lower operating costs and reduction of downtimes with maintenance-free IWLAN
technology, higher productivity.
Protection of investment by an IWLAN/PB Link. The existing ET 200 M controllers can
continue to be used unchanged.
Industrial Ethernet
84
3.7 Redundant coupled rings with a connection to an office network
3.7
Redundant coupled rings with a connection to an office network
Task
In a production plant, two ring topologies need to be interconnected reliably. Faults or the
failure of a connecting cable should not have any influence on the data traffic. Data must
also be exchanged with the office network of the plant.
Solution
Industrial Ethernet (FO)
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE
X308-2
SCALANCE
X310
SCALANCE
X310
SCALANCE
X307-3
SCALANCE
X307-3
SCALANCE
X307-3
RM
RM
1
1
SCALANCE
X307-3
SCALANCE
X310
SCALANCE
X310
SCALANCE
X308-2
SCALANCE
X307-3
SCALANCE
X307-3
The production network consists of two redundant rings. One switch in each of the ring
topologies is configured as the redundancy manager (RM) but this does not forward any
frames if the transmission path is intact. This means that data traffic is interrupted at the
redundancy manager. If a section of the ring fails, the redundancy manager closes the
connection between its ring ports. As a result, all the devices in the ring remain accessible
for data traffic.
Due to the high requirements for reliability, the coupling of the two rings is also redundant. In
regular operation, the data traffic between the two rings is via cable , the device adopts
the function of standby master. In this situation, cable does not transfer any data because
the standby slave is controlled accordingly by the standby master.
Industrial Ethernet
85
3.7 Redundant coupled rings with a connection to an office network
If the standby master recognizes that the connection via cable is faulty or interrupted,
it activates cable for data exchange via the standby slave . The cable serves as the
connection between the standby master and the standby slave . It is a normal network
segment that simply provides the additional function of the standby link.
All cables are designed for gigabit Ethernet because there is an extremely high volume of
data to be transferred. Either copper cable or fiber-optic cable can be used without problems
because there are for example SCALANCE X-300 components with gigabit ports for all
possible media.
Due to the redundant operation in the two rings of the plant network, Spanning Tree/RSTP
cannot be used because an IE switch cannot use both mechanisms at the same time. If
Spanning Tree/RSTP is necessary in the office network, passive listening must be activated
for devices and . They then forward (R)STP configuration frames transparently even
when (R)STP is disabled for them. This behavior does not conform with the IEEE 802.1d
standard but allows the connection of network segments with media redundancy and those
that use Spanning Tree/RSTP.
Benefits
Extremely high reliability thanks to media redundancy and the redundant coupling of ring
topologies.
High data throughput thanks to gigabit technology.
Freedom of choice in terms of the transmission medium; depending on specific
requirements either twisted-pair cables or fiber-optic cables can be used.
Connection to networks with activated Spanning Tree/RSTP by using passive listening.
Industrial Ethernet
86
3.8 Data protection during mobile communication
3.8
Data protection during mobile communication
Task
In an assembly plant, access to field devices and the control technology should only be
possible for authorized personnel for commissioning, maintenance and service. Due to the
size of the plant, network access should also be possible for mobile nodes. In this case in
particular, reliable protection of the automation cells against unauthorized access,
manipulation and espionage is necessary.
Solution
SCALANCE
W788-1PRO
PG/PC with
Softnet Security Client
5
6
SCALANCE
S612
PG/PC with
SCALANCE
S612
SCALANCE
X208
SIMATIC S7 300
SCALANCE
X208
SIMATIC S7 300
ET 200S
Secure Network
Insecure Network
Protected access (VPN tunnel)
Within the automation cells and , devices can be used without their own security
functionality. The entire data exchange with these devices is via a SCALANCE S612 that,
among other things, provides the function of a firewall. The protection also extends to layer 2
frames if the SCALANCE S612 is not operating as a router.
Devices in public networks can also communicate with the automation cells if they use
the SOFTNET Security Client software. This means that the PC/PG is automatically
configured so that it can establish a secure IPsec tunnel in the VPN (Virtual Private Network)
to one or more SCALANCE S612 modules. As a result, STEP 7 can be used to access
devices in an automation cell protected by a SCALANCE S612 via a secure tunnel. This cell
protection concept allows the use of effective security structures even for access by external
devices.
Industrial Ethernet
87
3.8 Data protection during mobile communication
This protected access is also possible from mobile PCs/PGs that communicate by
wireless with an access point . In the assembly plant, several SCALANCE W788-1PROs
ensure full wireless coverage. Roaming (moving from one wireless cell to another) has no
influence on the security mechanisms.
Benefits
Reliable protection of the plant against unauthorized access, manipulation and
espionage.
Mobile devices can access the automation cells from any location in the plant which
means that the number of stationary nodes for diagnostics and service can be greatly
reduced.
The security mechanisms of the SCALANCE S612 and the SOFTNET Security Client are
easy to configure and do not require specialist knowledge.
No modifications or adaptations of the existing network structure or the applications used
are necessary. Internal network nodes are found without configuration.
Industrial Ethernet
88
3.9 Protection of the production network when networking with the office network
3.9
Protection of the production network when networking with the office

network
Task
In a car bodywork plant, the company network includes both the office network, the data
processing center and the automation cells. The integration of all company areas allows
continuity from the enterprise to the field level. This means that process data such as
numbers produced, manufacturing number and type names are available throughout the
company. Apart from this, fully integrated diagnostics can be created for field devices and
network components. This continuity does, however, involve certain risks. There is a danger
of unauthorized access from the office network to the automation cells and the influence of
one automation cell on another. The network needs to be structured so that these weak
points are eliminated. The configuration should also be simple to create since personnel
without special training in security will be involved in commissioning and service.
Solution
1
SCALANCE X414-3E
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE
S612
The office network includes a Syslog server that also logs unauthorized access attempts
and overload situations.
Switches of the type SCALANCE X414-3E are responsible for handling the data traffic.
With their gigabit ports, these devices are not only suitable for a high data throughput, they
also provide wide-ranging configuration options for parameters relevant to security. Using
the access control function, for example, individual ports can be blocked for unknown nodes.
Industrial Ethernet
89
3.9 Protection of the production network when networking with the office network
Each automation cell includes several components that are connected to the network
(controllers, robots, field devices). A SCALANCE S602 acting as a firewall filters the data
packets and allows communications connections according to the firewall rules. Criteria for
the filtering might be the IP address, the MAC address or the communications protocol.
There is also an option for limiting overload. The logging functionality allows access
monitoring and logs attacks and attempted access to allow preventive measures to be taken.
Syslog information such as process data is automatically sent to the Syslog server. To allow
effective protection of the automation cells, an IP address conversion is necessary and for
this the SCALANCE S602 uses the NAT and NAPT methods.
These measures implement a comprehensive cell protection concept for the individual
production areas. The production network is protected effectively and reliably from
unauthorized access from the office network and the office network is also protected from
any influence from the production network.
Benefits
Effective protection from mutual influence between production and office network.
Protecting the plant from unauthorized attacks and communication overload by using
SCALANCE S602.
Continuous monitoring of access to the production network.
Cost saving by saving on public IP addresses.
Simple maintenance and diagnostics, since all protected cells can be set up identically.
Industrial Ethernet
90
3.10 Gigabit network in the pharmaceuticals industry
3.10
Gigabit network in the pharmaceuticals industry
Task
An existing network needs to be replaced by a new future-proof network. The aim was not
only to increase the bandwidth (gigabit), but to provide ideal conditions for PROFINET. The
intention was to use only open communications standards and there was very little time for
the implementation.
Solution
SCALANCE X308-2
2
1
3
SCALANCE X208
A redundant glass fiber-optic ring was selected as the backbone. The total length of this
cable is approximately 2 km.
The ring topology was set up with SCALANCE X308-2 devices. This device has three
gigabit ports (2 x fiber-optic, 1 x RJ-45) as well as comprehensive management functions.
The gigabit ports are used for a high-speed connection between the switches. One
SCALANCE X308-2 is configured as the redundancy manager and this prevents frames from
circulating if the transmission path is intact. If the transmission path is interrupted, this closes
the connection between its ring ports and restores a connection between all the components.
The second level linear bus structures are made up of SCALANCE X208 devices. These
devices also have a compact housing suitable for industry that is, for example, equipped with
securing collars for the RJ-45 jacks. In conjunction with the FastConnect connectors used,
this achieves a high degree of mechanical stability within the network.
Industrial Ethernet
91
3.10 Gigabit network in the pharmaceuticals industry
Benefits
Ideal configurability and simple diagnostics of the SCALANCE X devices.
More bandwidth due to the gigabit backbone.
Future-proof and suitable for straightforward expansion due to the use of PROFINET.
Industrial Ethernet
92
3.11 Communications components for extreme climatic conditions
3.11
Communications components for extreme climatic conditions
Task
A mobile loading crane in a harbor needs to be supplied with data from a logistics center.
The devices used must be able to stand up to extreme environmental conditions (salt water
spray, strong vibration caused by the movement of the crane).
Solution
SCALANCE
W786-1RJ45
1
3
SCALANCE
W786-1RJ45
SCALANCE
X104-2
The communication between the crane and the logistics center is handled via Industrial
Wireless LAN. The advantage of wireless data transmission is that neither sliding contacts
nor trailing cables are necessary. Taking into account the environmental conditions, this
represents a considerable saving in costs.
The loading crane is equipped with a SCALANCE W786-1RJ-45 and a PC for displaying
and entering data. The SCALANCE W786-1RJ-45 fitted to the outside of the crane is
particularly suitable for this application due to its resistance to ultraviolet light and salt water.
The device is configured as a client. Thanks to the antennas integrated in the housing,
external antennas and the associated cabling are unnecessary.
A SCALANCE W786-1RJ-45 is also mounted on a building of the logistics center and

acts as the access point.
Industrial Ethernet
93
3.11 Communications components for extreme climatic conditions
The integration of the access point in the company network is achieved with a
SCALANCE X104-2. Among other things, this switch provides two interfaces for fiber-optic
cables that can also be used for networks with a large span. This means that the server of
the logistics center can be accessed although it is several hundred meters away from the
loading station.
Benefits
High availability thanks to maintenance-free components for data transmission.
Unrestricted suitability of the implemented solution for the difficult environmental
conditions.
Simple integration in the existing company network.
Access to logistics data regardless of location.
Industrial Ethernet
94
SCALANCE network components

4.1
Product families
The name SCALANCE stands for SIMATIC NET network components for simple setup,
management and operation of Industrial Ethernet LANs. The product families are as follows:
SCALANCE X is the product family of Industrial Ethernet switches. Switches are active
network components that distribute data to specific addressees, control network traffic
and ensure that the load on network connections is optimally distributed.
SCALANCE X switches are available in a wide range of variants with electrical and/or
optical ports, and in some cases with special functionalities to meet strict real-time
requirements.
SCALANCE W is the family of components and accessories for wireless local area
networks ("WLANs"). The use of access points, clients and accessories allows the
connection of mobile nodes and the establishment of networks in exacting environments.
SCALANCE W components are distinguished by their ruggedness, security and reliability.
Wireless transmission can be implemented using conventional antennas, directional
antennas or over short distances with leaky feeder cables (RCoax cable).
SCALANCE S security modules protect automation networks from unauthorized access
and unnecessary communication load. Both eavesdropping and attacks by outsiders are
prevented reliably. Even if there are disturbances in the external network, data traffic in
the automation cell remains unaffected. Communication is protected regardless of the
application protocol used.
SCALANCE M Devices are used as UMTS, EGPRS (GPRS with Edge) and GPRS
routers for wireless IP communication of Industrial Ethernet-based programmable
controllers via UMTS / GSM mobile wireless networks. With UMTS, high transmission
speeds are achieved. An integrated firewall provides wide-ranging security functions.
Some models can be used both as a VPN server and as a VPN client (IPsec).
Note
For further information on support when selecting Industrial Ethernet switches and when
configuring the module variants, the SIMATIC NET Selection Tool is available.
Online version: http://www.siemens.com/snst
Offline version: http://www.siemens.com/snst-download
Industrial Ethernet
95

4.2 Common properties of all SCALANCE devices
4.2
Common properties of all SCALANCE devices
Properties shared by all SCALANCE devices

All SCALANCE devices have the following properties. If there are exceptions, this will be
pointed out in the description of the relevant device.
Autocrossover function
All SCALANCE devices have an integrated MDI/MDIX autocrossover function on their
electrical ports making it possible to use straight-through cables. This prevents malfunctions
resulting from mismatching send and receive wires. This makes installation much easier for
the user.
Autonegotiation
All SCALANCE devices also have the autonegotiation function. Autonegotiation means the
automatic detection of the functionality of the port at the opposite end. Using autonegotiation,
repeaters or end devices can detect the functionality available on the interface of a partner
device allowing automatic configuration of different types of device. With autonegotiation,
two components connected to a link segment can exchange parameters and set themselves
to match the supported communication functionality.
The SCALANCE devices are therefore plug-and-play devices that require no settings when
they are put into operation.
Please note the following:
that devices that do not support autonegotiation need to be permanently set to half
duplex.
that the port speed and duplex mode must be set identically on the connection partners
otherwise frames may be lost.
Fault mask
On all SCALANCE devices with a button on the front panel, it is possible to set a specific
configuration as the desired status (good status). Deviations from this setting occurring
during operation are treated as errors.
Monitored error statuses include, for example, the status of the power supply or link to a
communications partner down, to which the SCALANCE device reacts with a fault LED and
by opening the signaling contact.
Avoiding the formation of loops

The typical configuration of a network with the SCALANCE products is a tree structure. The
direct connection of two ports on the switch or accidental connection over several switches
causes an illegal loop. Such a loop can lead to network overload and network failures.
Industrial Ethernet
96

4.2 Common properties of all SCALANCE devices
When configuring the network with SCALANCE X300, X400 and X500, meshing is possible
since, in this case, the Rapid Spanning Tree algorithm can eliminate loops. At the same
time, RSTP increases the availability of the network. If one connection fails, the redundant
connection is activated.
Cable length at the electrical ports

A maximum of two IE-TP cords or IE-TP-XP cords with a total length of max. 10 m can be
used between two adjacent SCALANCE devices with IE TP ports.
With the IE FC cables and IE FC RJ-45 plug, an overall cable length of a maximum of 100 m
is permitted between two devices depending on the cable type.
Table 4- 1
Maximum runs with twisted-pair cables
Cabling structure
Cable type
In one piece
(without IE TP cords)
Structured
Max. length
Max. total of the patch

cables (TP cord)
IE FC standard cable GP
100 m
IE FC flexible cable GP
85 m
IE FC torsion cable GP
55 m
IE FC trailing cable GP
85 m
IE FC trailing cable
85 m
IE FC marine cable
85 m
IE FC FRNC cable GP
85 m
IE FC food cable
85 m
IE FC festoon cable GP
85 m
90 m
(with IE-TP cords and

IE FC outlet RJ-45 or IE IE FC torsion cable GP
FC RJ-45 modular
outlet)
10 m
75 m
45 m
75 m
75 m
IE FC marine cable
75 m
IE FC FRNC cable GP
75 m
IE FC food cable
75 m
75 m
Note on Installation
When installing the devices, read the instructions in the operating instructions of the relevant
device. With a few exceptions, the devices are suitable for wall mounting, DIN rail mounting
and mounting on the S7 standard rail. In individual cases, it is possible to install using a
mounted adapter.
Industrial Ethernet
97

4.3 Web Based Management for configuring networks
4.3
Web Based Management for configuring networks
Configuration over a Web interface

All SCALANCE devices that have management functions can be configured using "Web
Based Management" (WBM).
The devices have an integrated Web server that can be accessed by the configuration
engineer with a browser via every Ethernet connection. The server then provides a series of
Web pages. On these Web pages, the configuration engineer can make all important
settings and can also run diagnostics and report functions.
Figure 4-1
Web Based Management based on the example of configuring a W788 access point
Advantages
Access is possible from any PC with a Web browser installed on it and with an Ethernet
connection to the target device. With SCALANCE W devices, this connection can also be
over a wireless network.
The installation of special software is not necessary and no specialist knowledge is
required to navigate through and work with WBM.
Access is password protected.
For more detailed information on the functions of the WBM, refer to the compact operating
instructions of the individual devices and in the configuration manual.
Industrial Ethernet
98

4.4 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
4.4
SCALANCE X switches and media converters
4.4.1
Type designations and properties
Overview of the performance classes of the SCALANCE X devices

In the overview graphic below, you can see which performance classes are covered by the
various SCALANCE X devices.
CSM (Compact
Switch Module)
Integrated switch function

(communications processors)
INE
OF
PR
X-500 1)
managed
Operations Level
Network components (SCALANCE X)
CP 343-1
Advanced
X-500
CP 443-1
Advanced
INE
OF
CP 1623/
CP 1628
X-400
INE
OF
X-300
managed
PR
1)
Control Level
1)
X-400
managed
PR
X-300
X-300EEC
XR-300/XR-300EEC
ET
IN
OF
CP 343-1
CP 443-1
CP 343-1 Lean
CP 343-1 BACnet
1)
X-200
managed
PR
XF-200
X-200
X-200PRO
XF204IRT
X-200IRT PRO
X-200IRT
managed
X-200IRT
T
INE
OF
PR
X-100
unmanaged
Field Level
1)
T
INE
OF
PR
X-100
X-100 Media converter
X005
XB-000/XB-000G
LOGO!
CSM
CSM
CSM 377
1277
CP 1616
CP 1604
X-000
unmanaged
PR
G_IK10_XX_10237
E
FIN
1) additionally supports PROFINET diagnostics
Figure 4-2
Overview of IE switches
Industrial Ethernet
99

Type designations and properties

Identify the SCALANCE X devices based on their type key. The design and basic
characteristics can be identified based on the following type key.
EEC
PoE
TS
[-]
M
PRO
Expanded temperature range

Power over Ethernet
Transport System
Device without module slots
Modular device
Degree of protection IP65
Interface
Number of optical ports or
number of module slots in modular devices
Number of electrical ports or
total number of ports in modular devices
Product line
0
Unmanaged switch
1
2
3
Managed switch
4
5
[-]
R
F
B
Figure 4-3
Compact housing
Rack device
Flat housing
Plastic box housing
Type key SCALANCE X
Interfaces of devices without optical ports:

Interface
Property
LF
RJ-45 port electrical for 10 Mbps
FE
RJ-45 port electrical for 10/100 Mbps.
GE
RJ-45 port electrical for 10/100/1000 Mbps.
RNA
Ethernet port with RNA capability
[-]
RJ-45 electrical for 10/100 Mbps or 10/100/1000 Mbps.
Industrial Ethernet
100

Interfaces of devices with optical ports:
Interface
Property
LF
BFOC port 10 Mbps multimode FO cable (up to max. 5 km)
AUI
AUI port 10 Mbps Industrial Ethernet plug-in cable 727-1 (AUI drop cable) (up to
max. 0.05 km)
FE
SC port 100 Mbps multimode FO cable (up to max. 5 km).
LD FE
SC port 100 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 26 km).
POF
SC port with 100 Mbps plastic optical fiber, POF (up to max. 0.05 km)
POF/PCF SC RJ ports 100 Mbps
[-]
SC port 1000 Mbps multimode FO cable (up to max. 750 m).
LD
LH
LH+
ELH
Management functions
The SCALANCE X200, SCALANCE X300, SCALANCE X400 and SCALANCE X500 devices
are equipped with management functions. These devices are also known as "managed
switches". The managed devices provide numerous configuration and diagnostics functions
that make the operation of an Industrial Ethernet network much more convenient. The
SCALANCE X100, SCALANCE XB000 and SCALANCE X005 devices have no management
functions. These "unmanaged switches" are therefore less expensive.
SCALANCE X modular switches

To achieve the greatest possible flexibility in terms of interfaces, the use of the modular
devices SCALANCE XR324-12M, SCALANCE X308-2M, SCALANCE X414-3E,
SCALANCE X408-2 and SCALANCE XR-552-12M is recommended. By making use of
media modules, these provide the maximum possible variability.
Electrical and optical interfaces

SCALANCE X devices can be used as switches in both optical and electrical Industrial
Ethernet networks. Each performance class therefore includes devices with varying numbers
of electrical and optical interfaces. The optical interfaces also include versions specially
designed to cover long distances. These are available in devices that have LD, LH, LH+ or
ELH in the device designation.
Fault-tolerance due to redundancy

The SCALANCE X200, X300, X400 and X500 switches have functions that allow the setup
and management of redundant networks in a ring topology. These networks can handle the
failure of individual nodes or cable sections and "divert" the data traffic so that the network
remains available.
Industrial Ethernet
101

IRT for strict real-time requirements

Devices with the IRT suffix (Isochronous Real Time) are particularly suitable for applications
in which a data transmission must be guaranteed at fixed intervals. To allow this, all devices
in an Industrial Ethernet have the same timebase. The messages of the preferred nodes are
transmitted together at previously configured times. Frames of other nodes are held back by
the IRT switches and sent later.
SCALANCE X100 media converters

The media converters of the SCALANCE X-100 line are particularly suitable for applications
in which two Industrial Ethernet networks implemented with different media need to be
linked. These have only two interfaces and therefore fit into an extremely narrow casing.
They can also be used in a redundant ring.
The media converters have electrical and optical interfaces to link optical networks with
electrical networks and to link existing network segments or individual end devices via
10BaseFL, AUI drop cable, etc.
Devices for special environmental conditions

Some switches are available with special constructions that allow them to be used in special
environments.
These include the version of the housing in IP65 with M12 connectors. This version has the
suffix PRO in the type designation.
Switches with the EEC suffix have an extended temperature range in which they can be
used and they are also suitable for gaseous atmospheres.
Notes on installation
When installing the devices, read the instructions in the compact operating instructions of
particular device. With a few exceptions, the devices are suitable for wall mounting, DIN rail
mounting and mounting on the S7 standard rail. In individual cases, it is possible to install
using a mounted adapter.
Devices with the suffix R are either suitable as desktop devices or for mounting in a 19" rack.
To do this mount the appropriate mounting aids as described in the compact operating
instructions.
4.4.2
Functions of SCALANCE X devices
Introduction
This section describes certain functions of SCALANCE X devices. For further information on
all the functions, refer to the compact operating instructions of the devices or the
configuration manual.
Industrial Ethernet
102

Signaling contact
The signaling contact is connected to a 2-pin plug-in terminal block. The signaling contact
(optical relay contact) is a floating switch with which error/fault states can be signaled by
breaking the contact.
The following errors/faults are signaled by the signaling contact:
The failure of a link on one of the two monitored ports.
The failure of one of the two redundant power supplies.
The connection or disconnection of a communication node on an unmonitored port does not
lead to an error message.
The signaling contact remains activated until the error/fault is eliminated or until the current
status is applied as the new desired status using the button or by Web Based Management.
When the device is turned off, the signaling contact is always activated (open).
Support of virtual networks (VLAN)

There is no physical difference between a virtual network (VLAN) and a normal LAN. The
particular feature of a VLAN is that devices can be assigned to a device group during
configuration. Several of these device groups use a network infrastructure that exists only
once physically. Several "virtual networks" result on the one physical network. Data
exchange and even the transmission of broadcasts takes place only within a VLAN.
You can configure VLANs on the device or using GVRP frames.
MAC address list

If this function is activated for a port, the device only forwards frames received at this port if
their source address exists in the address table.
SCALANCE devices log the information about which MAC address can be reached over
which port in a learning table. Entries in this list are deleted automatically when there is no
further data transfer for the corresponding MAC addresses. The time after which addresses
are deleted if there is no data traffic is set in the 'Aging Time' parameter.
The learning table indicates the Ethernet interface on which a MAC address can be reached.
The MAC address list can be based on the port or MAC addresses.
Network access protection complying with the standard IEEE 802.1X

Ports can be configured for end devices that support authentication according to IEEE
802.1X. The authentication is via a RADIUS server.
Industrial Ethernet
103

IGMP Snooping and IGMP Querier

IGMP (Internet Group Message Protocol, RFC 2236) is a protocol for the group management
of IP multicasts.
The group management is on a central device, for example a switch. With IGM Snooping,
the switch (IGM querier) queries the multicast group membership of its connected devices.
The switch notes the outgoing interfaces on which devices are located that want to receive
certain multicast IP packets. The switch enters the devices in a list (MAC filter table). When a
switch receives a multicast, the message is forwarded only to the members of the multicast
group. The multicast data traffic is therefore filtered and the load on the network limited.
Bundling network links for redundancy and higher bandwidth

Link aggregation according to IEEE 802.3ad allows several links between neighboring
devices to be bundled to achieve higher bandwidths, see section Link aggregation
(Page 72).
Topology support (LLDP)

The topology is identified using LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol). The devices
exchange LLDP frames with each other. The information is stored and can be represented
graphically by network management software. In the default setting, LLDP is enabled for all
ports; in other words, LLDP frames are sent and received on all ports.
Using the GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)

Whether or not a port belongs to a VLAN is set dynamically using GVRP frames.
Forwarding of multicast frames with GMRP (Generic Multicast Protocol)

GMRP is a mechanism for efficient forwarding of multicast frames. With a GARP Information
Declaration (GID), a node registers with the IE switch as recipient for a multicast address.
The IE switch sends this registration to its ports. As a result, this address is also known to
other IE switches and they send multicast frames for this address only to ports that have
received a registration for this address.
Fast redundancy in the ring

The following redundancy methods are possible:
MRP in the ring with a maximum reconfiguration time of 200 ms, see section MRP
(Page 67)
HSR with a maximum reconfiguration time of 300 ms, see section HSR (Page 69)
MRPD (IE switches with IRT) with 250 s reconfiguration time, see section MRPD
(Page 69)
Standby redundancy, see section HSR (Page 69)
Industrial Ethernet
104

Limiting the transfer rate of incoming and outgoing data

To limit the transfer load, the maximum number of data packets per second can be specified
for the individual ports.
The limit values can apply to the following category of frames:
Broadcast: Special form of multicast.
Multicast: A device sends a single data packet to several recipients
Unicast: A device sends the data packets to one recipient
Industrial Ethernet
105

4.4.3
SCALANCE X005
4.4.3.1
Description
Figure 4-4
SCALANCE X005
The SCALANCE X005 switch allows the cost-effective installation of small Industrial Ethernet
linear bus or star structures with switching functionality.
The SCALANCE X005 has five RJ-45 jacks for connection of end devices or other network
segments.
To keep the size of the switch as small as possible while including a large number of TP
interfaces, a redundant power supply and signaling contact were not implemented.
4.4.3.2
Functions
The switch does not support any redundancy functions and cannot be used in redundant
networks. An exception is between two devices capable of RNA. If the connecting network
line is not subject to other redundancy methods, the device does not need to capable of
redundancy or RNA.
The SCALANCE X005TS (transportation systems) is suitable for railway and road traffic due
to its specification according to EN 50155 and e1/E1.
Industrial Ethernet
106

4.4.3.3
Interfaces
Main statement
Table 4- 2
Name
SCALANCE X005
SCALANCE X005TS
Transmission rate
10 / 100 Mbps
10 / 100 Mbps
Interfaces
5 x RJ-45 ports
5 x RJ-45 ports
Power supply
Signaling contact
--
--
Order numbers
X005
Industrial Ethernet switch for 10/100 Mbps; with five

10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports for establishing small star
and bus structures
6GK5 005-0BA00-1AA3
X005TS
Industrial Ethernet switch with extended temperature

range and approvals for use in railway and road
traffic
6GK5 005-0BA00-1CA3
Industrial Ethernet
107

4.4.4
SCALANCE XB000
4.4.4.1
Description
Figure 4-5
SCALANCE XB000
The unmanaged Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE XB000 line allow small
electrical and optical star or bus structures to be set up with switching functionality in
machines or plant sections. Depending on the version, the switches have 5 to 8 RJ-45 jacks
for connection of end devices or other network segments. Here, a connection can be
implemented by an optical interface.
With SCALANCE XB000, there are variants that support gigabit Ethernet. These devices
have the suffix G in the device designation.
4.4.4.2
Characteristics
Data rates of 10/100 and, depending on the specific device, 1000 Mbps (half/full duplex)
are supported.
Diagnostics LED
Industrial Ethernet
108

4.4.4.3
Interfaces
Table 4- 3
IE Switch
Twisted pair
RJ-45 jacks 10 /
100 Mbps
Fiber-optic cables
RJ-45 jacks 10 /
100 / 1000 Mbps
Fiber-optic
ports 100
Mbps
Fiber-optic
ports 1000
Mbps
Max.
segment
length /
km
Multim Single
ode
mode
XB004-1
4* / 5**
XB004-1LD
26
XB005
XB008
XB004-1G
0.75
XB004-1LDG
10
XB005G
XB008G
Suitable / available or according to the specified standard.

* at 50 m core diameter of the FO cable
** at 62.5 m core diameter of the FO cable
Order numbers
XB004-1
4 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical, 1x 100

Mbps SC port optical (multimode, glass), up to
max. 5 km
6GK5 004-1BD00-1AB2
XB004-1LD
4 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical, 1x 100

Mbps SC port optical (single mode, glass), up to
max. 26 km
6GK5 004-1BF00-1AB2
XB005
5 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical
6GK5 005-0BA00-1AB2
XB008
6GK5 008-0BA00-1AB2
XB004-1G
4 x 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical, 1 x

1000 Mbps SC port optical (multimode, glass), up
to max. 0.75 km
6GK5 004-1GL00-1AB2
XB004-1LDG
4 x 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical, 1 x

1000 Mbps SC port optical (single mode, glass),
up to max. 10 km
6GK5 004-1GM00-1AB2
XB005G
5 x 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical
6GK5 005-0GA00-1AB2
XB008G
8 x 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical
6GK5 008-0GA00-1AB2
Industrial Ethernet
109

4.4.5
SCALANCE X100 unmanaged
4.4.5.1
Description
Figure 4-6
SCALANCE X100 unmanaged switches
The unmanaged Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X100 line allow costeffective establishment of Industrial Ethernet with 10/100 Mbps bus or star structures with
switching functionality. They are particularly suitable for factory floor applications and have a
rugged metal housing for space-saving installation in cabinets, on DIN rails, S7-300 standard
rails or for wall mounting.
The node or network connectors are rugged, suitable for industry and have electrical or
optical interfaces depending on the model. Plug-in connectors complying with PROFINET
provide additional strain and bending relief by locking into the housing.
Industrial Ethernet
110

4.4.5.2
Characteristics
The individual devices have the characteristics shown in the following table:
X108PoE
X104-2
X106-1
X108
X112-2
X116
X124
Modular system design
Gigabit Ethernet
PoE Power over Ethernet
Diagnostics LED
Redundant
Signaling contact
On-site display
Power supply
(Set button)
C-PLUG slot
Suitable/available or according to the specified standard.
Additional information on the SCALANCE X108PoE:

Over and above the pure Ethernet functionality, ports 1 and 2 can also be used to supply
power to Power-over-Ethernet end devices, for example SCALANCE-W, in compliance with
802.3af. The two ports providing PoE are supplied from the same power source. This means
that they are electrically interconnected. They are however isolated from ground, from the
ports that do not provide PoE and from the power connector (24 V). Their use is therefore
subject to the conditions listed in IEEE 802.3af for Environment A. The ports that do not
provide PoE are all isolated from each other. Ports 3 to 8 do not have the PoE function.
Note
Ethernet devices without PoE functionality can also be connected to ports 1 and 2. A voltage
is applied only after the SCALANCE X108 PoE has detected a PoE end device complying
with the standard at the port.
Industrial Ethernet
111

4.4.5.3
Interfaces
Table 4- 4
IE Switch
Twisted pair
Fiber-optic cables
Max. segment
length / km
Multimo
de
4* / 5**
1
(BFOC)
4* / 5**
12
2
(BFOC)
4* / 5**
X116
16
X124
24
Fiber-optic
RJ-45
jacks 10 ports 100
Mbps
/ 100 /
1000
Mbps
with
PoE
RJ-45 jacks 10 /
100 Mbps
RJ-45
jacks 10
/ 100 /
1000
Mbps
X104-2
2
(BFOC)
X106-1
X108
X108PoE
X112-2
Fiber-optic
ports 1000
Mbps
Single
mode

Order numbers
X104-2
4 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports, electrical, 2 x BFOC ports, optical

(multimode, glass), up to max. 5 km
6GK5 104-2BB00-2AA3
X106-1
6 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports, electrical, 1 x BFOC port, optical

6GK5106-1BB00-2AA3
X108
8 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports, electrical
6GK5 108-0BA00-2AA3
X108PoE
6 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports, electrical 2 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45

PoE ports, electrical
6GK5 108-0PA00-2AA3
X112-2
12 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports, electrical, 2 x BFOC ports, optical

6GK5 112-2BB00-2AA3
X116
6GK5 116-0BA00-2AA3
X124
6GK5 124-0BA00-2AA3
Industrial Ethernet
112

4.4.6
4.4.6.1
Description
Figure 4-7
Media converters are used to link two Industrial Ethernet networks. They are ideally suited
for the conversion of various transmission media in Industrial Ethernet networks with
transmission rates from 10/100 Mbps in bus, star and ring structures.
Individual end devices or network segments located at a distance from the main network can
be connected via the optical link of the SCALANCE X100 media converters. It is also
possible to integrate an optical link into a redundant ring and to install the SCALANCE X100
media converters in a standby link.
The major advantage of the converters is their compact construction and cost-effective
design. The media converters are designed for installation in a cabinet.
Industrial Ethernet
113

4.4.6.2
Features and functions
Characteristics
X101-1
X101-1LD
X101-1POF
X101-1FL
X101-1AUI
Gigabit Ethernet
Diagnostics LED
Redundant power supply
Signaling contact
On-site display (Set button)
C-PLUG slot
Functions
All devices have the following function:
Ring redundancy without RM functionality
Industrial Ethernet
114

4.4.6.3
Interfaces
Table 4- 5
IE Switch
Twisted pair
Fiber-optic cables
RJ-45 jacks 10 /
100 Mbps
Optical
connectors
10 Mbps
Optical
connectors
100 Mbps
Max. segment
length / km
FO
multimod
e
FO single
mode
POF
AUI
X101-1
1
(BFOC)
4* / 5**
X101-1LD
1
(BFOC)
26
X101-1POF
1
(SC RJ)
0.05
X101-1FL
1
(BFOC)
X101-1AUI
1
(AUI)
0.05

Order numbers
X101-1
1 X 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 port; 1 X 100 Mbps multimode BFOC 6GK5 101-1BB00-2AA3
X101-1LD
1 X 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 port; 1 X 100 Mbps single mode
6GK5 101-1BC00-2AA3
BFOC
X101-1POF
1 X 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 port;1 X 100 Mbps POF SC RJ
6GK5 101-1BH00-2AA3
X101-1FL
1 X 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 port; 1 X 10 Mbps multimode BFOC
6GK5 101-1BY00-2AA3
X101-1AUI
1 X 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 port; 1 X 10 Mbps AUI segment
6GK5 101-1BX00-2AA3
port
Industrial Ethernet
115

4.4.6.4
Application examples
Network connection and media transition

The unmanaged media converters of the SCALANCE X100 product line allow the costeffective connection of network segments or nodes with different transmission media
(optical/electrical) within Industrial Ethernet linear bus, star and ring structures. They are
designed for installation in a switching cubicle.
Individual end devices or network segments located at a distance from the main network can
be connected via the optical link of the SCALANCE X100 media converters. It is also
possible to integrate an optical link into a redundant ring and to install the SCALANCE X100
media converters in a standby link.
6,0$7,&6
ZLWK&3
352),1(7
,(VWDQGDUGFDEOH
6ZLWFK
6&$/$1&(
;
,QGXVWULDO
(WKHUQHW
2/0
,QGXVWULDO
(WKHUQHW
2/0
*ODVV)2&
0HGLDFRQYHUWHU
6&$/$1&(
;)/
6,0$7,&6
ZLWK&3
3&ZLWK
&3
+XPDQPDFKLQHLQWHUIDFH
Figure 4-8
,QGXVWULDO
(WKHUQHW
2/0
6,0$7,&6
ZLWK&3
3&ZLWK
&3
6,0$7,&6
ZLWK&3
3&ZLWK
&3
*B,.B;;B
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
Example of using the X101-1FL media converter: Connection of an optical network

segment to copper Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet
116

6,0$7,&6
ZLWK&3
,(6WDQGDUG&DEOH
0HGLDFRQYHUWHU
6&$/$1&(
;$8,
Figure 4-9
6ZLWFK
6&$/$1&(
;
%DVH6HJPHQW
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH

$8,GURSFDEOH
7UDQVFHLYHU
LQFOPHGLXP
DWWDFKPHQW
XQLW
*B,.B;;B
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
Example of using the X101-1AUI media converter: Connection of existing network

segments to IE networks
Cascading (series connection) two media converters

In this mode, two media converters are connected in series via their FO ports. This mode is,
for example, useful when two electrical Industrial Ethernet networks located at some
distance from each other need to be linked together.
Industrial Ethernet
117

4.4.7
SCALANCE X200/X200 IRT
4.4.7.1
Description
Overview
Figure 4-10
SCALANCE X200 managed switches
Figure 4-11
SCALANCE XF200
Figure 4-12
SCALANCE X 20x IRT PRO
Industrial Ethernet
118

Figure 4-13
SCALANCE X204 RNA
SCALANCE X200 Industrial Ethernet switches allow the cost-effective installation of 10/100
Mbps Industrial Ethernet linear (bus), star and ring structures with switching functionality,
where availability of the network or remote diagnostics options are required. The devices
have IP30 protection and are designed for installation in a cabinet. With IP65, the
SCALANCE X208PRO is intended for installation outside a cabinet. The SCALANCE X2022P IRT PRO and SCALANCE X204 IRT PRO devices have IP67 protection.
SCALANCE X200 switches vary in terms of the functions they provide and the number and
type of electrical and optical IE interfaces.
The SCALANCE X200IRT switches form a special class by using the "cut through" switching
mechanism, the optimum solution to meet the real-time requirements of PROFINET.
SCALANCE X200IRT switches allow the installation of isochronous mode real-time Industrial
Ethernet linear bus and star structures with switching functionality. The special requirements
for automation solutions in terms of linear topology, hard real time and unrestricted IT
openness are incorporated in one technology.
The only difference between the devices of the SCALANCE XF200 product line and the
SCALANCE X200 product is the flatter construction.
Industrial Ethernet
119

4.4.7.2
Characteristics
X204-2
X200-4P IRT
XF204
X204-2TS
X201-3P IRT
XF204-2
X204-2LD
X201-3P IRT PRO
XF206-1
X206-1
X202-2IRT
XF208
X206-1LD
X202-2P IRT
X208
X202-2P IRT PRO
X208PRO
X204IRT
X212-2
X204IRT PRO
X212-2LD
XF204IRT
X204RNA
X204RNA EEC
X216
X224
XF204
XF204-2
XF206-1
XF208
Diagnostics LED
Redundant
Power supply
Signaling contact
On-site display
(Set button)
C-PLUG slot
Industrial Ethernet
120

Functions
All devices have the following functions:
Configuration with the Primary Setup Tool (PST) V3 or higher;
It is only possible to assign the IP address with the Primary Setup Tool if the SCALANCE
X-200 can be reached via Ethernet.
Configuration of the IP address with DHCP
Configuration with STEP 7 V 5.3 plus SP 1
Web-based Management
Command Line Interface
Configuration with STEP 7
SNMP
SNTP
Apart from the X208PRO, the devices have the following functions:
PROFINET diagnostics
Ring redundancy including RM functionality
Passive Listening
The devices with the suffix IRT have the following extra functions:
Standby redundancy
IRT capability
Fast learning
The devices with the suffix RNA have the following extra functions:
RNA (PRP)
Industrial Ethernet
121

4.4.7.3
Interfaces
Table 4- 6
IE Switch
Twisted pair
Fiber-optic cables
M12 10 / 100
RJ-45
jacks 10 / Mbps
100 Mbps
Optical
connectors
100 Mbps
Optical
connectors
1000 Mbps
Max. segment
length / km
FO
multim
ode
FO
single
mode
POF
PCF
X204-2
2
(BFOC)
4* / 5**
X204-2TS
2
(BFOC)
4* / 5**
X204-2LD
2
(BFOC)
26
X206-1
1
(BFOC)
4* / 5**
X206-1LD
1
(BFOC)
26
X208
X208PRO
X212-2
12
2
(BFOC)
4* / 5**
X212-2LD
12
2
(BFOC)
26
X216
16
X224
16
XF204
XF204-2
2
(BFOC)
4* / 5**
XF206-1
1
(BFOC)
4* / 5**
XF208
X200-4P IRT
4
(SC RJ)
0,05 / 0,100 ****
X201-3P IRT
3
(SC RJ)
0,05 / 0,100 ****
X201-3P IRT PRO
3
(SC-RJ /
push-pull
plug PRO)
0,05 / 0,100 ****
X202-2IRT
2
(BFOC)
4* / 5**
X202-2P IRT
2
(SC RJ)
0,05 / 0,100 ****
Industrial Ethernet
122

IE Switch
X202-2P IRT PRO
Twisted pair
Fiber-optic cables
M12 10 / 100
RJ-45
jacks 10 / Mbps
100 Mbps
Optical
connectors
100 Mbps
Optical
connectors
1000 Mbps
Max. segment
length / km
FO
multim
ode
FO
single
mode
POF
PCF
2
(IE RJ-45
plug
PRO)
2
(SC-RJ /
push-pull
plug PRO
0,05 / 0,100 ****
X204IRT PRO
4
(IE RJ-45
plug
PRO)
X204RNA
2x2
2 x ports
and 2 x
PRP
ports
2x2
2
(Duplex LC)
3
(SFP991-1)
2
(Duplex LC)
26
(SFP991-1LD)
X204IRT
X204RNA EEC
2 RJ-45
(ports)
and
2 x RJ-45
or
2 x SFP
modules
(PRP
ports)
70
(SFP991-1LH+)

*** with POF fiber-optic cables 1 - 50 m and PCF fiber-optic cables 1 - 100 m
Note
TP connectors of SCALANCE X204RNA EEC
2 x RJ-45 for connecting two end devices / network structures without PRP-1 capability and
optionally 2 x RJ-45 or 2 x SFP modules for connecting network structures capable of PRP.
If an SFP module is inserted, the corresponding RJ-45 jack is disabled.
Example: If SFP module "PRP A" is inserted, the TP Interface "PRP A" has no function
Note
SCALANCE X200RNA
The networks LAN A and/or LAN B can have PROFINET or IRT functionality. These cannot,
however, be transferred via the SCALANCE X200RNA because PRP does not support this.
PRP functionality is not impaired by using PROFINET or IRT components in the LAN A and
LAN B networks.
Industrial Ethernet
123

Order numbers
X204-2
with four 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports and two FO ports 6GK5
204-2BB10-2AA3
6GK5 204-2BB10-2AA3
X204-2TS
with four 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports and two FO ports with
extended temperature range and approval EN 50155 for rolling
stock applications
6GK5 204-2BB10-2CA2
X204-2LD
with four 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports and two FO ports Long
Distance
6GK5 204-2BC10-2AA3
X206-1
with six 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports and one FO port
6GK5 206-1BB10-2AA3
X206-1LD
with six 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports and one FO port Long
Distance
6GK5 206-1BC10-2AA3
X208
with eight 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports
6GK5 208-0BA10-2AA3
X208PRO
with eight 10/100 Mbps M12 ports, incl. eleven M12 dust caps,
degree of protection IP65,
6GK5 208-0HA00-2AA6
X212-2
with 12 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports and two FO ports
6GK5 212-2BB00-2AA3
X212-2LD
with 12 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports and two FO ports with six
10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports and one FO port Long Distance
6GK5 212-2BC00-2AA3
X216
with 16 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports
6GK5 216-0BA00-2AA3
X224
with 24 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports
6GK5 224-0BA00-2AA3
XF204
6GK5 204-0BA00-2AF2
XF204-2
4 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical; 2 x 100 Mbps BFOC

ports; optical (multimode, glass), up to max. 5 km
6GK5 204-2BC00-2AF2
XF206-1
6 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical, 1x 100 Mbps BFOC

port optical (multimode, glass), up to max. 5 km
6GK5 206-1BC00-2AF2
XF208
6GK5 208-0BA00-2AF2
X200-4P IRT
4 x 100 Mbps POF/PCF SC RJ ports
6GK5 200-4AH00-2BA3
X201-3P IRT
1 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 port, 3 x 100 Mbps POF/PCF SC RJ

ports
6GK5 201-3BH00-2BA3
X201-3P IRT PRO
1 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 port, 3 x 100 Mbps POF/PCF SC RJ

ports
6GK5 201-3BH00-2BA3
X202-2IRT
2 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports, 2 x 100 Mbps multimode BFOC

ports
6GK5 202-2BB00-2BA3
X202-2P IRT
2 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports, 2 x 100 Mbps POF/PCF SC RJ

ports
6GK5 202-2BH00-2BA3
X202-2P IRT PRO
2 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 push-pull ports, 2 x 100 Mbps

POF/PCF SC RJ push-pull ports
6GK5 202-2JR00-2BA6
X204IRT
4 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports
6GK5 204-0BA00-2BA3
X204IRT PRO
4 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 push-pull ports
6GK5 204-0JA00-2BA6
X204RNA
with four 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports
6GK5204-0BA00-2MB2
X204RNA EEC
with four 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports, of which 2 combo ports
6GK5204-0BS00-2NA3
Industrial Ethernet
124

4.4.8
SCALANCE X300
4.4.8.1
Description
Figure 4-14
SCALANCE X300
Figure 4-15
SCALANCE XR324-12M
The managed switches SCALANCE X300 from SIMATIC NET are intended for use in highspeed plant networks.
With the HSR redundancy function and standby coupling of rings, high network availability
can be achieved. If there is an interruption on the connection between these switches, the
SCALANCE X300 IE switch used as redundancy manager acts like a switch and in a very
short time creates a linear bus from the ring with redundancy manager. As a result, a
functional, end-to-end structure is restored.
Support of IT standards such as VLAN, RSTP, IGMP, and GARP makes seamless
integration of automation networks in existing office networks possible.
The IE Switches SCALANCE X300 and XR300 are designed for use in switching cubicles
and cabinets. The X300 models have a rugged metal housing with degree of protection IP30
for installation on a DIN rail, on a S7-300 standard rail or for wall mounting. The XR300
models are intended for mounting in a 19" rack.
All devices have a C-PLUG for backing up the configuration data and a signaling contact.
They are suitable for use of a redundant power supply.
Industrial Ethernet
125

4.4.8.2
Characteristics
X310FE
X310X
X308-2M
X306-1LD FE
X307-3
XR324-12M
X320-1FE
X307-3LD
XR324-4M EEC
X320-3LD FE
X308-2
X308-2M PoE
X308-2LD
X308-2LH
X308-2LH+
X308-2
X302-7EEC
X307-2EEC
Gigabit Ethernet
Diagnostics LED
Redundant
Power supply
On-site display
(Set button)
C-PLUG slot
Industrial Ethernet
126

Functions
SNMP / SNMP-supported diagnostics
Standby redundancy
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network)
GVRP (Generic VLAN Registration Protocol)
STP/RSTP (Spanning Tree Protocol/Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
Passive Listening
IGMP Snooping/Querier (Internet Group Management Protocol)
GMRP(Generic Multicast Protocol)
Broadcast/multicast/unicast limiter
Broadcast blocking
Access Control List (ACL)
IEEE 802.1x (Radius)
Link aggregation
Industrial Ethernet
127

4.4.8.3
Interfaces
Table 4- 7
IE Switch
Twisted pair
Fiber-optic cables
RJ-45
RJ-45
connectors
connectors
10 / 100 Mbps 10 / 100 /
1000 Mbps
RJ-45
connectors
10 / 100 /
1000 Mbps
with PoE
Fiber-optic
ports 100
Mbps
Fiber-optic
ports 1000
Mbps
Multim
Max.
ode
segment
length / km
Single
mode
X304-2FE
2
(SC)
X306-1LD FE
1
(SC)
26
X307-3
3
(SC)
0.75
X307-3LD
3
(SC)
10
X308-2
2
(SC)
0.75
X308-2LD
2
(SC)
10
X308-2LH
2
(SC)
40
X308-2LH+
2
(SC)
70
X310
X310FE
10
X320-1FE
20
4** / 5***
X320-3LD FE
20
2
(SC)
5 / 26
X308-2M
4 and *
X308-2M TS
4 and *
XR324-12M
X308-2M PoE
XR324-4M
PoE
8 and *
X302-7 EEC
4** / 5***
X307-2 EEC
4** / 5***
Suitable / exists or according to specified standard.

* 2 x100/1000 Mbps slots for 2 port media modules, electrical or optical.
** with a core diameter of 50 m
*** with a core diameter of 62.5 m
Industrial Ethernet
128

Order numbers
X304-2FE
2 x 100 Mbps SC ports, optical (single mode, glass), up to

max. 26 km
6GK5 304-2BD00-2AA3
X306-1LD FE
1 x 100 Mbps SC port, optical (single mode, glass), up to

max. 26 km
6GK5 306-1BF00-2AA3
X307-3
3 x 1000 Mbps SC ports, optical (multimode, glass),

up to max. 750 m
6GK5 307-3BL00-2AA3
X307-3LD

max. 10 km
6GK5 307-3BM00-2AA3
X308-2
2 x 1000 Mbps SC ports, optical (multimode, glass), up to

6GK5 308-2FL00-2AA3
max. 750 m
1 x 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ-45 port, electrical,7 x 10/100 Mbps
RJ-45 ports, electrical
X308-2LD

max. 10 km
1 x 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ-45 port, electrical, 7 x 10/100
Mbps RJ-45 ports, electrical
6GK5 308-2FM00-2AA3
X308-2LH

max. 40 km
6GK5 308-2FN00-2AA3
X308-2LH+

max. 70 km
6GK5 308-2FP00-2AA3
X310
3 x 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ-45 ports, electrical

6GK5 310-0FA00-2AA3
X310FE
6GK5 310-0BA00-2AA3
X320-1FE
1 x 100 Mbps SC port, optical (multimode, glass),

up to max. 5 km
6GK5 320-1BD00-2AA3
X320-3LD FE
1 x 100 Mbps SC port, optical (multimode, glass),

up to max. 5 km
2 x 100 Mbps SC port, optical (single mode, glass), up to
max. 26 km
6GK5 320-3BF00-2AA3
X308-2M
4 x 10/100//1000 Mbps RJ-45 ports, electrical

2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps slots for 2 port media modules,
electrical or optical
6GK5 308-2GG00-2AA2
X308-2M TS
4 x 10/100//1000 Mbps RJ-45 ports, electrical

2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps slots for 2 port media modules,
electrical or optical, with extended temperature range and
EN 50155 approval for railway applications
6GK5 308-2GG00-2CA2
X308-2M PoE
4 x 10/100//1000 Mbps RJ-45 ports with PoE, electrical; 2 x

10/100/1000 Mbps slots for 2 port media modules, electrical
or optical
6GK5 308-2QG00-2AA2
Industrial Ethernet
129

XR324-12M
Fully modular 19" Industrial Ethernet switches for setting up

electrical and/or optical
Industrial Ethernet networks; all ports can be fitted optionally
with optical or electrical 2-port media modules); 12 x
10/100/1000 Mbps slots for 2-port media modules, electrical
or optical
24 VDC power supply
Data cable outlet front
6GK5 324-0GG00-1AR2
Data cable outlet at rear
6GK5 324-0GG00-1HR2
Power supply 110 to 230 VAC
XR324-4M PoE
6GK5 324-0GG00-3AR2
6GK5 324-0GG00-3HR2
Partially modular 19" Industrial Ethernet switches for setting

up electrical and optical Industrial Ethernet networks; eight
ports with PoE capability, can be fitted optionally with optical
or electrical 2-port media modules
16 x 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ-45 ports, of which eight support
PoE; 4 x 10/100/1000 Mbps slots for 2-port media modules,
electrical or optical
24 VDC power supply
6GK5 324-4QG00-1AR2
6GK5 324-4QG00-1HR2
X302-7 EEC
6GK5 324-4QG00-3AR2
6GK5 324-4QG00-3HR2
2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ-45 ports, electrical;

7 x 100 Mbps LC ports, optical (multimode, glass) up to max.
5 km
EN 50155 approval for railway stock applications
1 power supply unit
6GK5 302-7GD00-1EA3
2 power supply units
6GK5 302-7GD00-2EA3
1 x power supply unit with conformal coating
6GK5 302-7GD00-1GA3
6GK5 302-7GD00-2GA3

1 power supply unit
6GK5 302-7GD00-3EA3
6GK5 302-7GD00-4EA3
6GK5 302-7GD00-3GA3
6GK5 302-7GD00-4GA3
Industrial Ethernet
130

X307-2 EEC
2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ-45 ports, electrical;

7 x 100 Mbps LC ports, optical (multimode, glass) up to max.
5 km
EN 50155 approval for railway stock applications
1 power supply unit
6GK5 307-2FD00-1EA3
6GK5 307-2FD00-2EA3
6GK5 307-2FD00-1GA3
6GK5 307-2FD00-2GA3

1 power supply unit
6GK5 307-2FD00-3EA3
6GK5 307-2FD00-4EA3
6GK5 307-2FD00-3GA3
6GK5 307-2FD00-4GA3
Industrial Ethernet
131

4.4.8.4
Media modules and SFP transceivers
Media modules
The use of media modules in partially and fully modular variants of the SCALANCE X300
switches allows the expansion of networks by subsequently plugging in additional media
modules in unused media module slots and allows a changeover of the cabling technology
(the example change from copper to fiber-optic or from multimode to single mode fiber-optic
cable).
Media
module
Twisted pair
RJ-45 jacks 10 /
100 Mbps
Fiber-optic cables
RJ-45 jacks 10 /
100 / 1000 Mbps
Fiber-optic
ports 100
Mbps
Fiber-optic
ports 1000
Mbps
Max. segment
length / km
Multimo
de
Single
mode
MM991-2
2
(ST)
4* / 5**
MM9912LD
2
(ST)
26
MM991-2
2
(SC)
4* / 5**
MM9912LD
2
(SC)
26
MM9912LH+
2
(SC)
70
MM9922CUC
MM9922CU
MM9922SFP
MM992-2
2
(SC)
0.75
MM9922LD
2
(SC)
10
MM9922LH
2
(SC)
40
MM9922LH+
2
(SC)
70
MM9922ELH
2
(SC)
120

* with a core diameter of 50 m
** with a core diameter of 62.5 m
Industrial Ethernet
132

SFP transceiver
The SFP transceiver (Small Form-factor Pluggable) can be used only in conjunction with the
SFP media module MM992-2SFP.
SFP
transceiver
Twisted pair
RJ-45 jacks 10 /
100 Mbps
Fiber-optic cables
RJ-45 jacks 10 /
100 / 1000 Mbps
Fiber-optic
ports 100
Mbps
Fiber-optic
ports 1000
Mbps
Max. segment
length / km
Multimo
de
Single
mode
SFP991-1
1
(LC)
4* / 5**
SFP9911LD
1
(LC)
26
SFP9911LH+
1
(LC)
70
SFP992-1
1
(LC)
0.75
SFP9921LD
1
(LC)
10
SFP9921LH
1
(LC)
40
SFP9921LH+
1
(LC)
70
SFP9921ELH
1
(LC)
120

Industrial Ethernet
133

4.4.9
SCALANCE X400
4.4.9.1
Description
Figure 4-16
SCALANCE X400
The SCALANCE X400 product line includes modular Industrial Ethernet switches that can be
expanded with various media modules, some also with extender modules. 10/100/1000
Mbps technology is supported for different transmission media (twisted pair, fiber-optic) and
increased port requirements. The main areas of application are high-performance plant
networks (control level). Due to its partly modular structure, the X400 product line is
designed to meet future demands and can be adapted to meet the requirements of a
particular task.
Area of application
SCALANCE X400 products allow switched networks to be set up at the control level. In this
area, there are not only high demands on the availability of the network and requirements for
wide-ranging diagnostics, but also for large numbers of ports, high transmission rates and
the support of fiber-optic and twisted pair transmission media. SCALANCE X400 products
have degree of protection IP20 for installation in cabinets.
SCALANCE X408-2
Control rooms with low device density
Hubs in the plant bus for applications with low device density
High-speed backbone including fast media redundancy for process control systems
In the high-speed backbone for linking gigabit network structures
SCALANCE X414-3E
Control rooms with high device density
Hubs in the plant bus for applications with high device density
High-speed backbone including fast media redundancy for process control systems
SCALANCE X414-3E equipped with layer 3 for IP routing (static, dynamic, redundant)
A further eight nodes can be connected on the right of the basic device using extender
modules.
Industrial Ethernet
134

4.4.9.2
Characteristics
X408-2
X414-3E
Gigabit Ethernet
Redundant
Signaling contact
On-site display
Console port (1 x RS-232)
8 floating inputs for acquisition of digital status

information
Out-band port for on-site parameter

assignment
C-PLUG slot
Power supply
(Set button)
Industrial Ethernet
135

Functions
All devices have the following functions
Command Line Interface / Telnet
SNMP
Standby redundancy
Passive Listening
Broadcast blocking
DHCP Option 82 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
Access Control List (MAC)
Link aggregation
X414-3E also supports the following layer 3 functions:
Static IP routing
RIPv2 (dynamic routing)
OSPFv2 (dynamic routing)
VRRP, router redundancy (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol)
Industrial Ethernet
136

4.4.9.3
Interfaces
The SCALANCE X400 devices have the following integrated interfaces. The total number
and the type of interface vary depending on the type and number of media modules used.
The properties of the media modules are covered separately.
SCALANCE X408-2
SCALANCE X414-3E
24 VDC power supply
2 (redundant)
2 (redundant)
Signaling contact
Transmission speeds
10/100/1000 Mbps via RJ45
10/100/1000 Mbps via RJ-45
Console port
1 x RS-232
1 x RS-232
Out-band port for on-site parameter

assignment
1 x RJ-45
RJ-45 ports
12
Universal slots for optical fast or

gigabit media modules with 2 ports
Slots for optical Fast Ethernet media

modules with 2 ports
Floating inputs for acquisition of

digital status information
Connector for extender modules (4

further media modules or 8 x RJ-45)
Maximum number of network

interfaces
12
24
Order numbers
X408-2
Modular Industrial Ethernet switches with integrated RJ-45 ports for setting up
electrical and/or optical IE networks; 4 x 10/100/1000 Mbps and 4 x 10/100
Mbps RJ-45 ports; 2 x gigabit/Fast Ethernet media module slots
6GK5 408-2FD00-2AA2
X414-3E
Modular Industrial Ethernet switches with integrated RJ-45 ports for setting up
electrical and/or optical IE networks; 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps and 12 x 10/100
Mbps RJ-45 ports; 1 x gigabit Ethernet and 2 x Fast Ethernet media module
slots; 1 x extender interface
6GK5 414-3FC00-2AA2
Industrial Ethernet
137

4.4.9.4
Media modules
Media modules
The Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X400 devices can be equipped with media modules to
allow FO cables to be used. Media modules are available both for multimode FO cables and
for single mode FO cables. They can be added or changed during operation. SCALANCE
X414-3E supports two optical gigabit Ethernet ports and up to four extra optical Fast
Ethernet ports.
An inserted media module for gigabit Ethernet converts the two gigabit Ethernet twisted-pair
ports to optical, the onboard ports are disabled. Media modules can be added or replaced
during operation
Media module
Fiber-optic cables
Fiber-optic
ports
Fiber-optic
ports
100 Mbps
1000 Mbps
Max. segment
length / km
Multimode
Single mode
Wavelength
MM491-2
2
(BFOC)
4* / 5**
1310 nm
MM491-2LD
2
(BFOC)
26
1310 nm
MM491-2LH+
2
(SC)
70
1550 nm
MM492-2
2
(SC)
0.75
850 nm
MM492-2LD
2
(SC)
10
1310 nm
MM492-2LH
2
(SC)
40
1550 nm
MM492-2LH+
2
(SC)
70
1550 nm
MM492-2ELH
2
(SC)
120
1550 nm

Industrial Ethernet
138

Options for inserting media modules

Media modules can be inserted in the following slots:
Media module
In device
Slot
MM491-2
SCALANCE X414-3E
6, 7
SCALANCE X408
5, 6
EM496-4
12 - 15
SCALANCE X414-3E
6, 7
MM491-2LD
MM491-2LH+
MM492-2
MM492-2LD
MM492-2LH
MM492-2LH+
MM492-2ELH
SCALANCE X408
5, 6
EM496-4
12 - 15
SCALANCE X414-3E
6, 7
SCALANCE X408
5, 6
EM496-4
12 - 15
SCALANCE X414-3E
SCALANCE X408
5, 6
SCALANCE X414-3E
SCALANCE X408
5, 6
SCALANCE X414-3E
SCALANCE X408
5, 6
SCALANCE X414-3E
SCALANCE X408
5, 6
SCALANCE X414-3E
SCALANCE X408
5, 6
Industrial Ethernet
139

4.4.9.5
Extender modules
Overview of the extender modules

The SCALANCE X414-3E has an expansion interface on the right-hand side of the device.
An optional extender module can be attached to this interface.
The SCALANCE X408-2 cannot be extended with an extender module.
The following extender module variants are available:
EM495-8:
This has 8 twisted-pair 10/100 Mbps ports (RJ-45 jacks). This allows the twelve onboard
Fast Ethernet twisted-pair ports of the SCALANCE X414-3E to be extended to a total of
20 ports.
Figure 4-17
Twisted pair extender EM495-8
The twisted pair extenders can also be installed during operation. No media module is
required for data transfer with this extender module.
For slots 12 and 13 of the twisted pair extender EM495-8, you can use the cover that can
also be used on slots 9 to 11 on the basic device. Two CV490 4x100 covers are supplied
with the twisted pair extender.
EM496-4:
This has 4 media module slots for the Fast Ethernet media modules MM491-2 and
MM491-2LD so that the SCALANCE X414-3E can be extended by up to 8 optical Fast
Ethernet ports (100 Mbps).
Figure 4-18
Empty media module extender EM496-4 without protective caps for the media
module terminal strips and without cover
Industrial Ethernet
140

Installation of the media module extender and removal or insertion of the media modules is
possible during operation. You require at least one media module for data transfer over this
extender module.
Mixed operation in slots 12 through 15 with MM491-2 and MM491-2LD modules is possible.
The media module plug connectors are protected by protective caps.
Four CV490 2x100 covers are supplied with the twisted media module extender EM496-4.
The media module plug connectors are also protected from damage by protective caps.
Industrial Ethernet
141

4.4.10
SCALANCE X500
4.4.10.1
Description
Figure 4-19
SCALANCE XR500
The SCALANCE XR500 switches are ideal for use in industrial networks and for integrating
the industrial network into an existing enterprise network. From the controller level to the
management level, the switch handles the networking both of plant sections as well as
distributed field devices and ensures high plant availability with wide-ranging diagnostics
options and high transmission speeds. Due to the scalability of the basic device and the
optionally available layer 3 functions, the network can be set up specifically for each
particular application and adapted and expanded at any time.
The SCALANCE XR500 switches are suitable for setting up electrical and optical Industrial
Ethernet bus, star or ring structures with four integrated SFP+ slots for optional plugging of
SFP+ transceivers (10 Gbps) or SFP transceivers (1000 Mbps) and up to 12 media module
slots that can be used optionally for electrical and/or optical 4-port media modules. With
transmission rates up to 10 Gbps, the switches can be used as Industrial Ethernet backbone
switches and as hubs in the plant bus (redundant connection possible).
The use of media modules or SFP+/SFP allows the following:
The expansion of networks later by plugging in additional media modules in unused
media module slots
Replacing the cabling technology, for example converting from copper to FO cable or
from multimode to single mode FO cable
Changing the transmission rate, for example from 1000 Mbps to 10 Gbps
Industrial Ethernet
142

4.4.10.2
Characteristics
XR552-12M
XR528-5M
Gigabit Ethernet
10 gigabit Ethernet
Diagnostics LED
Redundant
Power supply
On-site display
(Set button)
C-PLUG slot
Industrial Ethernet
143

Functions
SNMP / SNMP-supported diagnostics
Standby redundancy
IRT capability
Passive Listening
Broadcast blocking
Access Control List (ACL)
Link aggregation
Static IP routing
RIPv2 (dynamic routing)
OSPFv2 (dynamic routing)
VRRP, router redundancy (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol)
Industrial Ethernet
144

4.4.10.3
Interfaces
Table 4- 8
IE Switch
Number of slots for media

modules
Number of slots for SFP+
Number of ports
Modular ports via

module slots
XR552-12M
12
52
48
XR528-6M
28
24
Order numbers
XR552-12M
XR528-6M
4 x integrated 1/10 Gbps SFP+ slots for SFP or SFP+

transceivers; 12 x 10/100/1000 Mbps slots for 4-port media
modules, electrical or optical
6GK5 552-0AA00-2AR2
6GK5 552-0AA00-2HR2
SFP+ slots for SFP or SFP+ transceivers 6 x 10/100/1000 Mbps

slots for 4-port media modules, electrical or optical
6GK5 528-0AA00-2AR2
6GK5 528-0AA00-2HR2
Industrial Ethernet
145

Media modules
The use of media modules in the SCALANCE X-500 IE switches allows the expansion of
networks by subsequently plugging in additional media modules in unused media module
slots and allows a changeover of the cabling technology (for example change from copper to
fiber-optic or from multimode to single mode fiber-optic cable).
Media module
MM992-4
MM992-4CU
Twisted pair
Fiber-optic cables
RJ-45 jacks
10 / 100 /
1000 Mbps
Fiber-optic
ports 100
Mbps
Fiber-optic ports Fiber-optic

1000 Mbps
ports
10 000 Mbps
4
(SC)
Max.
segment
length / km
Multimod
e
4* / 5**
Single
mode
-
4 1)
4
(SC)
10
4 1)
MM992-4PoE
MM992-4SFP
4
(LC)2)
4
(LC)2)
4
(LC)2)
MM991-4
4
(SC)
4* / 5**
MM991-4LD
4
(SC)
10
MM992-4CUC
MM992-4LD
MM992-4PoEC

* at 50 m core diameter
** at 62.5 m core diameter
1) securing collars
2) the SFP slot module MM992-4FP can accommodate a total of maximum 4 x 1-port SFP
modules
Industrial Ethernet
146

SFP transceiver
The SFP transceiver (Small Form-factor Pluggable) can be used only in conjunction with the
SFP media module MM992-4SFP.
Media modules
Fiber-optic cables
Fiber-optic ports Fiber-optic ports
100 Mbps
1000 Mbps
Fiber-optic ports Max. segment

10 000 Mbps
length / km
Multimo
de
Single
mode
SFP991-1 1)
1
(LC)
4* / 5**
SFP991-1LD 1)
1
(LC)
26
SFP991-1LH 1)
1
(LC)
26
SFP992-1 1) 2)
1
(LC)
0.75
SFP992-1LD 1) 2)
1
(LC)
10
SFP992-1LH 1) 2)
1
(LC)
40
SFP992-1LH+ 1) 2)
1
(LC)
70
1
(LC)
120
1
(LC)
0.3
1
(LC)
10
1
(LC)
40
SFP992-1ELH 1) 2)
SFP993-1 2)
SFP993-1LD 2)
SFP993-1L 2)

* at 50 m core diameter
** at 62.5 m core diameter
1) can only be plugged in along with SFP slot module MM992-4SFP
2) can only be plugged into integrated XR-500 SFPplus slots
Industrial Ethernet
147

Optional external power supply units

Optional external power supply units are available to supply power to the switches of the
SCALANCE X-500 series. You can create a redundant power supply by installing two power
supply units for one switch in the rack.
Figure 4-20
SCALANCE X-500 power supply unit
Connectors
Type
Power
Input voltage
Output voltage
PS598-1
300 W
100 to 240 VAC
24 VDC
Note
Two connectors for the 24 VDC output voltage
The PS598-1 has two connectors with the output voltage 24 VDC. Note that you can only
use one connector on the front or the connector on the rear of the PS598-1. You cannot
operate the device with the connectors on the front and rear at the same time.
Note
Requirement for connecting at the rear
Note that the connector on the rear of the PS598-1 can only be used if the power supply is
mounted on the SCALANCE XR-500M.
Note
Replacing the filter mat
To replace the filter mat, use the material Viledon P 15/150 G2 EN 779. The dimensions of
the filter mat are 38 x 135 x 8 mm (H x W x D).
Industrial Ethernet
148

4.5 SCALANCE W components for Industrial Wireless LAN
4.5
SCALANCE W components for Industrial Wireless LAN
4.5.1
SCALANCE W devices
Introduction
The SCALANCE W products can be subjected to fluctuations in the extended temperature
range without coming into contact with dust or water. Rugged housing and construction
protecting from shock and vibration allow use in a harsh industrial environment. Accessories
such as antennas, power supply units and cabling are also part of this concept and
manufactured to be suitable for industry. Power and data are transferred by Power-overEthernet on one cable saving investment and maintenance costs. The C-PLUG
(configuration plug) exchangeable medium stores engineering and configuration data
allowing a module to be replaced quickly and without specially trained personnel. This
minimizes downtimes and saves training costs
To protect against unauthorized access, the products provide modern standard mechanisms
for user identification (authentication) and encryption of data, but at the same time can also
be easily integrated into existing security concepts.
With the international standard IEEE 802.11n, wireless communication via IWLAN has
become even more rugged. The greatest advantage is the use of multipath propagation
(Multiple Input, Multiple Output (MIMO)). This allows devices to use several antennas at the
same time. This achieves a higher data rate and at the same time reduces susceptibility to
disruptions in areas with many reflections.
Access points
Access points are the central base stations for infrastructure networks. They coordinate
and control the wireless traffic within a wireless cell. If there are two or more access
points in a wireless network, in other words, same wireless network name (SSID), the
client module can move between the wireless cells formed by the individual access points
(roaming). The wireless connection is retained during roaming. This technique is used
when the required wireless coverage is greater than the distance that can be covered by
a single access point. All access points can also be configured so that they are restricted
to client functionality
Client modules
The client modules of the SCALANCE W product line are used as gateways from wireless
to wired network segments (bridge function). Normally, they communicate with an access
point (infrastructure network).
IWLAN controller
The IWLAN controller SCALANCE W product line manages and coordinates controllerbased access points.
Industrial Ethernet
149

Overview of the performance classes of the SCALANCE W devices devices

In the overview graphic below, you can see which performance classes are covered by the
various SCALANCE W devices.
Industrial Wireless LAN acc. to IEEE 802.11

Access Points
Figure 4-21
Access Points
Client Modules
W788 M12
W748 M12
W788 RJ45
W748 RJ45
W784-1
W744-1 / W746-1
W788-1RR / W788-2RR
W747-1RR
W784-1RR
W747-1
IWLAN / PB Link PN IO
G_IK10_XX_30279
W786-2RR
802.11a/b/g
802.11a/b/g + 802.11n
802.11a/b/g
For cabinet
Client Modules
W786 RJ45 / W786 SFP
For outdoors
For indoors
Industrial Wireless LAN incl. iFeatures
Overview of the SCALANCE W network components
Example of a topology
6ZLWK
&3/HDQ
ZLWKLQWHJUDWHG
SRUWVZLWFK
&OLHQWPRGXOHV
6&$/$1&(
:55
6
SCALANCE
W788-1RR
5
3
Figure 4-22
Example of an infrastructure network:

A SCALANCE W788-1RR adopts the function of the access point. Mobile nodes
such as PC/PG with IWLAN card , IWLAN control panels or WLAN clients and
their nodes can communicate with each other or exchange data with stationary
nodes .
Industrial Ethernet
150

Note
You will find more information on the configuration parameters of the particular SCALANCE
W device in the online help systems of Web Based Management.
4.5.2
Type designations
Identify the SCALANCE W devices based on their type key. The design and basic
characteristics can be identified based on the following type key
Type designations for SCALANCE W devices according to IEEE 802.11n
W7
RJ-45 Ethernet copper cable

SFP Ethernet fiber-optic cable
M12 M12 slot
[-] Connection options for
external antennas
IA internal antennas
Number of WLAN interfaces
[-] Devices for use without
IWLAN controller
C Devices for use with an
IWLAN controller
6 Metal housing and plastic cover
8 Metal housing
4 Client
8 Access point
Industrial Ethernet
151

Type designations for SCALANCE W devices according to IEEE 802.11a/b/g
W7
[-]
RR
[-]
PRO
Devices without Rapid Roaming

Devices with Rapid Roaming
Number of WLAN interfaces

[Access point]
4 For installation in a cabinet or for integration
in device or for integration in devices
8 For installation without cabinet
indoors
6 For outdoor environments with
demanding climatic requirements
[Client]
4
For installation in a cabinet
6
or for integration in devices
7 Interface with iPCF capability
4 Client
8 Access point
4.5.3
Functions of WLAN devices
Introduction
This section describes certain functions of SCALANCE W devices. For further information on
all the functions, refer to the operating instructions of the individual devices or the
configuration manual.
Authentication and encryption

Authentication and encryption protect a network from unauthorized access. This is achieved
by an exchange of keys or certificates between client and server. There are various methods
that are explained in detail in the SCALANCE W700 configuration manual and in the section
"Encryption and data security (Page 44)".
Industrial Ethernet
152

Support of IEEE 802.11n

With SCALANCE W700 devices that support IEEE 802.11n, a data throughput up to 450
Mbps (gross) is possible, see section "IEEE 802.11n (Page 40)". These devices also support
the following functions:
Frame aggregation
Accelerated guard interval
Channel bonding
SCALANCE W devices as bridges

A bridge is a network component that connects two networks. A bridge is not dependent on
the protocol; management of the data packages is based on the physical address of the
network nodes, MAC address. The SCALANCE W provides bridge functionality for handling
data exchange between wired and wireless Ethernet.
Learning Table
SCALANCE W devices log the information about which MAC address can be reached
over which port in a learning table.
NAPT: Network Address Port Translation
With Network Address Port Translation (NAPT) or Port Address Translation (PAT),
several internal source IP addresses are translated into the same external source IP
address. This function is only available on clients in client mode.
Special functions for industrial applications

The following functions are used especially in an industrial environment:
IPCF: Industrial Point Coordination Function
IPCF is the functional expansion of the IEEE 802.11 standard for applications requiring
real time and a deterministic response (predictable reply times). This allows Rapid
Roaming of mobile nodes from one RF field to the next. Wireless and secure PROFINET
IO communication is also supported with the SIMATIC Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN.
IPCF-MC: IPCF Management Channel
The IPCF Management Channel, IPCF MC, is a further development of iPCF. This mode
should be used when IWLAN nodes that also support iPCF MC are moving freely in the
RF field. In particular when using omnidirectional antennas, when deterministic data
needs to be exchanged.
Industrial Ethernet
153

iQoS: industrial Quality of Service
iQoS (industrial Quality of Service) is a method with which a specified transfer capacity is
reserved for necessary clients. This method is used in areas in which predefined
response times need to be guaranteed.
Dual client
In the dual client technique, devices connect to a wireless network not through a WLAN
client as normal but through two client devices. These two devices handle different
functions. The active client handles the normal data traffic with the access point as it
would without the second client connected.
1
SCALANCE
W747-1RR
3
SCALANCE
W788-1RR
Figure 4-23
SCALANCE
W747-1RR
4
SCALANCE
W788-1RR
Clients and are used in the mode shown as dual clients. There is an active
connection between the client and access point . Data is exchanged via
this. There is also a connection between client and access point . Here,
this is a standby connection without data exchange.
The second client known as the standby client scans the RF field permanently for
alternative access points and always establishes a connection to the access point
providing the best transmission quality. There is, however, no data transfer. The standby
client also receives information on the quality of the connection between the active client
and access point at regular intervals.
As soon as the connection quality of the standby client to the connected access point is
better than the quality of the connection between the active client and access point, there
is a switchover within a few milliseconds and the previous standby client takes over the
data transfer. The previously active client now takes on the role of standby client and
scans the RF field for access points.
For each dual client connection, there must therefore be two client devices
interconnected over Ethernet. The two clients do not necessarily need to be of the same
type.
Industrial Ethernet
154

4.5.4
SCALANCE W784
4.5.4.1
Description
Figure 4-24
SCALANCE W784 Access Point
The access points of the SCALANCE W784 product line are intended for installation in
cabinets. These device types can also be operated as client modules. As an alternative, the
client modules of the SCALANCE W740 series are also available for this mode.
Due to its compact and space-saving design, the SCALANCE W784 device line is
particularly suitable for applications in which IWLAN is used in the cabinet or needs to be
integrated in a device or machine.
SCALANCE W784 access points have an IP30 aluminum housing to provide protection
against mechanical and electromagnetic influences.
In conjunction with the SCALANCE W740 client modules with degree of protection IP30,
infrastructures can be set up in which large temperature differences or protection from dust
and water are less important.
SCALANCE W784 Access Points are produced in two variants:
SCALANCE W784-1
SCALANCE W784-1RR with an integrated wireless card and a wireless interface capable
of iPCF.
The SCALANCE W784-1RR access point with rapid roaming, just like the SCALANCE W788 product line, provides an expanded range of functions such as iPCF mode. This allows
applications with real-time requirements and deterministic response times to be implemented
for wireless networks even during roaming. This means that wireless PROFINET IO is
supported.
Industrial Ethernet
155

4.5.4.2
Characteristics
Functionality
W784-1
W784-1RR 2)

(IEEE 802.3at Type 1, previously IEEE 802.3af)
Digital input / digital output

C-PLUG slot
IP degree of protection
IP30
Operating temperature minimum [C]
-20
Operating temperature maximum [C]
+60
Resistant to condensation
Resistant to salt water spray
Use in EX Zone 2 1)
IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/h
Number of supported IP nodes
Number of supported MAC nodes
Several

1) Note installation instructions.
2) The device type W784-1RR is intended for the iPCF mode
Industrial Ethernet
156

Functions
Support of forced roaming
SSH / HTTPS / admin password
WEP / WPA / WPA2
IEEE 802.11i, Hidden SSID
IEEE 802.1X (RADIUS)
EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP
NAT / NAPT
IEEE 802.11e (QoS/WMM)
STP / RSTP (IEEE 802.1d/w)
WDS (Wireless Distribution System)
Operation possible as IWLAN client
VLANs (Multi-SSID)
PROFINET IO diagnostics
SNMP
Syslog
W784-1RR also has the following functions:
Dual client
iHOP
iPCF
Industrial Ethernet
157

4.5.4.3
Interfaces
Table 4- 9
Functionality
W784-1
W784-1RR
Number of wireless interfaces

Connectors for external antennas
Ethernet port
1
2
(R-SMA connector female)
RJ-45
Order numbers
W784-1
W784-1RR
1)
Ethernet interface RJ-45,

2 external antennas
6GK5784-1AA30-2AA0

2 external antennas, Rapid Roaming
6GK5784-1AA30-6AA0
6GK5784-1AA30-2AB0 1)
6GK5784-1AA30-6AB0 1)
US variant
Industrial Ethernet
158

4.5.5
SCALANCE W786
4.5.5.1
Description
Figure 4-25
SCALANCE W786 Access Point
SCALANCE W786 products are intended for applications with demanding climatic
requirements for installation outdoors and/or in areas open to the public.
Areas of application include, for example harbors, public spaces or public transport. The
functions correspond to the IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h and IEEE 802.11n standards.
The access points are designed for ruggedness. No parts that can be damaged are led out
of the devices. The SCALANCE W786 devices have a housing that is resistant to impact and
shock and tensile compression.
SCALANCE W786 access points according to IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h
The SCALANCE W786-1PRO/ -2PRO/ -3PRO devices are access points with the same
construction with 1 - 3 wireless interfaces and standardized electrical RJ-45 or fiber-optic
cable connectors. Thanks to the fiber-optic cable connectors, links strongly affected by
interference can be bridged using multimode cables up to 3000 m long.
With SCALANCE W786-3PRO, two wireless interfaces allow communication between the
access points. The third wireless interface establishes the RF field for the nodes, for
example a driverless transport system. With this concept, it is possible to implement meshed
networks.
The SCALANCE W786-1RR and -2RR access points are equipped with an RJ-45 Ethernet
interface and are intended for iPCF mode.
SCALANCE W786 access points according to IEEE 802.11n
The SCALANCE W786-1 RJ-45 device type is equipped with a wireless card, SCALANCE
W786-2 RJ-45 with two wireless cards. There are two variants of the SCALANCE W786-2
RJ-45 access point. For use indoors equipped with six internal antennas, for outdoors with
six external antennas.
The SCALANCE W786-2HPW is an access point suitable only for operation with a Siemens
HiPath Wireless Controller.
The SCALANCE W786-2 SFP access point has class of protection IP20. Two wireless cards
are integrated in the device.
Industrial Ethernet
159

4.5.5.2
Characteristics
W786-1PRO
W786-2PRO
W786-3PRO
W786-1RR 2)
W786-2RR 2)
W786-2HPW 3)
W786-1 RJ-45
W786-2 RJ-45
W786-2IA RJ-45
PoE (Power-over-Ethernet)
IEEE 802.3at Type 1, previously
IEEE 802.3af.
C-PLUG slot
W786-2 SFP
IP65
IP65
IP20
-40
-40
-40
+70
+60
+60
UV resistant
Use in EX Zone 2 1)
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h
IEEE 802.11n

1) Note the installation instructions
2) The device types W786-1RR / -2RR are intended for the iPCF mode.
3)
The device type W786-2HPW is intended for use without a C-PLUG.
Industrial Ethernet
160

Functions
WEP / WPA / WPA2
IEEE 802.1x (RADIUS)
VLANs (Multi-SSID)
SNMPv1/v2/v3
Syslog
Apart from W786-2HPW, the devices have the following functions:
Wireless redundancy between access points
Operation as IWLAN client
W786-xRR and W786-xPRO also have the following functions:
NAT / NAPT
W786-1RR and W786-2RR also have the following functions:
Dual client
iHOP
iPCF
W786-2 RR also has the following function:
iPCF-MC
4.5.5.3
Interfaces
Table 4- 10

Ethernet port
1)
W786-1PRO
W786-2PRO
W786-3PRO
W786-1RR 1)
W786-2RR 1)
W786-2HPW
W786-1 RJ-45
W786-2 RJ-45
W786-2IA RJ-45 2)
W786-2 SFP
13
12
26
36
RJ-45 / BFOC
RJ-45
SFP
W786-1RR and W786-2RR are equipped with an RJ-45 Ethernet interface.

RJ-45 is equipped for internal use with 6 internal antennas.
2)W786-2IA
Industrial Ethernet
161

Order numbers
W786-1PRO

1 internal antenna
6GK5786-1BA60-2AA0
6GK5786-1BA60-2AB0 1)
W786-1PRO

1 external antenna
6GK5786-1AA60-2AA0
6GK5786-1AA60-2AB0 1)
W786-1PRO
1 ST duplex multimode FO cable,

1 internal antenna
6GK5786-1BB60-2AA0
6GK5786-1BB60-2AB0 1)
W786-1PRO

1 external antenna
6GK5786-1AB60-2AA0
6GK5786-1AB60-2AB0 1)
W786-2PRO

2 internal antennas
6GK5786-2BA60-2AA0
6GK5786-2BA60-2AB0 1)
W786-2PRO

2 external antennas
6GK5786-2AA60-2AA0
6GK5786-2AA60-2AB0 1)
W786-2PRO

2 internal antennas
6GK5786-2BB60-2AA0
6GK5786-2BB60-2AB0 1)
W786-2PRO

2 external antennas
6GK5786-2AB60-2AA0
6GK5786-2AB60-2AB0 1)
W786-3PRO

3 external antennas
6GK5786-3AA60-2AA0
6GK5786-3AA60-2AB0 1)
W786-3PRO

3 external antennas
6GK5786-3AB60-2AA0
6GK5786-3AB60-2AB0 1)
W786-1RR

2 internal antennas
6GK5786-2BA60-6AA0
6GK5786-2BA60-6AB0 1)
W786-2RR

2 external antennas
6GK5786-2AA60-6AA0
6GK5786-2AA60-6AB0 1)
W786-2HPW 2)

2 internal antennas
6GK5786-2BA60-1CA0
W786-2HPW 2)

2 external antennas
6GK5786-2AA60-1CA0
W786-2HPW 2)

2 internal antennas
6GK5786-2BB60-1CA0
W786-2HPW 2)

2 external antennas
6GK5786-2AB60-1CA0
W786-1 RJ-45

3 external antennas
6GK5786-1FC00-0AA0
6GK5786-1FC00-0AB0 1)
W786-2 RJ-45

6 external antennas
6GK5786-2FC00-0AA0
6GK5786-2FC00-0AB0 1)
W786-2IA RJ-45

6 internal antennas
6GK5786-2HC00-0AA0
6GK5786-2HC00-0AB0 1)
W786-2 SFP
SFP slot,
6 external antennas
6GK5786-2FE00-0AA0
1) US
2)
variant
The device types of the W786-2HPW do not currently have a US variant on the market.
Industrial Ethernet
162

4.5.6
SCALANCE W788-x M12/ -x RJ-45 and client modules
4.5.6.1
Description
Description
Figure 4-26
SCALANCE W788 M12 access point
The access points W788x M12/-x RJ-45 and the client modules W748 M12/RJ-45 support
the IEEE 802.11n standard. These devices are intended for setting up Industrial Wireless
LAN (IWLAN) wireless networks for 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz.
The standard supports data rates up to 450 Mbps. The high data rate is achieved among
other things by using channel bonding and by 3 x 3 MIMO technology (Multiple Input,
Multiple Output), see section IEEE 802.11n (Page 40). To achieve this, the devices use
three data streams to send and receive wireless signals at the same time.
The access points SCALANCE W788-x M12 and the client modules SCALANCE W748 M12
can be installed in areas with suitable wireless conditions indoors outside a cabinet. The
IP65 housing and the connectors can withstand high loads caused by shock and vibration
since all connectors are screwed or locked in position. To achieve optimum illumination for
special applications, the supplied antennas can be replaced.
The access points SCALANCE W788-x RJ-45 and the client module SCALANCE W748 RJ45 are particularly suited for applications in which the access point needs to be installed in a
cabinet. The rugged aluminum housing of the SCALANCE W788 RJ-45 devices with degree
of protection IP30 provides protection from mechanical and electromagnetic load and is a
cost-effective alternative for use indoors.
Industrial Ethernet
163

4.5.6.2
Characteristics
Access points
Client modules
W788-1 M12
W788-2 M12
W788-1 RJ-45
W788-2 RJ-45
W748-1 M12
W748-1 RJ-45
IEEE 802.3af.
C-PLUG slot
IP65
IP30
IP65
IP30
-20
-20
-20
-20
+60
+60
+60
+60
UV resistant
Use in EX Zone 2 1)
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h
IEEE 802.11n MIMO (input x output
streams)
3x3
3x3
3x3
3x3

1) Note installation instructions
Industrial Ethernet
164

Functions
WEP / WPA / WPA2
SNMP
Syslog
The access points also have the following functions:
VLANs (Multi-SSID)
4.5.6.3
Interfaces
Table 4- 11
W788-1 M12
W748-1 M12 1)
W788-2 M12
WLAN interface
Connectors for internal antennas
Functionality
Ethernet port
Version for network components
or
end devices
W788-1 RJ45
W748-1 RJ45 1)
W788-2 RJ-45
3
(N-Connect female)
6
(N-Connect female)
3
(R-SMA connector
female)
6
(R-SMA connector
female)
M12
M12
RJ-45
RJ-45
1
(x-coded)
Connectors for power supply

Design of the electrical
connections
for the power supply
1)
M12 interface (4-pin, A-coded), PoE
4-pin screw terminal incl. PoE
The Ethernet interfaces correspond to the specific type designation of the assigned client module.
Industrial Ethernet
165

Order numbers
Access points
W788-1 M12 2)
Ethernet interface M12,

3 external antennas
6GK5 788-1GD00-0AA0
6GK5 788-1GD00-0AB0 1)
W788-2 M12 3)

6 external antennas
6GK5 788-2GD00-0AA0
6GK5 788-2GD00-0AB0 1)
W788-1 RJ-45 2)

3 external antennas
6GK5 788-1FC00-0AA0
6GK5 788-1FC00-0AB0 1)
W788-2 RJ-45 3)

6 external antennas
6GK5 788-2FC00-0AA0
6GK5 788-2FC00-0AB0 1)
W748-1 M12
Ethernet interface M12
6GK5 748-1GD00-0AA0
6GK5 748-1GD00-0AB0 1)
W748-1 RJ-45

3 external antennas
6GK5 748-1FC00-0AA0
6GK5 748-1FC00-0AB0 1)
Client modules
1)
US variant
2)One integrated wireless card
3)Two integrated wireless cards
Industrial Ethernet
166

4.5.7
SCALANCE W788-xPRO/ -xRR and client modules
4.5.7.1
Description
Figure 4-27
SCALANCE W788-1PRO access point
The SCALANCE W788 access points have a rugged metal housing and are designed for
demanding mechanical requirements in industrial applications without installation in cabinets.
These can be installed indoors at locations suitable for wireless. The housing and the
connectors can withstand high loads caused by shock and vibration since all connectors are
screwed or locked in position. To achieve optimum illumination for special applications, the
supplied antennas can be replaced.
The W788-2PRO and W788-2RR access points with two wireless interfaces have two
separate wireless modules. The wireless modules operate as two separate devices. This
allows cost-effective solutions to be implemented, for example where one wireless interface
is used for wireless connection of a distant production facility and the second wireless
interface provides an RF field within the vicinity of the access point.
Within the RF field, local nodes can log in and move freely. Two separate wireless modules
also provide the option of having redundant RF fields to achieve a high degree of operating
reliability.
The client modules are designed for use indoors and outdoors in industrial applications and
for cost-effective integration in an cabinet. They provide a reliable wireless link that can be
transferred quickly from one access point to the next (roaming). This allows processes to be
monitored and production losses due to machine stoppages to be avoided. Industrial
Wireless LAN (IWLAN) can also be used in manufacturing automation for time-critical
applications (PROFINET IO) or for safety-related signals (PROFIsafe).
The client modules W746-1PRO and W747-1RR are designed to manage the wireless links
of up to eight connected devices with an Industrial Ethernet connector with degree of
protection IP65.
SCALANCE W access points and clients with the extension "RR" in the device name also
have a wireless interface with iPCF capability.
Industrial Ethernet
167

4.5.7.2
Characteristics
Access points
Client modules
W788-1PRO
W788-2PRO
W788-1RR
W788-2RR
W744-1PRO
W746-1PRO
W747-1RR 2)
IEEE 802.3af.
2)

C-PLUG slot
IP65
IP65
IP65
-20
-20
-20
+60
+60
+60
UV resistant
Use in EX Zone 2 1) 3)
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h
IEEE 802.11n
1) Note the installation instructions
2) The client module W747-1RR is not for use in Ex zone 2.
Industrial Ethernet
168

Functions
WEP / WPA / WPA2
NAT / NAPT
VLANs (Multi-SSID)
SNMP
Syslog
The access points also have the following functions:
The access points W788-xRR and the client module W747-1RR also have the following
functions:
iPCF
iPCF-MC
iHOP
iQoS
Dual client
4.5.7.3
Interfaces
Table 4- 12
W788-1PRO
W788-2PRO
W788-1RR 1)
W788-2RR 1)
1-2
1-2
2-4
2-4
RJ-45
RJ-45
RJ-45
Ethernet port
1)
W744-1PRO
W746-1PRO
W747-1RR 1)
Has a wireless interface with iPCF capability.
Industrial Ethernet
169

Order numbers
Access points
W788-1PRO

2 external antennas
6GK5 788-1AA60-2AA0
6GK5 788-1AA60-2AB0 1)
W788-2PRO

4 external antennas
6GK5 788-2AA60-2AA0
6GK5 788-2AA60-2AB0 1)
W788-1RR

2 external antennas
6GK5 788-1AA60-6AA0
6GK5 788-1AA60-6AB0 1)
W788-2RR

4 external antennas
6GK5 788-2AA60-6AA0
6GK5 788-2AA60-6AB0 1)
W744-1PRO)

2 external antennas
6GK5 744-1AA60-2AA0
6GK5 744-1AA60-2AB0 1)
W746-1PRO

2 external antennas
6GK5 746-1AA60-4AA0
6GK5 746-1AA60-4AB0 1)
W747-1RR

2 external antennas
6GK5 747-1AA60-6AA0
6GK5 747-1AA60-6AB0 1)
Client modules
1)
US variant
Industrial Ethernet
170

4.5.8
SCALANCE WLC711, W788C and W786C
4.5.8.1
Description
Figure 4-28
SCALANCE WLC711
The IWLAN controller SCALANCE WLC711 manages wireless networks as the central
station. The controller provides support during commissioning, diagnostics and access
control as well as the security settings of the wireless networks and firmware updates of the
access points. This reduces the effort and costs for commissioning and operation of larger
IWLAN installations. Only controller-based access points can be used with the controller.
Redundant operation of two IWLAN controllers increases the availability of the
communications network.
The device with degree of protection IP 20 is licensed for the connection of up to 16
controller-based access points of the SCALANCE W78xC product line, of the SCALANCE
W786-2HPW according to IEEE 802.11n and IEEE 802.11a/ b/ g.
With licensing, this function can be expanded to 32 access points in standard mode. New
access points are detected automatically.
The SCALANCE IWLAN controller WLC711 also supports:
Up to 64 access points in redundant mode with two IWLAN controllers.
Up to 512 WLAN clients
Up to 8 logical, service-based networks (Virtual Network Services)
Controller-based access points SCALANCE W788C and W786C

The SCALANCE W788C-2 RJ-45 device with degree of protection IP30 is designed like all
other controller access points for setting up Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN) wireless
networks in the 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz frequency band. The rugged aluminum housing is
resistant to both shock and vibration and provides protection from mechanical and
electromagnetic load in an industrial environment. It is installed either in a cabinet, on the
wall, on an S7 standard rail or on a 35 mm DIN rail.
SCALANCE W788C-2 RJ-45 is a cost-effective alternative for use indoors with less harsh
environmental influences.
Industrial Ethernet
171

The controller access point SCALANCE W788C- 2 M12 with degree of protection IP65 is
designed for indoor use and has similar characteristics to the SCALANCE W788C-2 RJ-45
but with a somewhat more rugged construction.
The controller access points SCALANCE W786C-2IA RJ-45 and SCALANCE W786C-2 RJ45 are equipped with a strong plastic housing (Plexiglas type). The devices with degree of
protection IP65 are designed to be resistant to shock and vibration and to meet demanding
mechanical and climatic requirements. This means that they are particularly suitable for
applications where they are installed outdoors and/or in areas open to the public.
All controller access points must be operated only with the IWLAN controller WLC711.
4.5.8.2
Characteristics
Functionality
W788C-2 RJ-45
W788C-2 M12
W786C-2IA RJ-45
W786C-2 RJ-45
IEEE 802.3af.
C-PLUG slot
IP30
IP65
IP65
IP65
Operating temperature minimum

[C]
-20
-20
-40
-40
Operating temperature maximum

[C]
+60
+60
+60
+60
UV resistant
Use in EX Zone 2 1)
IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/h
IEEE 802.11n MIMO
Operation with IWLAN controller
Operation with Enterasys WLAN

controller

1) Note installation instructions
Industrial Ethernet
172

Functions
WEP / WPA / WPA2
SNMP
Syslog
The controller-based access points of the SCALANCE W78xC have the following additional
functions:
VLANs (Multi-SSID)
The WLC controller also has the following functions:
Integrated VLAN-VNS
Auto detection of new access points
Dynamic Radio Management
VoIP QoS Mapping (DSCP/TCP to WMM)
VoIP roaming between IP subnets
VoIP roaming between several IWLAN controllers
Industrial Ethernet
173

4.5.8.3
Interfaces
Table 4- 13
WLAN
interface
Antenna connection
external
Interna
l
Ethernet interface
10 / 100 /1000 Mbps
Power supply connector
WLC711
2
(RJ-45)
2-pin screw terminal
W788C-2 M12
6
(N-Connect
female)
1
(M12)
4-pin screw terminal

including PoE or 4- to 8-pin
PoE
W788C-2 RJ-45
6
(R-SMA connector
female)
1
(RJ-45)
W786C-2IA RJ-45
1
(RJ-45)
W786C-2 RJ-45
6
(R-SMA connector
female)
1
(RJ-45)
2-pin male connector

(24 VDC) or optional power
supply adapter (4-pin 24
VDC or
3-pin 110 - 230 VAC)
Order numbers
WLC711
Ethernet interface RJ-45
6GK5 711-0XC00-1AA0
6GK5 711-0XC00-1AB0 1)
6GK5 711-0XC00-1AD0 2)
W788C-2 RJ-45

6 external antennas
6GK5 788-2FC00-1AA0 3)
W788C-2 M12

6 external antennas
6GK5 788-2GD00-1AA0 3)
W786C-2IA RJ-45

6 internal antennas
6GK5 786-2HC00-1AA0 3)
W786C-2 RJ-45

6 external antennas with
R-SMA female connector
6GK5 786-2FC00-1AA0 3)
1)
US wireless approval
approval for Japan
3)Two permanently installed wireless cards
2)Wireless
Industrial Ethernet
174

4.5.9
Antennas
4.5.9.1
How it works
How antennas work

The task of an antenna is to convert electrical current into electromagnetic waves and vice
versa. A basic distinction is made between separate and integrated antennas. Detached
antennas increase the reliability of wireless links by optimizing the transmit and receive
conditions. The connection between access point and client is via a cable. The antennas
operated directly on the device allow compact, low-maintenance installation.
The antennas can communicate in the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency bands or in both
frequency bands.
Two further related properties are important for any antenna:
Radiation characteristics
The radiation characteristics describe the directionality of an antenna. There are three
options:
Omnidirectional
Radiation is uniform in all directions of a spatial plane (horizontal or vertical,
depending on the position of the antenna).
Directional
Radiation is predominantly in one direction in which the electromagnetic waves are
transmitted with higher intensity. In the other spatial areas, the field strength is
correspondingly weaker.
RCoax cable
an RCoax cable in which the inner conductor is separated from the outer conductor by
a dielectric. The outer conductor is interrupted by slits at regular intervals. At these
points, a high-frequency signal in the cable is also emitted into the environment of the
cable or a high-frequency signal in the environment of the cable is received on the
cable. This means that there is a defined RF field along the cable.
RCoax cables are used when an RF field is required along fixed paths, for example in
a railway tunnel or on overhead monorails.
Antenna gain
The antenna gain is the characteristic value for the directionality of an antenna. This
parameter is obtained by comparing the maximum radiated power of the antenna with the
power of an isotropic radiator. The antenna gain G is calculated in dBi according to the
following formula:
G = 10 * log (max. power density antenna / max. power density of an isotropic radiator)
Industrial Ethernet
175

Antennas with multiple connectors: Dual or MIMO antennas according to IEEE 802.11n
Dual antennas are antennas with two connectors. These are integrated in an antenna
housing as two individual antennas offset by 90 from each other. Due to the two different
polarization planes, these antennas can be used to transmit two data streams at the same
time. Depending on the alignment of the polarization planes, these antennas are known as
dual slant (turned through +/-45) or vertical-horizontal.
MIMO antennas are antennas with three connectors. They contain three individual radiators
combined in one antenna housing and operating either in different polarization planes (0, +/45) or with a suitable clearance between them. The MIMO antennas can transmit three data
streams simultaneously making use of multipath propagation.
Transmitting multiple data streams increases the data throughput while at the same time
making data transfer more reliable.
Industrial Ethernet
176

4.5.9.2
Product overview
Table 4- 14
Device Type
Horizontal radiation Antenna gain 2.4

angle/
GHz / dBi
characteristics
Antenna gain
5 GHz / dBi
Direct
mounting
Mounted
away from
the device
Degree of
protection
Antennas for SCALANCE W-700 according to IEEE 802.11n

1 connector
360
IP30
360
IP65
360
IP65
75 2)
IP67
ANT795-4MA
ANT795-4MC
ANT795-4MD
55 3)
ANT795-6DC
Industrial Ethernet
177

Device Type

angle/
GHz / dBi
characteristics
Antenna gain
5 GHz / dBi
Direct
mounting
Mounted
away from
the device
Degree of
protection
2 connectors (dual)
70 3)
IP67
17 3)
18
IP67
9 3)
23
IP67
360
IP65
65 3)
IP67
ANT793-6DG
ANT793-8DJ
ANT793-8DK
3 connectors (MIMO)
ANT795-6MT
ANT793-6DT
Industrial Ethernet
178

Device Type

angle/
GHz / dBi
characteristics
Antenna gain
5 GHz / dBi
Direct
mounting
Mounted
away from
the device
Degree of
protection
Antennas for SCALANCE W-700 according to IEEE 802.11n and IEEE 802.11a/ b/ g (1 connector)
360
IP65
360
IP65
35
14
IP23
360
3.4 - 3.7 GHz: 7

5 GHz: 8
IP65 1)
ANT792-6MN
ANT793-6MN
ANT792-8DN
ANT795-6MN
Industrial Ethernet
179

Device Type

angle/
GHz / dBi
characteristics
Antenna gain
5 GHz / dBi
Direct
mounting
Mounted
away from
the device
Degree of
protection
Antenna only for SCALANCE W-700 according to IEEE 802.11a/ b/ g (1 connector)

360
IP65
360
5.2 GHz: 5
5.8 GHz: 4.5
IP30
2.4 GHz: 75
5 GHz: 55
IP55
18
18.5
IP65
ANT795-4MR
ANT795-4MS
ANT795-6DN
ANT793-8DN
Industrial Ethernet
180

Device Type

angle/
GHz / dBi
characteristics
Antenna gain
5 GHz / dBi
Direct
mounting
Mounted
away from
the device
Degree of
protection
RCoax antennas for SCALANCE W-700 IWLAN Rcoax cable according to IEEE 802.11n and IEEE 802.11a/ b/ g
90 2)
IP65
360 3)
IP65
IP65
ANT792-4DN
ANT793-4MN
RCoax cable
1)
degree of protection IP20 when using the mounting adapter.

the frequency band 2.4 GHz
3) In the frequency band 5 GHz
2) In
4.5.9.3
Area of application
Radiating cable IWLAN RCoax cable

In environments that make the use of wireless difficult, or when the node only moves along
predefined rails, it is sometimes preferable to replace the omnidirectional antennas with an
RCoax radiating cable. The radiating cable is a special antenna in the form of a thick, flexible
cable that produces an RF field with high intensity but only over a very limited range. As long
as it can be guaranteed that the communication partner moves in an area close to the
RCoax cable, the radiating cable provides a reliable RF field and an excellent connection to
the nodes.
Reliable coverage in difficult wireless areas, for example cranes,
high-bay loader units, production lines, tunnels or overhead monorails
Generation of a cone-shaped limited RF field
Low interference or mutual disturbance due to low transmit power
Cost saving due to direct substitution of sliding contacts and trailing cables
Highly flexible application
Industrial Ethernet
181

Order numbers
Antennas with omnidirectional characteristics
ANT795-4MA 1)
Antenna gain incl. connector 4 dB, for 2.4 GHz / 5 GHz,

IP30 rotatable, with extra joint,
R-SMA male, pack of: 1 antenna
6GK5 795-4MA00-0AA3
ANT795-4MC 1)

IP65 (-20 to +65 C), straight connector,
N-Connect male, pack of : 1 antenna
6GK5 795-4MC00-0AA3
ANT795-4MD 1)

IP65 (-20 to +65 C), connector at fixed 90 angle,
N-Connect male, pack of : 1 antenna
6GK5 795-4MD00-0AA3
ANT795-4MR 1)
Antenna gain incl. connector 4 dB, for 2.4 GHz/ 5 GHz,

IP65 (-20y to +65 C), pack of: 1 antenna
6GK5 795-4MR00-0AA6
ANT795-4MS 1)

IP30 rotatable, with extra joint,
R-SMA male, pack of: 2 antennas
6GK5 795-4MS00-0AA6
ANT792-6MN 2)
Antenna gain incl. N-Connect connector male 6 dB, for 2.4 GHz, 6GK5 792-6MN00-0AA6
IP65 (-40 to +80 C), with terminating resistor
1 x TI795-1R; incl. mounting fittings
ANT793-6MN 2)
Antenna gain incl. N-Connect connector male 5 dB, for 5 GHz,

IP65 (-45 to +70 C), with terminating resistor
1 x TI795-1R; incl. mounting fittings
6GK5 793-6MN00-0AA6
ANT795-6MN 3)
Antenna gain incl. connector 6/ 8 dB, for 2.4 GHz/ 5 GHz,

IP65 (- 40 to + 80 C), with terminating resistor
1 x TI795-1R
6GK5 795-6MN10-0AA6
ANT795-6MN
Mounting tool
Mounting aid for installing the ANT795-6MN

below a roof, including installation fittings.
6GK5 795-6MN01-0AA6
ANT795-6MT 3)
MIMO antenna with 3 QMA sockets,

antenna gain 6 dB, for 2.4 GHz / 5 GHz,
IP65 (- 40 to + 80 C), incl. mounting bracket
6GK5 795-6MT00-0AA0
Industrial Ethernet
182

Antennas with directivity
ANT795-6DC 2)
Wide-angle antenna with slight directivity;

antenna gain incl. N-Connect male connector 9/ 9 dB,
for 2.4 GHz / 5 GHz, IP67 (- 40 to + 80 C)
6GK5 795-6DC00-0AA0
ANT793-6DG 2)
Dual-slant wide-angled antenna with slight directivity;

antenna gain incl. 2 N-Connect male connectors 9 dB, for 5
GHz,
IP67 (-40 to +80 C)
6GK5 793-6DG00-0AA0
ANT793-6DT 2)
MIMO antenna with 3 QMA sockets; wide-angle antenna with

slight directivity; antenna gain 9 dB, for 5 GHz,
IP67 (- 40 to + 85 C)
6GK5 793-6DT00-0AA0
ANT795-6DN 2)
Wide-angle antenna with slight directivity;

antenna gain incl. N-Connect male connector 9/ 9 dB,
for 2.4 GHz / 5 GHz, IP55 (- 40 to + 80 C);
with terminating resistor 1 x TI795-1R
6GK5 795-6DN00-0AA6
ANT792-8DN 2)
Antenna with strong directivity;

antenna gain incl. N-Connect male connector 14 dB,
for 2.4 GHz, IP23 (- 40 to + 80 C);
6GK5 792-8DN00-0AA6
ANT793-8DN 2)
Antenna with strong directivity;

antenna gain incl. N-Connect male connector 19 dB,
for 5 GHz, IP65 (- 45 to + 70 C);
6GK5 793-8DN00-0AA6
ANT793-8DJ 2)
Vertical-horizontal polarized antenna with strong directivity;

antenna gain incl. 2 N-Connect male connector 18 dB,
for 5 GHz, IP67 (- 45 to + 70 C)
6GK5 793-8DJ00-0AA0
ANT793-8DK 2)
Vertical-horizontal polarized antenna with strong directivity;

antenna gain incl. 2 N-Connect male connector 23 dB,
for 5 GHz, IP67 (- 45 to + 70 C)
6GK5 793-8DK00-0AA0
Antennas for RCoax systems

ANT792-4DN
RCoax helical antenna circular, polarized for RCoax systems;

Connector N-Connect female;
antenna gain at 2.4 GHz 1 dB, IP65
6GK5 792-4DN00-0AA6
ANT793-4MN
RCoax 5/ 8 vertically polarized for RCoax systems;

connector N-Connect female;
Antenna gain at 5.2 GHz/ 5.7 GHZ 6/ 5 dB; IP65
6GK5 793-4MN00-0AA6
IWLAN RCoax cable for 2.4 GHz
6XV1 875-2A
IWLAN accessories
RCoax cable
Radiating cable for difficult wireless areas as a special antenna

for SCALANCE W access points in the expanded temperature
range of
-40 C to +85 C; sold by the meter, minimum order 20 m
RCoax cable
IWLAN RCoax cable for 5 GHz
6XV1 875-2D
Radiating cable for difficult wireless areas as a special antenna

for SCALANCE W access points in the expanded temperature
range of
-40 C to +85 C; sold by the meter, minimum order 20 m
1)
Mounting directly on SCALANCE W

2)Wall or mast mounting
3)Roof mounting
Industrial Ethernet
183

4.6 SCALANCE M routers and modems
4.6
SCALANCE M routers and modems
4.6.1
SCALANCE M devices
Areas of application for SCALANCE M and components of GPRS

The widespread availability of GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) and advantageous
volume tariffs allow wireless connection of stations to a control center in many countries
without users needing to set up their own wireless network. The stations can be either
stationary or mobile.
The online wireless connection is permanently available and provides properties similar to
those of a dedicated line. Data changes can be transferred immediately and station or
connection failures are detected and localized in a very short time.
The following systems can be controlled and monitored with the SCALANCE M devices:
Sewage works, water treatment
Oil and gas supply
District heating networks
Energy distributors
Pumping stations
Traffic control technology
Building
Wind energy and photovoltaic systems
Machines
Electronic advertising boards
Weather stations
Lighthouses and buoys
GPRS / UMTS for complex stations with increased security requirements

GPRS is a packet-switching mobile communications service based on GSM channels. With
its high transmission speed, GPRS allows fast communication and is suitable above all for
mobile Internet access.
Note: GSM stands for 'Global System for Mobile communication' and is the name of the
worldwide standard for mobile communication.
In networked stations, the EGPRS router MD741-1 (enhanced GPRS) is used that
represents the combination of a fast GPRS VPN router with greater data security (IPsec
protocol) and firewall. In these stations, other devices connected to the MD741-1 can also be
reached via Industrial Ethernet from a master station for diagnostics and parameter
assignment.
Industrial Ethernet
184

For higher data rates, instead of the EGPRS router MD741-1, the UMTS router SCALANCE
M875 can also be used to make use of the UMTS mobile wireless network.
A control center PC must be reachable constantly from the GPRS network. To achieve this,
it is connected directly to the GPRS provider via a dedicated line or permanently to the
Internet, for example using DSL. A SCALANCE S612 or SCALANCE S623 security module
takes over the firewall function in the control center and represents the partner for the VPN
connections of the GPRS stations.
The VPN configuration is performed with the SIMATIC NET "Security Configuration Tool"
and allows configuration without special IT experience.
The IP address of the master station should ideally be fixed, those of the stations can be
assigned dynamically.
SINAUT
ST7cc/sc
STEP 7
TIM
4R-IE
SCALANCE S612
DSL router
permanent
IP address
Industrial
Ethernet
Control center
Internet
VPN tunnel
MD741-1
S7-300 with
CP 343-1,
TIM 3V-IE,
CSM 377
Station 1
Figure 4-29
Dynamic
IP address
ET 200S
SIMATIC
HMI
Industrial
Ethernet
VPN tunnel
MD741-1
Dynamic
IP address
S7-300 /
TIM 3V-IE
SIMATIC
HMI
Station 2
Industrial
Ethernet
G_IK10_XX_30226
GPRS
Example of a topology for the telecontrol network: Industrial Remote Communication
Industrial Ethernet
185

4.6.2
SCALANCE M873 and M875
4.6.2.1
Description
SCALANCE M873
Figure 4-30
SCALANCE M873
The SCALANCE M873 and M785 are designed as UMTS, EGPRS (GPRS with Edge) and
GPRS routers for wireless IP communication of Industrial Ethernet-based programmable
controllers via UMTS / GSM mobile wireless networks. SCALANCE M873 and M875 have a
high transmission rate using UMTS. Both devices are equipped with integrated security
functions including a firewall.
SCALANCE M875 can also be used as a VPN server and client (IPsec).
SCALANCE M875
Figure 4-31
SCALANCE M875
Industrial Ethernet
186

SCALANCE M873 and M875 have a rugged plastic housing and are designed for mounting
on a DIN rail. The devices are equipped with an RJ-45 interface for Industrial Ethernet,
diagnostics LEDs for the modem status, the field strength and connection control, DI/DO
channels, an SMA antenna connector for the GSM/UMTS antenna and a SET service
button. The 4-pin screw terminal is for connection to the 24 VDC power supply. In addition to
this, a 4-pin screw terminal is integrated for a digital input and output. .
The following properties distinguish the SCALANCE M873 and M875 routers:
Low investment and operating costs for monitoring and controlling telecontrol substations
connected by wireless
Reduction of traveling costs or telephone costs thanks to remote programming and
remote diagnostics using UMTS.
High security thanks to the integrated firewall
M875 can also be used as a VPN server and client (IPsec).
The use of the existing UMTS /GSM infrastructure of mobile wireless providers
Simple planning and commissioning of telecontrol substations without the user needing
special wireless knowledge.
Central monitoring point

Internet
SCALANCE
S612
DSL
router
UMTS
$31
APN of network
provider
Master station
SCALANCE
M875
IP camera
SCALANCE
X204-2TS
Industrial Ethernet
VPN tunnel
Figure 4-32
IP
camera
Example of a topology for use of the UMTS router M875 to improve passenger safety
Industrial Ethernet
187

4.6.2.2
Characteristics of the SCALANCE M873 router

1 RJ-45 port with 10 / 100 Mbps
1 SMA antenna connector
Support of UMTS with HSDPA (downlink: at 3.6 Mbps, uplink: 384 kbps).
Integrated firewall function
Characteristics of the SCALANCE M875 router

1 RJ-45 port with 10 / 100 Mbps
1 SMA antenna connector
Support of UMTS with HSDPA and HSUPA (downlink: 14.4 Mbps, uplink: 384 kbps).
Integrated firewall function including use as VPN server and client (IPsec)
Functions of the SCALANCE M873 and M875 routers

The SCALANCE M873 and M875 routers have the following functions:
Triband UMTS with the frequency bands 850 / 1900 / 2100 MHz
Quadband GSM with the frequency bands 850 / 900 / 1800 / 1900 MHz
Without a UMTS network, there is an automatic changeover to EGPRS (multislot class
12) or GPRS mode.
The automatic establishment and keeping open of the IP-based online connection to the
Internet.
The linking of distributed, IP-based networks using UMTS/GSM mobile wireless networks
Bidirectional, IP-based data communication with the telecontrol control center, for
example ST7cc or ST7sc, WinCC or PCS 7.
Integrated security functions including firewall
The data exchange between telecontrol stations (inter-station communication) via a TIM
communications module in the master station.
Secure data communication with the SINAUT ST7 stations, including communication via
mobile wireless provider networks that do not provide public and fixed IP addresses for
the modem.
Automatic and user-defined sending of SMS messages
Project engineering
Convenient configuration of all network and firewall parameters of the router via a Web
browser
Industrial Ethernet
188

Security
Router for data transfer via public networks with NAT functionality (NAT traversal)
Suitable VPN termination of the control center using SCALANCE S
A firewall for protection against unauthorized access The dynamic packet filter examines
data packets based on their source and destination addresses (stateful packet
inspection) and blocks undesirable data traffic (anti-spoofing).
Diagnostics and upkeep
Status of connection establishment and an existing connection displayed by front panel
LEDs and via a Web browser
Requirements for using the SCALANCE M873 UMTS router
The SIM card of a UMTS network operator with HSDPA support or alternatively a SIM
card of a GSM network operator with EGPRS or GPRS support.
Requirements for using the SCALANCE M875 UMTS router
The SIM card of a UMTS network operator with HSPA support (HSUPA and HSDPA) or a
SIM card of a GSM network operator with EGPRS or GPRS support.
Note
For further technical details, refer to the operating instructions of the relevant SCALANCE
M78x router.
Order numbers
M873 1)
UMTS routers for wireless IP communication of Industrial 6GK5 873-0AA10-1AA2

Ethernet-based programmable controllers via
UMTS/GSM mobile wireless networks;
EGPRS multislot class 12
M875 1)
UMTS routers for wireless IP communication of Industrial 6GK5 875-0AA10-1AA2

Ethernet-based programmable controllers via
UMTS/GSM mobile wireless networks;
EGPRS multislot class 12
1)
Please note the wireless approvals of the individual countries: http://www.siemens.com/funkzulassungen
Industrial Ethernet
189

4.6.3
SINAUT MD741-1
4.6.3.1
Description
Figure 4-33
EGPRS router SINAUT MD741-1
The EGPRS router SINAUT MD741-1 was developed as a component of the SINAUT ST7
system for SINAUT data transmission via EGPRS but can also be used independently of this
system. Due to its design and its electrical properties, the EGPRS router is particularly
suitable for use in an industrial environment. Fast and worldwide remote programming as
well as maintenance of the nodes is possible via the EGPRS interface.
The EGPRS router SINAUT MD741-1 has a rugged plastic housing and is designed for
mounting on a DIN rail. The device is equipped with an RJ-45 interface for Industrial
Ethernet, diagnostics LEDs for the modem status, the field strength and connection control,
an SMA antenna connector for the GSM/EGPRS antenna and a SET service button. The 4pin screw terminal is for connection to the 24 VDC power supply.
The EGPRS router SINAUT MD741-1 is suitable to meet the following requirements:
monitoring and control of lower-level telecontrol stations connected by wireless with low
investment and operating costs.
reduction of traveling costs or telephone charges thanks to remote programming and
remote diagnostics via GPRS
convenient diagnostics via terminal clients with short download times thanks to the higher
speed of EGPRS
high requirements in terms of security thanks to IPsec-based VPN functionality and
firewall
control and monitoring via the GPRS infrastructure of the network operator with costeffective machine-to-machine standard contracts thanks to the VPN integration
simple planning and commissioning of low-level stations without the user needing
specialist wireless knowledge.
The quadband technology allows worldwide use of the EGPRS router SINAUT MD741-1
taking into account the specific national approvals.
Industrial Ethernet
190

SCALANCE DSL
S61x router
VPN tunnel 2
VPN
tunnel 3
VPN
tunnel 1
Service Center
Internet
S7-300 with
CPU 315-2 DP
and CP 343-1
Lean
SCALANCE S
PROFIBUS
S7-300
with CP 343-1
Remote Station 2
S7-300 with
CP 343-1
Advanced
VPN tunnel 3
MD741-1
Remote Station 1
Figure 4-34
Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet
Service PC with
Software SOFTNET
Security Client
G_IK10_XX_30228
GPRS
Provider
Example of topology for using the EGPRS router SINAUT MD741-1
Industrial Ethernet
191

4.6.3.2

The EGPRS router SINAUT MD741-1 has the following characteristics and functions:
EGPRS (GPRS with Edge) and GPRS router for wireless IP communication of Industrial
Ethernet-based programmable controllers via GSM mobile wireless networks
Four times the transmission speed due to EGPRS
Integrated security functions with firewall and VPN (IPsec)
Quadband GSM with the frequency bands 850 / 900 / 1800 / 1900 MHz
Fast communication with EGPRS multislot class 12 in EGPRS networks
Without EGPRS network, automatic switchover to GPRS mode
Automatic establishment and retention of IP-based online connection to Internet
Bidirectional, IP-based data communication with the telecontrol control center, for
example ST7cc or ST7sc
Data exchange between telecontrol stations (inter-station communication) via a TIM
communications module in the master station
Integrated security functions with firewall and VPN (IPsec)
Secure data communication with the SINAUT ST7 stations also via GSM networks that
do not provide public and fixed IP addresses for the router.
Project engineering
Parameter assignment of the router using a Web browser
Security
A VPN router for secure data transfer via public networks (IPsec protocol, 3DES data
encryption, AES encryption, and NAT traversal).
Suitable VPN termination of the control center using SCALANCE S612 or S623 (available
as of April 2012)
A firewall for protection against unauthorized access The dynamic packet filter examines
data packets based on their source and destination addresses (stateful packet
inspection) and blocks undesirable data traffic (anti-spoofing).
Diagnostics and upkeep
Status of the connection establishment and an existing connection by front panel LEDs
Requirements for the use of the EGPRS router SINAUT MD741-1
The SIM card of a network operator that supports EGPRS.
Note
For further technical details, refer to the operating instructions of the relevant SCALANCE
M78x router.
Industrial Ethernet
192

Order numbers
SINAUT MD741-1 1)
EGPRS router
1)
For wireless IP communication of Industrial Ethernetbased automation systems via GSM mobile wireless
networks.
Integrated firewall, VPN router (IPsec), quadband GSM
and EGPRS multislot class 12.
6NH9 741-1AA00
Please note the wireless approvals of the individual countries: http://www.siemens.com/funkzulassungen
4.6.4
SINAUT MD720-3
4.6.4.1
Description
Figure 4-35
GSM/GPRS modem SINAUT MD720-3
The GSM/GPRS modem SINAUT MD720-3 is used for the telecontrol system SINAUT ST7
for data transmission over dial-up connections (CSD service) and the telecontrol system
SINAUT MICRO for data transmission via GPRS. It is used to set up systems for monitoring
and controlling simple telecontrol stations. This device also allows energy-saving concepts in
systems and the connection of mobile nodes with central monitoring/control of rail-guided
vehicles, special vehicles, local public transport, complex machines, and shipping in inland
waters and coastal areas. Using a GSM dial-up connection (CSD service), remote
programming and maintenance of the SIMATIC S7-200 is possible.
The GSM/GPRS modem SINAUT MD720-3 has a rugged plastic housing and is designed for
mounting on a DIN rail. The device is equipped with an RS-232 interface, diagnostics LEDs
for the modem status, the field strength and connection control, an SMA antenna connector
for the GSM/EGPRS antenna and a SET service button. The 4-pin screw terminal is for
connection to the 24 VDC power supply.
Industrial Ethernet
193

IP-based communication via GPRS/DSL with the MSC protocol
7HOHFRQWUROVHUYHUZLWK
DSSOLFDWLRQ
7(/(&21752/
6(59(5%$6,&
&RQWUROFHQWHU
'6/URXWHU
,QWHUQHW
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
*356
6WDWLRQ
6ZLWK
&3
6WDWLRQ
6ZLWK
0'
6WDWLRQ
6ZLWK
&3
Industrial Ethernet
194

4.6.4.2

The GSM/GPRS modem SINAUT MD720-3 has the following characteristics and functions:
Quadband GSM (850 / 900 / 1800 / 1900 MHz)
GPRS multislot class 10 (gross: 13.4-27 kbps upload, 40-54 kbps download).
Automatic establishment and retention of IP-based online connection to Internet via
GPRS
IP-based data exchange with PC-based application SINAUT MICRO SC (router and OPC
server)
Data exchange with other MD720-3 modems via the routing of SINAUT MICRO SC
Changeover between GPRS and CSD (modem mode) possible during operation
CSD and GPRS connection controllable with AT commands
Sending of SMS messages and faxes (via SMS) using GSM services
Secure access to data of the S7-200, also via mobile wireless provider networks that do
not provide any public or fixed IP addresses for the modem.
Project engineering
Parameter assignment using PLC blocks with the Micro/Win programming tool for S7-200
(blocks ship with SINAUT MICRO SC)
AT command interface
Security
Enabling of up to 3 call numbers for incoming GSM connections (CLIP function) for
teleservice
User name and password for GSM connection
Unrestricted client and server operation even in protected GPRS networks with private IP
addresses of the mobile wireless provider
Encrypted data traffic between modem, Internet and SINAUT MICRO SC
Diagnostics / upkeep
Status of the connection establishment and an existing connection by front panel LEDs
Reading out the configuration data via the RS-232 interface
Status of the connection to the modem and PLC can be monitored in SINAUT MICRO SC
Direct additional access via GSM (modem mode) for teleservice (remote programming,
remote diagnostics)
Industrial Ethernet
195

Order numbers
SINAUT MD720-3 1)
GSM/GPRS modem
1)
Mobile wireless modem with RS-232 interface; for the

GSM services CSD, GPRS, SMS; quadband GSM, AT
command interface. Automatic GPRS connection
establishment; including gender changer for RS-232/PPI
adapter
6NH9720-3AA00
Please note the wireless approvals of the individual countries: http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info
Industrial Ethernet
196

4.7 SCALANCE S security module
4.7
SCALANCE S security module
4.7.1
SCALANCE S
Areas of application of SCALANCE S

The SCALANCE S security modules protect nodes connected to the protected network with
a combination of different security measures. SCALANCE S602, SCALANCE S612 and
SCALANCE S623 have different protective functions. With all SCALANCE S devices,
individual devices or even entire automation cells can be integrated into the protected area.
With the security modules of the SCALANCE S product line, all devices of an Ethernet
network can be protected from unauthorized access. SCALANCE S612 or SCALANCE S623
also protect data transfer between devices or network segments (e.g. automation cells) from
data manipulation and espionage and can be used for secure remote access via the Internet.
The security modules can be operated not only in bridge mode but also in router mode. This
means that the security modules are used directly at IP subnet boundaries.
Secure remote access via the Internet is possible with the GPRS router MD741-1 or with the
UMTS router SCALANCE M875.
SCALANCE S is optimized for use in an automation or industrial environment. It meets the
specific requirements of automation engineering, for example easy upgrading of existing
systems, simple installation and minimum downtimes if a fault occurs.
Advantages of the cell protection concept:
Protection from data espionage and data manipulation
Protection against overload of the communications system
Protection from external influences
Protection from addressing errors
Secure remote access via Internet
Industrial Ethernet
197

Changes to or adaptation of the existing network structure are not necessary.
Changes to or adaptation of the existing applications or network nodes are not
necessary.
Figure 4-36
SCALANCE S product family
The range of devices is expanded by the SOFTNET Security Client. This is a software
application that allows secure access to automation systems protected by SCALANCE S.
([WHUQDOQHWZRUN
,QWHUQDODXWRPDWLRQFHOOV
6&$/$1&(6
,(3%/LQN
(7;
6
6
(WKHUQHW352),1(7
352),%86
Figure 4-37
6&$/$1&(6
$6,QWHUIDFH
Example of a topology: Setting up a system with SCALANCE S602
Industrial Ethernet
198

4.7.2
Functions of SCALANCE S devices

With the security modules of the SCALANCE S product line, all devices of an Ethernet
network can be protected from unauthorized access. The essential characteristic of all
SCALANCE S devices is that individual devices as well as entire automation cells can be
integrated flexibly.
Internal and external network nodes

SCALANCE S602, S612 and S623 modules divide networks into two areas:
Internal network: Protected areas with the "internal nodes"
Internal nodes are the nodes protected by a SCALANCE S device.
External network: Unprotected areas with the "external nodes".
External nodes are all the nodes located outside the protected areas.
The internal network is considered to be secure (trustworthy). Connect an internal network
segment to the external network segments only over a SCALANCE S device.
There must be no other paths connecting the internal and external networks.
Configuration and administration

A CD ships with the SCALANCE S containing not only the manual but also the 'Security
Configuration Tool'.
The Security Configuration Tool is designed for the following tasks:
For configuration of the SCALANCE S security modules.
For configuration of the SOFTNET Security Client for SCALANCE S612 and S623,
For test and diagnostics functions and status displays.
To operate the SCALANCE S modules, you need to download a configuration created with
the Security Configuration Tool. The configuration of a SCALANCE S module involves the IP
parameters and the configuration of the firewall rules. With the SCALANCE S612 and S623
devices, it is also possible, when necessary, to configure IPsec tunnels; for a SCALANCE
S602 router mode can be configured.
Firewall
The firewall functionality of SCALANCE S security modules protects the internal network
from influences or disturbances from external networks. This means that; depending on the
configuration, only certain specified communication relations between the network nodes
from the internal network and network nodes of the external networks are allowed.
All network nodes located in the internal network segment of a SCALANCE S security
module are protected by its firewall.
The firewall functionality can be configured for the following protocol levels:
IP firewall incl. stateful inspection
Firewall for Ethernet "non-IP" frames according to IEEE 802.3; (layer 2 frames)
Industrial Ethernet
199

The stateful inspection firewall (also known as Stateful Packet Filter or Dynamic Packet
Filter) is a firewall technology that operates both on the network and at the application layer.
The IP packets are accepted on the network layer, inspected according to their state by an
analysis module and compared with a status table.
For the communication partner, a firewall with stateful inspection appears as a direct
connection that only allows communication according to the rules.
Firewall rules are the rules for data traffic in the following directions:
From the internal to the external network and vice versa,
from the internal network into an IPsec tunnel and vice versa (SCALANCE S612 and
S623 only).
SCALANCE S in routing mode

If SCALANCE S modules are operated in routing mode, they separate the internal network
from the external network based on the analysis of the IP addresses. The internal network
separated by SCALANCE S602 therefore becomes a separate subnet.
The following options are available:
Routing - configured in standard mode and advanced mode.
Packets intended for an existing IP address in the subnet (internal or external) are
forwarded. The firewall rules for the direction of transmission also apply.
For this mode, you must also configure an IP address for the internal subnet.
Note
In contrast to the bridge mode of the SCALANCE S security modules, VLAN tags are lost
in routing mode.
NAT / NAPT routing - configured in advanced mode.
In this mode, the IP addresses are also converted. The IP addresses of the devices in the
internal subnet are translated to external IP addresses and are therefore "invisible" in the
external network.
SCALANCE S as DHCP server

A DHCP server assigns an IP address to each client throughout the network. DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) in conjunction with a suitable server, allows the
dynamic assignment of an IP address and other configuration parameters to computers
within the network.
SCALANCE S security modules can be operated in the internal network as DHCP servers.
This allows IP addresses to be assigned automatically to the devices connected to the
internal network.
The IP addresses are assigned either dynamically from a defined range of addresses or a
specific device is assigned a specific IP address according to the definition.
Industrial Ethernet
200

Testing, diagnostics, logging and Syslog

For testing and monitoring, the Security Configuration Tool (SCT) has diagnostics and
logging functions.
Diagnostics functions
In online mode various system and status functions can be used for diagnostics.
Logging functions
The system and security events are logged. The events are logged in the buffer areas of
the security module (local logging) or of a server (network Syslog). You select the events
to be logged in the log settings for the relevant security module.
IPsec tunnel (SCALANCE S612 and S623)

The expansion or supplement to IP is IPsec or Internet Protocol Security, a layer 3 tunneling
protocol.
This protocol is supported by the SCALANCE S612 and S623 modules.
In the internal networks protected by the SCALANCE S612 and S623, the IPsec tunnel
provides the nodes with a secure data connection through the unsecured external network to
other internal networks protected by the SCALANCE S612 and S623.
The encryption of the data transmission with VPN (IPsec) provides the following:
Protection from espionage, confidentiality: The data exchanged is safe from
eavesdropping.
Protection from manipulation, integrity: The data exchanged is safe from
corruption/counterfeiting.
Authenticity: Only authorized nodes can establish a tunnel.
Using the Security Configuration Tool, the SCALANCE S612 and S623 modules as well as
the SOFTNET Security Client modules integrated in an internal network can be put together
in groups in the configuration to form the VPN (Virtual Private Network).
IPsec tunnels are established automatically between all SCALANCE S612, SCALANCE
S623 modules and SOFTNET Security Client modules that belong to the same group. All
internal nodes of these SCALANCE S612 or S623 modules can communicate with each
other securely via this tunnel.
Tunneling also includes Ethernet frames according to the IEEE standard 802.3 (layer 2
frames). Both IP and non-IP frames are transmitted through the IPsec tunnel.
Industrial Ethernet
201

4.7.3
SCALANCE S602/S612/S623
4.7.3.1
Description
The SCALANCE S devices have rugged metal housings with degree of protection IP30. The
devices are designed so that they can be mounted on a 35 mm DIN rail or an S7-300
standard rail. Direct wall mounting for different mounting positions is also possible. Due to
the S7-300 housing dimensions, the devices are ideally suited for integration in automation
solutions with S7-300 components.
Configuration and engineering data is stored in internal non-volatile memory on the
SCALANCE S modules. A C-PLUG can be used for storage. The compartment for the CPLUG is below a screw cover on the back of the device. If a SCALANCE S module needs to
be replaced, the stored data can be transferred simply to the new device.
SCALANCE S602
Figure 4-38
SCALANCE S602
The SCALANCE S602 device provides flexible protection without complicated handling with
a combination of different security measures:
Data espionage
Unauthorized access
Industrial Ethernet
202

SCALANCE S612
Figure 4-39
SCALANCE S612
The security functions of the SCALANCE S612 module provide flexible protection without
system repercussions are protocol independent (as of layer 2 according to IEEE 802.3) and
do not involve complicated handling to protect against the following: :
Data espionage
Data manipulation
Unauthorized access
Industrial Ethernet
203

SCALANCE S623
Figure 4-40
SCALANCE S623
The SCALANCE S623 module has an RJ-45 DMZ port for secure connection, for example of
remote maintenance routers, laptops or an additional network. DMZ "Demilitarized Zone" is a
network with access options controlled by security mechanisms. The interface is marked
yellow and in the following graphic is protected from the red and green port by a firewall.
VPNs can be terminated using this.
Enterprise network
Industrial Ethernet
Local
service PC
Internet
SCALANCE
S623
Remote
service PC
Service access
G_IK10_XX_10303
DSL modem
Plant network /
protected automation cell
Figure 4-41
Local service PC: Internet access via the DMZ interface of the SCALANCE S623
Industrial Ethernet
204

4.7.3.2

The following table shows an overview of the essential characteristics and functions of the
SCALANCE S modules.
Functionality
S602
S612
S623
C-PLUG slot
Firewall
NAT/NAPT router
DHCP server
SysLog
10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps ports

DMZ port
IPsec tunnel (VPN, Virtual Private Network)
4.7.3.3
Interfaces
The SCALANCE S modules have the following connectors or interfaces:
Connectors / interfaces
Attachment of end devices or network components over 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps
twisted pair
(half/full duplex)
SCALANCE S602 and S612
2 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
SCALANCE S623
3 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
Connector for power supply
1 x 4-pin plug-in terminal block
Connector for signaling contact
1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal block
Electrical data
Supply voltage
Supply 24 VDC (18 to 32 VDC)
Implemented redundantly
Safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
The two Industrial Ethernet connectors, port 1 and port 2 are handled differently by
SCALANCE S modules. For this reason, these interfaces must not be confused when
connecting to the communications network.
Port 1: External network
Upper RJ-45 jack. Marked red, this interface is for the unprotected network area.
Port 2: Internal network
Lower or with the SCALANCE S623 module, the middle RJ-45 jack. Marked green, this
interface is intended for the network area protected by SCALANCE S.
Note
If these marked ports are swapped over, the devices lose their protective function.
Industrial Ethernet
205

Order numbers
S602
Protects network segments from unauthorized

access using a Stateful Inspection firewall;
at 10 / 100 Mbps
6GK5 602-0BA00-2AA3
at 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps
S612
at 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps

Protection of up to 128 devices,
up to 128 VPN tunnels simultaneously
S623
6GK5 602-0BA10-2AA3
Protects network segments from unauthorized

at 10 / 100 Mbps
6GK5 612-0BA00-2AA3
6GK5 612-0BA10-2AA3
Protects network segments from unauthorized 6GK5 623-0BA10-2AA3

at 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps
Expanded temperature range
(from -40 C to +60 C)
Industrial Ethernet
206

4.7.4
SOFTNET Security Client
Description
The SOFTNET Security Client is a software application that serves as an integral component
of the Industrial Security concept for the protection of programmable controllers. This
ensures security during data exchange between programmable controllers and complete
automation systems or automation cells.
The SOFTNET Security Client application is available as a VPN client for programming
devices, PCs and notebooks in an industrial environment. The application allows secure
client access via LANs or even via WANs to automation systems protected by devices
with SCALANCE S functionality. For example for remote maintenance via the Internet.
Protection of the data transfer from incorrect operator input, eavesdropping/espionage
and manipulation.
Communication is only possible between authenticated and authorized devices.
The SOFTNET Security Client uses tried-and-tested IPsec mechanisms for establishing
and operating Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).
Fully integrated intuitive configuration without specialist security knowledge.
A common configuration tool with a common database for SCALANCE S modules and
the SOFTNET Security Client.
Automatic generation of certificates by the Security Configuration Tool.
Automatic identification of the nodes of the internal network and detection of the
SCALANCE S modules in the external network.
Principle of application
The SOFTNET Security Client PC software provides VPN services on the PG or notebook.
This allows secure IP-based access from a PC/PG to automation systems in subnets
protected by SCALANCE S612 or SCALANCE S623.
Details
Easy handling thanks to minimum configuration.
No special IT security experience is necessary.
Changes to or adaptation of the existing network structure are not necessary.
Automatic generation of certificates by the configuration tool.
Little configuration effort due to automatic identification of the nodes of the internal
network and detection of other security modules in the external network.
Benefits
Secure access by programming devices or notebooks to entire automation cells/systems.
Simple use of mobile PCs.
Protection of the data transfer from espionage and manipulation using certified standards.
Devices that can be classified as non-secure can be included in the secure data traffic.
Industrial Ethernet
207

Area of application - access over VPN

With the SOFTNET Security Client, a PC/PG is configured automatically so that it can
establish IPsec tunnels to one or more SCALANCE S modules.
Thanks to communication via these IPsec tunnels, it is possible to access devices or
networks securely that are located in an internal network protected by SCALANCE S using
PG/PC applications such as NCM (Network and Communication Management) Diagnostics
or with STEP 7.
Note
Remember that you can only use the SOFTNET Security Client in groups with modules in
active bridge mode.
Automatic communication over VPN

For your application, it is important that the SOFTNET Security Client automatically detects
access to the IP address of a VPN node. The nodes are addressed in this way using the IP
address as if they were located in the local subnet to which the programming device/PC with
this application is connected.
How it works
The SOFTNET Security Client reads in the configuration created by the Security
Configuration Tool and obtains the required information on the certificates to be imported
from the relevant file. The root certificate and the private keys are imported and stored on the
local PG/PC. Following this, security settings are made based on the data from the
configuration so that applications can access IP addresses downstream from the
SCALANCE S modules.
If a learning mode for the internal nodes or programmable controllers is enabled, the
configuration module first sets a security policy for the secure access to the SCALANCE S
modules. The SOFTNET Security Client then addresses the SCALANCE S modules to
obtain the IP addresses of the internal nodes. The SOFTNET Security Client registers these
IP addresses in special filter lists of the security policy. Following this, applications such as
STEP 7 can communicate with the programmable controllers over VPN.
Industrial Ethernet
208

Order numbers
The SOFTNET Security Client software for establishing secure IP-based VPN connections
from PG/PC to network segments protected by SCALANCE S is available for the following
Windows operating systems.
1 single license for one installation,
runtime software (German/English),
configuration tool (German/English)
The electronic manual on CD-ROM is available in the following languages:
German
English
French
Spanish
Italian
SOFTNET Security Client Edition 2008
For Microsoft Windows XP Professional, 32-bit, incl.

SP1, SP2 and SP3
6GK1 704-1VW02-0AA0
SOFTNET Security Client V3
For Microsoft Windows 7 Professional, Ultimate and

XP Professional, 32-bit, incl. SP3
6GK1 704-1VW03-0AA0
SOFTNET Security Client V4
For Microsoft Windows 7 Professional, Ultimate, 32/

64-bit
6GK1 704-1VW04-0AA0
Industrial Ethernet
209

4.8 Network management software
4.8
Network management software
4.8.1
SINEMA server
Introduction
SINEMA Server monitors the programmable controllers and wireless devices connected to
LANs or WLANs as well as the infrastructure components such as Industrial Ethernet
switches or access points of industrial WLANs. With the "autodiscovery" function of SINEMA
Server, not only the controllers and infrastructure components but also their parameters are
automatically detected if they are relevant for the network. Based on this information the
software then calculates the network topology and statistics. This information is displayed in
the Web interface of SINEMA Server. When necessary, more detailed information can also
be queried in additional diagnostics displays.
SINEMA Server queries the data of the Ethernet nodes cyclically during operation and
signals network alarms. Changes to the network, errors and availability data are logged and
stored in a database. This information is then available. Using reporting functions that can be
restricted to certain periods, the network can be documented and analyzed.
Note
You will find more detailed information on SINEMA Server under SINEMA
(http://www.siemens.com/sinema)

HTTPS Web access with user authentication.
Remote monitoring of network operation, network errors, network security and network
access.
Management of the network and effective monitoring of the detected network devices.
Several users can access the same information at the same time regardless of their
location in the network.
Reporting functions for creating and displaying reports
Support of standard SNMP traps.
Creation of new users and user groups
User roles for different network management activities. Based on these roles, different
views of the Web interface can also be defined in SINEMA Server and can be assigned
to different users and user groups.
E-mail client function and an OPC server for forwarding network data and alarms to other
users or systems.
Export function for archiving project and configuration data.
Function for importing configuration data.
Industrial Ethernet
210

4.8.2
Primary Setup Tool
Description
With the Primary Setup Tool (PST), an address assignment (for example an IP address) is
made via the network for unconfigured SIMATIC NET network components, Ethernet CPs
and gateways. This is only possible if the SIMATIC NET devices have a default ETHERNET
(MAC) address and can be reached online in the network. The nodes must also support the
DCP protocol. The PST uses a filter view to allow a clear presentation of modules and
devices.
Note
The Primary Setup Tool supports only SIMATIC NET Ethernet network components with
management functionality (Web-based Management and/or SNMP). With these
components, you also have the option of calling Web-based Management for diagnostics
and configuration.
Functions
Depending on the properties of the addressed components and interfaces, the following
functions are available in the PST:
Basic functions:
Browsing for devices with an Ethernet interface
Calling up Web Based Management
Downloading configurations to the components
Using functions via the DOS command line
Configuration for Ind. Ethernet / PROFINET
Settings for IP addresses
Configuration for PROFIBUS (for devices with Ethernet and PROFIBUS interfaces)
Setting the PROFIBUS address
PROFIBUS bus parameters
The PST provides these functions via a user-friendly user interface.
Requirements
The devices have a preset ETHERNET (MAC) address or an IP address and can be
reached on the network online.
PROFIBUS interfaces can also be configured using PST only for modules that also have
a reachable Ethernet interface in the network in addition to the PROFIBUS interface.
Industrial Ethernet
211

Supported operating systems
The Primary Setup Tool can be installed and executed under the following operating
systems:
32-bit operating systems
Windows XP Professional SP2 and SP3
Windows 7 Professional / Ultimate
64-bit operating systems
Windows 7 Professional / Ultimate SP1
Windows Server 2008 Standard Server R2
It is possible to set addresses for the following SIMATIC NET network components using
PST:
ELS TP40 M
SCALANCE W700
SCALANCE X200
SCALANCE X300
SCALANCE X400
SCALANCE XR-500M
It is possible to set addresses for the following Ethernet CPs using PST:
CP 343-1
CP 343-1 Lean
CP 343-1 Advanced
CP343-1 ERPC
CP 343-1 BACnet
CP 443-1
CP 443-1 Advanced
It is possible to set addresses for the following SIMATIC NET gateways using PST:
IE/PB Link
IE/PB Link PN IO
IWLAN/PB Link
Industrial Ethernet
212

DCP protocol and DLC protocol
The Primary Setup Tool uses the protocols DCP (Discovery and basic Configuration
Protocol) and DLC (Data Link Control) for communication with the modules. The DLC
protocol is necessary for devices with older firmware versions.
This includes the following devices:
CP 443-1 (6GK7 443-1EX10 and 6GK7 443-1EX11)
Note
The DLC protocol is not supported in 64-bit operating systems. The DLC protocol is not
available either in the setup or during operation of the Primary Setup Tool.
Note
Depending of the operating system you are using, remember the following if you want to
use the DLC protocol:
Windows 7 Professional / Ultimate
The DLC protocol is not included in Windows, but it can be installed and enabled
during installation of the PST.
Hardware requirements at least: Clock frequency 1 GHz / 1 GB RAM / screen
resolution 1024 x 768 / color quality 16 bit
Windows XP Professional
The DLC protocol is not included in Windows, but it can be installed and enabled
during installation of the PST.
Hardware requirements at least: Clock frequency 600 MHz / 512 MB RAM / screen
resolution 1024 x 768 / color quality 16 bit
Note
You will find more detailed information on the Primary Setup Tool and on downloading
the software at 19440762
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19440762).
Industrial Ethernet
213

4.9 Accessories
4.9
Accessories
4.9.1
C-PLUG Configuration Memory
Description
The C-PLUG is an exchangeable medium for storage of the configuration and project
engineering data of the basic device. This means that the configuration data remains
available if the basic device is replaced. It is therefore used when the replacement of
network components or communications modules needs to be quick if a fault occurs without
needing to configure a replacement and without needing specialist personnel. Downtimes of
network segments and connected Industrial Ethernet nodes can therefore be minimized if a
fault occurs.
It can be used in all SIMATIC NET products with a C-PLUG slot.
Design
The C-PLUG has degree of protection IP20. With IP65 components, the protection is
retained because the C-PLUG is installed inside the protected housing.
Power is supplied by the host device. The C-PLUG retains all data when the power is turned
off.
Function
If an empty CPLUG (as supplied) is inserted in a SIMATIC NET component, the device
automatically backs up the configuration data during startup. Changes to the configuration
during operation are also saved on the C-PLUG without any additional operator intervention
being necessary.
When an unconfigured device starts up, it automatically adopts the configuration data of an
inserted C-PLUG assuming the data was written by a compatible device type.
The C-PLUG can also be used to store application data such as documentation or Web
pages.
Industrial Ethernet
214

4.9 Accessories
Diagnostics
Incorrect use of the C-PLUG, such as inserting a C-PLUG containing the configuration of a
different device group or general malfunctions of the C-PLUG are indicated by diagnostics
mechanisms of the host device (LEDs, PROFINET, SNMP, Web based Management, etc.).
Order number
C-PLUG
Exchangeable medium for simple replacement of devices if faults occur,

can be used in SIMATIC NET products with a C-PLUG slot.
6GK1 900-0AB00
Industrial Ethernet
215

4.9 Accessories
Industrial Ethernet
216
Communications processors for PCs
Area of application
Communications processors for PCs/PGs allow you to establish a connection to industrial
Ethernet with a PC/PG or a SIMATIC Microbox PC (PCI-104 interface). There are two
categories of communications processors for PCs/PGs:
Communications processors with their own microprocessor.
This relieves the PC/PG CPU. This frees up computing power on the PC for other
applications, for example HMI (ISO and TCP/IP transport on board).
Communications processors without their own microprocessor.
These communications processors are less expensive than the communications
processors that have their own microprocessor. If there is, however, heavy load on the
PC microprocessor, it is possible that the protocol stack does not receive a time slice and
this leads to the connection being terminated. When using communications processors
with their own microprocessor, this does not occur.
3&,3&ZLWK&3
SIMATIC Microbox
or PC/104-Plus-System
with CP 1604 as PN IO-Controller
,QGXVWULDO
(WKHUQHW
6&$/$1&(;
6
ZLWK&3
&3,7
Figure 5-1
&60
6
ZLWK&3/HDQ
&3
&3$GYDQFHG
6
ZLWK&3(53&
Connecting communications processors for PCs/PGs to Industrial Ethernet based on the

example of a linear bus topology
Industrial Ethernet
217
Device variants
Functionality
CP 1604
CP 1616
CP 1612 A2
CP 1613 A2
CP 1623
CP 1628 1)
Interfaces
PCI
PCI Express
PCI-104
Connectors
RJ-45
Configurable
connections
128
128
64
120
120
120
Gigabit Ethernet
Integrated switch
PN IO
Industrial Ethernet
218

5.1 CP 1604
5.1
CP 1604
Description
Figure 5-2
CP 1604
PCI-104 card with its own microprocessor Ethernet real-time ASIC ERTEC 400 with
which PNIO communication is also possible.
Four RJ-45 ports for Industrial Ethernet for connecting twisted-pair cables.
Integrated 4-port real-time switch for 10/100 Mbps.
Optional: External 12 - 24 VDC power supply to allow operation of switches when the
PC/PG is turned off (using "power supply for CP 1604").
Characteristics and functions of the CP 1604
ISO
Up to 128 connections can be configured at one time.

Data rates 10/100 Mbps (half/full duplex) are supported.
Autocrossover and autonegotiation
IRT (Isochronous Real Time)
Network management and diagnostics over SNMP
Supported protocols
TCP/UDP
PN
MRP
OPC
PG/OP
S7/S5
IT
Order numbers
CP 1604
PCI 104 card (32-bit) with ASIC ERTEC 400 for connection of PCI/104
systems to a PROFINET IO with 4-port real-time switch (RJ-45);
including IO-Base software for PROFINET IO controller and NCM PC; 1
single license for one installation, runtime software, software and
electronic manual on CD-ROM, class A, for Microsoft Windows XP
Professional (32-bit) and Windows 7; other operating systems using the
Development Kit DK-16xx PN IO
6GK1 160-4AA00
Languages: German / English
Industrial Ethernet
219

0 CP 1616
CP 1616
Description
Figure 5-3
CP 1616
PCI module for connecting PCs and SIMATIC PG/PC to PROFINET IO (universal keyed
3.3 V and 5 V; 33 MHz/66 MHz; 32-bit, can operate with 64-bit PCI-X systems)
Four RJ-45 ports for Industrial Ethernet for connecting twisted-pair cables.
Integrated 4-port real-time switch for 10/100 Mbps
PC/PG is turned off.
ISO

Data rates 10/100 Mbps (half/full duplex) are supported.
Autosensing, autocrossover and autonegotiation
IRT (Isochronous Real Time)
Network management and diagnostics over SNMP
Supported protocols
TCP/UDP
PN
MRP
OPC
PG/OP
S7/S5
IT
Order numbers
CP 1616
PCI/104 card (32-bit; 3.3 / 5 V universal keyed) with ASIC ERTEC 400
for connecting PCs to PROFINET IO with 4-port real-time switch (RJ45); including IO-Base software for PROFINET IO controller and NCM
PC; 1 single license for one installation, runtime software, software and
electronic handbook on CD-ROM, class A, for Microsoft Windows XP
Professional (32-bit) and Windows 7; other operating systems using the
Development Kit DK-16xx PN IO
6GK1 161-6AA01
Industrial Ethernet
220

5.2 CP 1612 A2
5.2
CP 1612 A2
Description
Figure 5-4
CP 1612 A2
PCI card without its own microprocessor.

RJ-45 connector for Industrial Ethernet for connecting a twisted-pair cable.

Data rates 10/100/1000 Mbps (half/full duplex) are supported.
Autonegotiation
Supported protocols
ISO
TCP/UDP
PN
MRP
OPC
PG/OP
S7/S5
IT
Order numbers
CP 1612 A2
PCI card (32-bit; 33 / 66 MHz, 3.3 / 5 V universal keyed) for connection

to Industrial Ethernet (10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps) with RJ-45 connector;
including driver for Microsoft Windows XP Professional (32-bit), Service
Pack 2 / 3, 2003 R2 Server SP2, Vista Business / Ultimate SP1 and
Windows 2008 Server
6GK1 161-2AA01
Industrial Ethernet
221

5.3 CP 1613 A2
5.3
CP 1613 A2
Description
Figure 5-5
CP 1613 A2
PCI card with its own microprocessor

RJ-45 connector for Industrial Ethernet for connecting a twisted-pair cable.

Autonegotiation
Time-of-day synchronization
SNMP-supported diagnostics
Supported protocols
ISO
TCP/UDP
PN
MRP
OPC
PG/OP
S7/S5
IT
Order numbers
CP 1613 A2
PCI card (32-bit; 33 / 66 MHz, 3.3 / 5 V universal keyed) for connection

to Industrial Ethernet (10 / 100 Mbps) with RJ-45 connector via
HARDNET-IE S7 /S7-1613 and S7 REDCONNECT;
Support of operating systems according to the SIMATIC NET software
6GK1 161-3AA01
Industrial Ethernet
222

5.4 CP 1623
5.4
CP 1623
Description
Figure 5-6
CP 1623
PCI Express card with its own microprocessor.

Two RJ-45 jacks for Industrial Ethernet for connecting twisted-pair cables.
Can be used as a 2-port switch, both RJ-45 connectors lead to the integrated switch.

Supported protocols
ISO
TCP/UDP
PN
MRP
OPC
PG/OP
S7/S5
IT
Order numbers
CP 1623
PCI Express x1 card for connection to Industrial Ethernet (10 / 100 /

1000 Mbps), with 2-port switch (RJ-45) via HARDNET-IE S7 /S7-1613
and S7 REDCONNECT;
6GK1 162-3AA00
Industrial Ethernet
223

5.5 CP 1628
5.5
CP 1628
Description
Figure 5-7
CP 1628
PCI Express card with its own microprocessor.

Two RJ-45 jacks for Industrial Ethernet for connecting twisted-pair cables.
Can be used as a 2-port switch, both RJ-45 connectors lead to the integrated switch.
Characteristics and functions of the CP 1623

Security mechanisms
Supported protocols
ISO
TCP/UDP
PN
MRP
OPC
PG/OP
S7/S5
IT
Order numbers
CP 1628
PCI Express x1 card for connection to Industrial Ethernet (110 / 100 / 6GK1 162-8AA00 1)
1000 Mbps), with 2-port switch (RJ-45) and integrated security
(firewall, VPN) via HARDNET-IE S7 and S7 REDCONNECT;
Industrial Ethernet
224
Communications processors for SIMATIC S7
Description
For each SIMATIC S7 system, there are communications processors (CPs) that provide a
connection to Industrial Ethernet. This means that S7 controllers can exchange data with
other network nodes via Industrial Ethernet. These network nodes may be other S7
controllers or PGs/PCs. This is only possible if these are equipped with an Ethernet card and
STEP 7 or STEP 7 Micro / WIN 32. This allows remote programming and diagnostics from a
PG/PC. With the communications processors that support PROFINET, PNIO-compliant field
devices can be addressed directly.
SIPLUS
For applications in harsh environmental conditions, in aggressive environments or in extreme
temperature ranges, the standard properties of an individual device or system are often
inadequate. Due to deployment in such locations, there may be restrictions to the
functionality or operational reliability and even total failure of a system.
The product types designed to meet such requirements are identified by 'SIPLUS' being
appended to the name. The products are certified according to EN 60721-3C4, -3S4, -3B2
as well as ISA S71.04-G1, -G2, -G3 and -GX.
The modules are designed for use in humidity of up to 100%, condensation and salty
atmospheres due to conformal coating. These properties also protect the products from
dendrite formation and micro corrosion.
Based on the industrial automation system SIMATIC S7-300, two upgraded SIPLUS
versions are available.
For an expanded temperature range of -25 C to +60 C and some devices up to +70 C.
Unusual environmental load (conformal coating) and electronic equipment on rolling stock
conforming with EN 50155.
Note
SIPLUS
You will find more detailed information and the technical documentation on SIPLUS in the
portal of Siemens AG: http://www.siemens.de/siplus-extreme
Industrial Ethernet
225
Device types of the SIMATIC S7 CPs (communications processors)

The following graphic shows the various device types and the corresponding categories of
the SIMATIC S7 product line.
6,0$7,&6&3
6,0$7,&6
*356
(WKHUQHW
&3
6,0$7,&6
&3/HDQ
6,3/86&3/HDQ
&3
6,3/86&3
&3$GYDQFHG
6,3/86&3
$GYDQFHG
&3(53&
6,0$7,&6
&3
6,3/86&3
&3$GYDQFHG
6,0$7,&6
&3*536
Figure 6-1
SIMATIC S7: CP - communications processors
Industrial Ethernet
226
3&,3&ZLWK&3$
&3&3DQG
+$5'1(7,(6
6ZLWK
&3
S7-1200 ZLWK
CSM 1277
Figure 6-2
6ZLWK
&3/HDQ
&3
&3
$GYDQFHG
6ZLWK
&3
&3
$GYDQFHG
*B,.B;;B
,QGXVWULDO
(WKHUQHW
Connecting S7 systems to Industrial Ethernet based on the example of a linear bus

topology.
Industrial Ethernet
227

6.1 Communications processors for SIMATIC S7-200
6.1
Communications processors for SIMATIC S7-200
Description
Figure 6-3
CP 243-1
Rugged plastic housing with IP20 protection for installation on a DIN rail or for wall
mounting.
Connection to S7-200 components via the backplane bus.
External 24 VDC power supply.
2-pin terminal block for power supply
One RJ-45 jack for Industrial Ethernet for connecting twisted-pair cables.
Industrial Ethernet
228


Up to 8 connections can be configured.
Data rates 10 / 100 Mbps (half/full duplex) are supported along with the autocrossing
function.
A module can be replaced without a programming device because the project
engineering data of the CP is stored on the S7-200 CPU.
Diagnostics LED
8 MB flash memory with file system
File exchange with other computers using FTP.
Integrated HTTP server for a maximum of four connections that allows write and read
access to process and status data of the S7-200 system. This means, for example, that
system diagnostics is possible via a Web browser.
Integrated SMTP client for event-driven sending of e-mails. Up to 32 e-mails can be
configured and these can also contain variables. The current value of such a variable is
queried as soon as the program of the S7-200 CPU triggers the sending of the
corresponding e-mail.
Supported protocols and technologies:
PROFINET
IO-C
IO-D
ISO
TCP/UDP
MRP
IT
IP-R
FTP
PG/OP
S7
CBA
Order numbers
CP 243-1
For connecting SIMATIC S7-200 to Industrial Ethernet;

for S7 communication, PG communication, e-mail and WWW server;
incl. electronic manual on CD-ROM in the languages:
German, English, French, Italian, Spanish
6GK7 243-1EX01-0XE0
Industrial Ethernet
229

6.2
Description
Figure 6-4
SIMATIC S7-300: CP 343-1 Lean and CP 343-1 Advanced
The communications processors of the category SIMATIC S7-300 are equipped with the
following:
Rugged plastic housings for mounting on S7-300 standard rails.
Connections to S7-300 components via a backplane bus.
External 24 VDC power supply.
2-pin terminal blocks for power supply.
Industrial Ethernet
230

Characteristics and functions of all devices

The communications processors of this category support the following protocols and
technologies:
Functionality
CP 343-1 Lean
SIPLUS CP 343-1 Lean
CP 343-1
SIPLUS CP 343-1
CP 343-1 Advanced
SIPLUS CP 343-1 Advanced
PROFINET
IO controller
IO device
CBA
ISO
TCP/UDP
MRP
IT
IP-R
FTP
PG/OP
S7/S5
Functionality
CP 343-1 ERPC
TCP/UDP
FMS
PG/OP
S7/S5
CP 343-1 Lean / SIPLUS 343-1 Lean

The CP 343-1 Lean and the SIPLUS 343-1 Lean are designed for connection of a SIMATIC
S7-300 system to Industrial Ethernet networks also as a PROFINET IO device.
The communications processors support
PG/OP communication
S7 communication
Open communication (SEND/ RECEIVE)
The device has the following characteristics and functions:
A PROFINET interface with two RJ-45 connectors,
10 /100 Mbps, full / half duplex with the functionality for autosensing and autocrossover
via an integrated 2-port switch.
Industrial Ethernet
231

The communications services operate over the following interfaces:
Open communication (TCP/IP, UDP), multicast for UDP
Inter-network PG/OP communication with S7 routing.
S7 communication (server)
PROFINET IO device
Media redundancy (MRP):
Within an Ethernet network with a ring topology, the communications processor
supports the media redundancy protocol MRP
Diagnostics and network management:
Extensive diagnostics functions of all modules of the rack
Integration in network management systems by supporting SNMP V1
Configuration of all functions with STEP 7 as of V5.4 or STEP 7 Professional V11.
Module replacement without PG by storing the configuration data on the CPU.
Connector for connecting SIMATIC S7-300 systems to Industrial Ethernet, except for
SINUMERIK.
Two RJ-45 interfaces for 10 / 100 Mbps full and half duplex connection including
autosensing for automatic switchover and the autocrossover function.
Integrated 2-port real-time ERTEC switch
Multiprotocol operation with TCP and UDP transport protocol and PROFINET IO
Keepalive function
Communications services:
Open communication (TCP/IP and UDP)
PG/OP communication
S7 communication (server)
PROFINET IO device
Multicast for UDP
Full remote programming and initialization are possible via Industrial Ethernet.
IT communication incl. Web functionality.
Integration in network management systems using SNMP.
The data is configured in STEP 7.
Diagnostics options in STEP 7 and via a Web browser.
The SIPLUS CP 343-1 Lean is intended for use under extreme environmental conditions.
One variant of the SIPLUS CP 343-1 Lean for harsh environmental conditions is
designed for ambient temperatures from -25 C to +60 C.
Industrial Ethernet
232

CP 343-1 / SIPLUS CP 343-1
The CP 343-1 and the SIPLUS CP 343-1 have the following characteristics and functions:
A PROFINET interface with two RJ-45 connectors.
With access protection with the ACL (Access Control List), CP 343-1 communication can
be restricted to partners with specific IP addresses.
For the PROFINET interface, you can specify how the IP configuration (IP address,
subnet mask and gateway address) is obtained.
PROFINET IO controller or PROFINET IO device
Communications services:
Open communication with TCP/IP, UDP, multicast for UDP and ISO.
S7 communication (client, server, multiplexing)
Within an Ethernet network with a ring topology, the CP 343-1 supports the media
redundancy protocol MRP.
Extensive diagnostics functions of all modules in the rack.
Integration in network management systems by support of SNMP V1.
Security mechanisms:
Access protection with a configurable IP-ACL (IP Access Control List).
Configuration of all functions with STEP 7 as of V5.4 or STEP 7 Professional V11.
Module replacement without PG by storing the configuration data on the CPU.
SIPLUS CP 343-1
The SIPLUS CP 343-1 module is intended for environmental loads at ambient
temperatures of 0C to +60C. One variant of the SIPLUS CP 343-1 is designed for harsh
environmental conditions at ambient temperatures from -25 C to +70 C.
CP 343-1 Advanced / SIPLUS CP 343-1 Advanced
The CP 343-1 Advanced and the SIPLUS CP 343-1 Advanced have the same range of
functions as the CP 343-1 / SIPLUS CP 343-1. They also have the following additional
characteristics and functions:
Two separate interfaces (integrated network separation)
Gigabit interface
PROFINET interfaces:
CBA, IO controller and IO device with the real-time properties RT and IRT.
30 MB of flash memory with a file system for user-defined HTML pages and 30 MB of
RAM for buffering dynamic data.
Industrial Ethernet
233

An integrated HTTP server that allows write and read access to process and status data
of the S7-300 system. System diagnostics is therefore possible via a secure Web
browser.
An integrated ESMTP client for secure, event-dependent sending of e-mails that can also
contain tags. The current value of such a variable is queried when the program of the S7300 CPU triggers the sending of the corresponding e-mail.
A C-PLUG for storing the configuration data ships with the product.
CP 343-1 Advanced with security function: Security of the system against unauthorized
access by
Central access protection for any devices within an automation cell, for example by
secure authentication of the network nodes.
Secure remote access via Internet thanks to data encryption (VPN)
Data integrity check
Traceability with data logging based on standard IT mechanisms (Syslog)
The SIPLUS CP 343-1 Advanced module is intended for harsh environmental loads at
ambient temperatures of 0C to +60C.
CP 343-1 ERPC (Enterprise Connect)
The CP 343-1 ERPC communications processor (Enterprise Connect) is designed to
connect a SIMATIC S7-300 system to Industrial Ethernet networks.
The CP supports the following:
PG/OP communication
S7 communication
ERPC communication
Direct interfacing with database applications such as ORACLE, MySQL, MS-SQL, DB2.
This allows controllers to be supplied with data or jobs directly from databases of
manufacturing execution systems (MES) or the enterprise resource planning level (ERP).
Note
Database connection of the SIMATIC S7-300 to various database systems for vertical
integration is supported by a firmware expansion from the ILS-Technology company that
must be ordered separately.
Industrial Ethernet
234

Optimum support of upkeep with:
Web-based diagnostics
Remote programming via LAN/WAN
Monitoring using the network management tool (SNMP)
Module replacement without PG using the C-PLUG exchangeable medium
Access protection with a configurable IP-ACL (IP Access Control List)
The CP 343-1 ERPC communications processor allows subsequent connection to SIMATIC
S7 systems within Industrial Ethernet.
Order numbers
CP 343-1 Lean
To connect SIMATIC S7-300 to Industrial Ethernet using

6GK7 343-1CX10-0XE0
TCP/IP and UDP multicast. S7 communication, open
communication (SEND/RECEIVE), FETCH/WRITE,
PROFINET IO device, MRP, integrated 2-port switch ERTEC,
wide-ranging diagnostics options, module replacement
without PG, SNMP, initialization via LAN; incl. electronic
manual on CD-ROM.
For an extended temperature range and harsh environmental 6AG1 343-1CX10-4XE0

loads. To connect SIMATIC S7-300 to Industrial Ethernet
using TCP/IP and UDP multicast. S7 communication, open
communication (SEND/RECEIVE), FETCH/WRITE,
PROFINET IO device, integrated 2-port switch ERTEC, wideranging diagnostics options, module replacement without PG,
SNMP, initialization via LAN; incl. electronic manual on CDROM.
Ambient temperature from 0 C to +60 C
Ambient temperature from -25 C to +60 C
6AG1 343-1CX10-2XE0
CP 343-1
For connecting SIMATIC S7-300 in Industrial Ethernet via

ISO and TCP/IP; PROFINET IO controller or PROFINET IO
device, MRP, integrated 2-port switch ERTEC. S7
communication, open communication (SEND/RECEIVE),
FETCH/WRITE, with and without RFC 1006, multicast,
DHCP, time-of-day synchronization of CPU with SIMATIC
mode and NTP, diagnostics, SNMP, access protection using
IP access list, initialization via LAN 10/100 Mbps; incl.
electronic manual on DVD.
6GK7 343-1EX30-0XE0
SIPLUS CP 343-1
For an extended temperature range and harsh environmental

loads. For connecting SIMATIC S7-300 in Industrial Ethernet
using ISO and TCP/IP, PROFINET IO controller or
PROFINET IO device. S7 communication, open
communication (SEND/RECEIVE), FETCH/WRITE, with and
without RFC 1006, multicast, DHCP, time-of-day
synchronization of CPU with SIMATIC mode and NTP,
diagnostics, SNMP, access protection using IP access list,
initialization via LAN 10/100 Mbps; incl. electronic manual on
DVD.
6AG1 343-1EX30-4XE0

Ambient temperature from -25 C to +70 C
6AG1 343-1EX30-7XE0
Industrial Ethernet
235

CP 343-1 Advanced
6GK7 343-1GX30-0XE0
For connecting SIMATIC S7-300 in Industrial Ethernet.
1 x 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps; 2 x 10 / 100 Mbps (IE SWITCH);
RJ-45 ports; TCP; UDP; ISO; PROFINET IO controller and IO
device, S7 communication (client and server).
Open communication (SEND/RECEIVE); S7 routing;
IP configuration using DHCP/block; advanced Web
diagnostics; time-of-day synchronization; IP access control
list; IP routing; FTP; e-mail; PROFINET CBA; C-PLUG.
Without security function.
With security function, firewall, VPN and PROFIenergy

(controller and device).
6GK7 343-1GX31-0XE0
For connecting SIMATIC S7-300 in Industrial Ethernet.

1 x 10/100/1000 Mbps; 2 x 10/100 Mbps (IE SWITCH); RJ-45
ports; TCP; UDP; ISO; PROFINET IO controller and IO
device, S7 communication (client and server).
Open communication (SEND/RECEIVE); S7 routing;
IP configuration using DHCP/block; advanced Web
diagnostics; time-of-day synchronization; IP access control
list; IP routing; FTP; e-mail; PROFINET CBA; C-PLUG.
6AG1 343-1GX30-4XE0

CP 343-1 ERPC
(Enterprise Connect)
For connecting SIMATIC S7-300 in Industrial Ethernet and to

support the database connection of the SIMATIC S7-300 to
various databases, TCP/UDP. S7 communication, open
communication (SEND/RECEIVE), with and without RFC
1006; multicast; Web server, time-of-day synchronization of
the CPU with SIMATIC mode and NTP, access protection
using IP access list, SNMP, DHCP, initialization via LAN
10/100/1000 Mbps, incl. electronic manual on DVD. A CPLUG ships with the product.
6GK7 343-1FX00-0XE0
Industrial Ethernet
236

6.3
Description
Figure 6-5
SIMATIC S7-400: CP443-1 and CP 443-1 Advanced
The communications processors of the category SIMATIC S7-400 are equipped with the
following:
Rugged plastic housings for mounting in S7-400 racks.
Connections to S7-400 components via the backplane bus.
Industrial Ethernet
237


The communications processors of this category support the following protocols and
technologies:
Functionality
CP 443-1
SIPLUS CP 443-1
CP 443-1 Advanced
PROFINET
IO controller
IO device
CBA
ISO
TCP/UDP
MRP
IT 1)
IP-R
FTP
PG/OP
S7/S5
2)

1) IT stands for Web server, e-mail, FTP
2) IP-R stands for routing between the interfaces
CP 443-1 / SIPLUS CP 443-1

The CP 443-1 and the SIPLUS CP 443-1 are designed to connect a SIMATIC S7-400
system to Industrial Ethernet networks.
The communications processors support:
PG/OP communication
S7 communication
IT communication
The communications processors are also suitable for redundant S7 communication in
SIMATIC H systems and for applications for the functional safety of the communications
technology, for example PROFIsafe in conjunction with an S7-400 F-CPU.
The additional characteristics and functions are as follows:
A PROFINET interface with two RJ-45 connectors. Connection is via an IE FC RJ-45 plug
180 with 180 cable outlet or via a standard patch cable.
Diagnostics LEDs for displaying the operational and communication status.
Simple installation, the CP 443-1 is installed in the rack of the SIMATIC S7-400 and
connected to the other modules via the backplane bus. There are no slot rules.
Industrial Ethernet
238

In conjunction with the interface module IM 460/461, the CP 443-1 can also be operated
in an expansion rack (ER).
Fanless operation of the communications processor.
The communications services operate over the following interfaces:
Open communication (TCP/IP and UDP), multicast for UDP incl. routing between the
two interfaces.
S7 communication (client, server, multiplexing) incl. routing between the two
interfaces.
S7-H communication for SIMATIC S7-400 H systems
PROFINET IO controller with real-time properties due to RT and IRT
The IP address is assigned using DHCP, a simple PC tool or a program block, for
example for HMI.
Within an Ethernet network with a ring topology, the communications processor
supports the media redundancy protocol MRP
Extensive diagnostics functions of all modules of the rack
Integration in network management systems by supporting SNMP V1/V3
A wide range of diagnostics options with LEDs, in STEP 7 and Web-based diagnostics
units incl. monitoring by IT network management tools (SNMP V1 MIB II)
Security mechanisms:
Access protection with a configurable IP-ACL (IP Access Control List)
Configuration of all functions with STEP 7 as of V5.4
Configuration with STEP 7 Professional V11.
Module replacement without PG by storing all data on the CPU.
SIPLUS CP 443-1
temperatures of 0C to +60C.
Industrial Ethernet
239

CP 443-1 Advanced / SIPLUS CP 443-1 Advanced
The CP 443-1 Advanced and the SIPLUS CP 443-1 Advanced are designed for connection
of a SIMATIC S7-400 system to Industrial Ethernet networks also as a PROFINET IO
controller or in SIMATIC H systems.
The additional characteristics and functions are as follows:
In addition to PROFINET IO communication, PROFINET CBA (Component-Based
Automation) is also available here.
This makes communication between technological modules (distributed intelligence)
possible.
Users can choose between cyclic and acyclic communication.
This form of communication is suitable both for non time-critical as well as time-critical
applications.
Configurable keepalive function
Two separate interfaces (integrated network separation):
Gigabit interface with an RJ-45 connector for 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps full / half duplex
with the autosensing functionality.
PROFINET interface with four RJ-45 connectors for 10 / 100 Mbps full / half duplex
incl. autosensing and autocrossover functionality via an integrated 4-port switch.
30 MB of flash memory with a file system for user-defined HTML pages and 30 MB of
RAM for buffering dynamic data.
Integrated HTTP server that allows write and read access to process and status data of
the S7-400 system. This means, for example, that system diagnostics is possible via a
secure Web browser.
Integrated ESMTP client for reliable event-driven sending of e-mails that can also include
variables. The current value of such a variable is queried when the program of the S7400 CPU triggers the sending of the corresponding e-mail.
CP 443-1 Advanced with security function: Security of the system against unauthorized
access by
Central access protection for any devices within an automation cell, for example by
secure authentication of the network nodes.
Secure remote access via Internet thanks to data encryption (VPN)
Data integrity check
Traceability with data logging based on standard IT mechanisms (Syslog)
temperatures of 0C to +60C.
Industrial Ethernet
240

Order numbers
CP 443-1
For connecting SIMATIC S7-400 to Industrial Ethernet using

6GK7 443-1EX30-0XE0
TCP/IP, ISO and UDP; PROFINET IO controller, MRP,
integrated real-time switch ERTEC with two ports and two RJ45 interfaces. S7 communication, open communication
(SEND/RECEIVE) incl. FETCH/WRITE, with or without RFC
1006, DHCP, SNMP V2, diagnostics, multicast, access
protection with IP access control list, initialization via LAN
10/100 Mbps; incl. electronic manual on DVD.
SIPLUS CP 443-1
For connecting SIMATIC S7-400 to Industrial Ethernet using

6AG1 443-1EX20-4XE0
TCP/IP, ISO and UDP; PROFINET IO controller, MRP,
integrated real-time switch ERTEC with two ports and two RJ45 interfaces. S7 communication, open communication
(SEND/RECEIVE) incl. FETCH/WRITE, with or without RFC
1006, DHCP, SNMP V2, diagnostics, multicast, access
protection with IP access control list, initialization via LAN
10/100 Mbps; incl. electronic manual on DVD.
(For harsh environmental load.)
CP 443-1 Advanced
For connecting the SIMATIC S7-400 CPU to Industrial

Ethernet:
1 x 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps,
4 x 10 / 100 Mbps (IE switch).
RJ-45 ports, ISO, TCP, UDP, PROFINET IO controller, S7
communication; open communication (SEND/RECEIVE). S7
routing, IP configuration using DHCP/block. Access
protection with IP access control list; time-of-day
synchronization, advanced Web diagnostics; fast startup,
PROFIenergy support; IP routing; FTP, Web server, e-mail,
PROFINET CBA.
6GK7 443-1GX30-0XE0
Without security function.

With security function: Firewall and VPN.
6GK7 443-1GX31-0XE0
For connecting the SIMATIC S7-400 CPU to Industrial

Ethernet: 1 x 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps, 4 x 10 / 100 Mbps (IE
switch). RJ-45 ports, ISO, TCP, UDP, PROFINET IO
controller, S7 communication; open communication
(SEND/RECEIVE). S7 routing, IP configuration using
DHCP/block. Access protection with IP access control list;
time-of-day synchronization, advanced Web diagnostics; fast
startup, PROFIenergy support; IP routing; FTP, Web server,
e-mail, PROFINET CBA
6AG1 443-1GX20-4XE0

(For harsh environmental load.)
Industrial Ethernet
241

6.4
Description
Figure 6-6
SIMATIC S7-1200: CP 1242-7 (GPRS) and communication with S7-1200
The communications processor also has a rugged and compact plastic housing. The
elements for connecting and the diagnostics are protected by front covers and easily
accessible. The connecting terminals can be removed, installation is on a SIMATIC S7-1200
standard rail.
The CP 1242-7 is connected to the left system bus interface of the S7-1200. The external 24
VDC power supply is via a 3-pin plug-in terminal strip on the top of the module. The SMA
antenna connector for GSM/GPRS antenna and the SIM card slot are on the underside of
the module protected by the lower front cover.
The communications processors CP 1242-7 is used to connect a SIMATIC S7-1200 system
to the GSM/GPRS mobile wireless network that is available worldwide.
Industrial Ethernet
242


Worldwide, wireless data exchange between S7-1200 controllers and/or between S71200 controllers and control centers with an Internet connection.
Communication based on the mobile wireless service GPRS (General Packet Radio
Service) with data transmission speeds of up to 86 kbps on the downlink, the received
channel, and up to 43 kbps on the uplink, the transmit channel.
GPRS mode with fixed IP addresses and dynamic IP addresses with the usual mobile
phone contract types.
Time-of-day synchronization based on NTP (Network Time Protocol)
Connection establishment is "on demand" with a phone call or SMS.
Sending and receiving SMS messages
Clearly recognizable LED signals for fast and simple diagnostics
Compact housing suitable for industry in the S7-1200 design for mounting on a standard
rail
Fast commissioning thanks to simple configuration with STEP 7
In conjunction with the "Telecontrol Server Basic" software, the CP 1242-7 forms a wireless
communications system:
Connection of up to 5000 telecontrol stations to a control center via the OPC interface,
the standard interface for access to process data (Openness, Productivity &
Collaboration).
Buffering of data in the substations if there are connection failures.
The central status monitoring of the substations.
Special services from providers for fixed IP addresses are not necessary.
Teleservice access to the substations is made with STEP 7 via Internet.
Order numbers
CP 1242-7 (GPRS)
1)
Communications processor for connecting SIMATIC S7-1200

to GSM/GPRS mobile wireless networks
6GK7 242-7KX30-0XE0 1)
Note the national approvals in: http://www.siemens.com/funkzulassungen
Industrial Ethernet
243

Industrial Ethernet
244
Description
The Compact Switch Modules are industrial Ethernet switches with a compact, modular
design for use in the immediate vicinity of the SIMATIC S7 CPUs. Using a CSM, the
Ethernet interface of a SIMATIC S7 CPU can be multiplied. This means that simultaneous
communication with operator control and programming devices, other controllers or office
networks is possible.
With a CSM and the SIMATIC S7 controller, simple, low-cost automation networks can be
implemented.
Industrial Ethernet
245
Device variants
Currently, there are four device types of the Compact Switch Module available. These differ
in terms of their construction and the installation options:
The CSM 377 unmanaged meets the requirements of rugged SIMATIC S7-300
technology and is installed on an S7-300 standard rail. The module is designed according
to the standards EN 61000-6-2:2001 and EN 61000-6-4:2001.
The CSM 1277 unmanaged meets the technical and industrial requirements of the new
SIMATIC generation S7-1200. The CSM 1277 is installed on an S7-1200 standard rail.
The module conforms with the standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4.
The SIPLUS NET CSM 1277 is an unmanaged switch for unusual environmental
conditions. The module complies with the standards EN 60721-3-3, class 3B2,
EN 60721-3-3, class 3C4 incl. salt mist and ISA S71.04, the immunity test levels G1, G2,
G3 and GX.
LOGO! With four RJ-45 ports, CSM is intended for external access or connection to
Industrial Ethernet networks. With the LOGO! With a CSM, an Ethernet interface of the
SIMATIC LOGO! can be multiplied. This means that simultaneous communication with
operator control and programming devices, other controllers or office environments is
possible.
It is installed on a standard rail.
Two product variants are available:
LOGO! CSM 12/24 for operation with direct current at a voltage of 12 and 24 V.
LOGO! CSM 230 for operation with AC voltage of 110 and 230 V.
Industrial Ethernet
246

7.1 CSM 377
7.1
CSM 377
Description
Figure 7-1
CSM 377 unmanaged
Unmanaged switch for connection of a SIMATIC S7-300 with integrated PROFINET interface
or with an Industrial Ethernet CP or ET 200M to an Industrial Ethernet network with an
electrical, bus, tree or star structure.
As an unmanaged switch, the CSM 377 is intended for integration of small machines in
existing automation networks or for stand-alone operation of the machines.
Rugged plastic housing with degree of protection IP20.
Simple installation; the CSM 377 switch module is installed on an S7-300 standard rail. It
has no connection to the backplane bus of the S7-300 or ET 200M and muss therefore
be plugged in either at the start (first module to the left of the CPU) or at the end (last
module at the extreme right) of the S7-300 station. The connection to the CPU of the S7300 is either via an Industrial Ethernet cable or an Industrial Ethernet twisted pair cord.
Rugged node connectors suitable for industry with four PROFINET-compliant RJ-45 plugin connectors for twisted pair cables that provide tensile and bending relief due to a
locking mechanism on the casing.
Cost-effective solution for the implementation of small, local Ethernet networks.
Industrial Ethernet
247

7.1 CSM 377

The CSM 377 unmanaged switch has the following characteristics and functions of SIMATIC
S7-300 technology:
Data rates of 10 / 100 Mbps (half / full duplex)
4 x RJ-45 ports for connection to Industrial Ethernet (securing collars) on the front.
1x 2-pin plug-in terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 VDC.
LEDs for diagnostics and status display of the Industrial Ethernet ports.
10 / 100 BaseTX
Automatic detection of the data rate with autosensing and autocrossover functions for
connection of IE FC cables using an IE FC RJ-45 plug from 180 to 100 m.
There are three further Industrial Ethernet interfaces (TP ports) for connection of
additional Ethernet nodes, for example HMI panels or ET 200s.
The CSM 377 does not require a fan or backup battery.
The module can be replaced without a PG.
Order numbers
CSM 377
Unmanaged switch for connection of a SIMATIC S7-300, ET 200M and

up to three further nodes to Industrial Ethernet.
10/ 100 Mbps, 4 x RJ-45 ports, external power supply 24 VDC, LED
diagnostics, S7-300 module including electronic device manual on CDROM.
6GK7 377-1AA00-0AA0
Industrial Ethernet
248

7.2 CSM 1277
7.2
CSM 1277
Description
Figure 7-2
CSM 1277 unmanaged
The Compact Switch Module CSM 1277 is an "unmanaged switch" for connection of a
SIMATIC S7-1200 module to an Industrial Ethernet network with a bus, tree or star structure.
With the CSM 1277, the Ethernet interfaces on a SIMATIC S7-1200 module can be
multiplied for the additional connection of up to three programming devices, control elements
and other Ethernet nodes. This means that simultaneous communication with operator
control and programming devices, other controllers or office networks is possible.
With the CSM 1277 and the controller of SIMATIC S7-1200 systems, simple automation
networks can be implemented at low cost.
Rugged plastic housing with degree of protection IP20
Simple, space-saving installation on the SIMATIC S7-1200 standard rail.
Cost-effective solution for the implementation of small, local Ethernet networks.
Straightforward connection via RJ-45 standard connectors.
Simple and fast status display via LEDs on the device.
The use of straight-through connecting cables is possible due to the integrated
autocrossover function.
Industrial Ethernet
249

7.2 CSM 1277

The following section describes the characteristics and functions of the two product variants
CSM 1277 unmanaged and SIPLUS NET CSM 1277.
CSM 1277 unmanaged
Data rates of 10 / 100 Mbps (half/full duplex) are supported.
3-pin plug-in terminal strip for connection of the external 24 VDC power supply on the top
of the device.
4 RJ-45 jacks for twisted-pair cables
Diagnostics display and status display of the individual industrial Ethernet ports using
LEDs.
Automatic data rate detection with autosensing and autocrossover function.
Multiplication of the Ethernet interfaces of the SIMATIC S7-1200 systems.
The module can be replaced without a PG.
Fanless operation and low-maintenance design
With the Compact Switch Module CSM 1277, various network topologies can be
implemented:
Set up of a small local Industrial Ethernet network with three further nodes.
Connection of the SIMATIC S7-1200 in a bus structure:
At least one RJ-45 connector of the SIMATIC S7-1200 remains free, for example to
connect a programming device (PG).
Connection of the SIMATIC S7-1200 to a higher-level network with a tree or star
structure:
At least two RJ-45 connectors of the SIMATIC S7-1200 remain free, for example to
connect a PG/OP.
SIPLUS NET CSM 1277
The technical concept of the Compact Switch Module SIPLUS NET CSM corresponds to the
functions and characteristics of the CSM 1277 unmanaged. The SIPLUS NET 1277 module
is intended for unusual environmental loads at ambient temperatures of 0C to +55C.
Note
SIPLUS
The SIPLUS extreme products are based on the Siemens standard industrial products.
You will find more detailed information and the technical documentation on SIPLUS in the
portal of Siemens AG: http://www.siemens.de/siplus-extreme
Industrial Ethernet
250

7.2 CSM 1277
Order numbers
CSM 1277
Unmanaged switch for connection of a SIMATIC S7-1200

and up to three further nodes to Industrial Ethernet at 10 /
100 Mbps, 4 x RJ-45 ports. External power supply 24 VDC,
LED diagnostics, S7-1200 module including an electronic
manual on CD-ROM.
6GK7 277-1AA10-0AA0
SIPLUS NET CSM 1277
For an extended temperature range and unusual

environmental loads. Unmanaged switch for connection of a
SIPLUS S7-1200, up to three further nodes on Industrial
Ethernet at 10 / 100 Mbps, 4 x RJ-45 ports. External power
supply 24 VDC, LED diagnostics, S7-1200 module including
an electronic manual on CD-ROM.
6AG1 277-1AA00-4AA0

(For unusual environmental loads.)
Industrial Ethernet
251

7.3 LOGO! CSM
7.3
LOGO! CSM
Description
Figure 7-3
LOGO! CSM 12/24 and LOGO! CSM 230
With the Compact Switch Modules LOGO! CSM 230 and LOGO! CSM 12/24, the logic
system modules of the LOGO! product series can be expanded with additional Ethernet
interfaces. This allows Ethernet networks to be expanded flexibly in electrical bus, tree or
star structures.
The design of the logic modules has been adapted to the LOGO! series to allow simple and
space-saving installation. The "unmanaged switches" can either connect two logic modules
together or provide connectors for additional components such as operator control and
monitoring devices, displays or programming devices (PGs).
Industrial design of the new LOGO! generation
Space-saving, optimized for connection to LOGO! System modules
Cost-effective solution for the implementation of small, local Ethernet networks
Industrial Ethernet
252

7.3 LOGO! CSM

The LOGO! switch modules have the following characteristics and functions. CSM
unmanaged consisting of:
4-port unmanaged switch
Straightforward connection with 4 RJ-45 standard connectors
1 Ethernet port on the front of the module for direct diagnostics access in the cabinet.
2 product variants for the voltage ranges 12 / 24 VDC or 230 VAC/VDC
Power supply via terminal strip connectors
Diagnostics LEDs
Connection of a LOGO! module and up to 3 further nodes to an Industrial Ethernet
network at 10 / 100 Mbps in electrical bus, tree or star structures.
Stand-alone use for networking different Ethernet devices
Order numbers
LOGO! CSM 230
4-port Compact Switch Module for LOGO!, 230 VAC / VDC
6GK7177-1FA10-0AA0
LOGO! CSM 12/24
4-port Compact Switch Module for LOGO!, 12 / 24 VDC
6GK7177-1MA10-0AA0
Industrial Ethernet
253

7.3 LOGO! CSM
Industrial Ethernet
254
Gateways
Description
Gateways allow the connection of Industrial Ethernet networks and other networks that differ
in terms of the transmission media and the handling of data traffic. This makes data
exchange possible with devices that cannot be connected directly to Industrial Ethernet.
AS-Interface
S7-400 /
CP443-1 Advanced
IE/AS-i
Link
PN IO
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE
W788-1PRO
ET 200S
IWLAN/PB
Link
PN IO
PROFIBUS
Figure 8-1
IE/PB
Link
PN IO
S7-300 /
CP 342-5
PROFIBUS
Connection between IWLAN and PROFIBUS via the IWLAN/ PB Link

Connection between Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS via the IE/ PB Link PN IO
Connection between Industrial Ethernet and AS-interface via the IE/ AS-i Link PN IO
Industrial Ethernet
255
Gateways
Figure 8-2
Use of the IE/WSN-PA Link as gateway between a WirelessHART network abbreviated

to WSN (Wireless Sensor Network) and a hard-wired network.
Industrial Ethernet
256
Gateways
Device variants
352),%86
$6,QWHUIDFH
:61
,(352),1(7
,(3%/LQN31,2
,($6L/LQN31,2
,(:613$/LQN
:/$1
,:/$13%/LQN31,2
Figure 8-3
Gateways
IE/PB Link PN IO
The IE / PB Link PN IO is a gateway between Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS. This
device can also be used as a PROFINET IO proxy. This means that PROFIBUS DP slaves
are treated as IO devices with an Ethernet interface.
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO is a link between Industrial Wireless LAN and PROFIBUS. The
wireless interface supports Rapid Roaming and is therefore also suitable for industrial use
with real-time requirements. An omnidirectional antenna, directional antenna or helical
antenna (in conjunction with RCoax cables) suitable for the application can be connected to
the R-SMA socket. With an IWLAN/PB Link, PROFIBUS IO can also be made usable for
mobile applications.
IE/AS-i Link PN IO
The IE/AS-i Link PN IO is a gateway between a PROFINET / Industrial Ethernet (PROFINET
IO device) and an AS-Interface. This device allows transparent data access to the ASinterface from Industrial Ethernet.
IE/WSN-PA Link
The IE/ WSN-PA Link is a gateway that connects WirelessHART wireless networks with
Ethernet. An IE/WSN-PA Link allows a self-organizing WirelessHART network to be set up
and manages the security functions and connectivity. This link is the entry point for data sent
by WirelessHART sensors. This data is made available to other systems via an Ethernet
interface.
On the wireless side, the IE/ WSN-PA Link supports the WirelessHART standard (HART V
7.1) and on the Ethernet side communication with TCP/IP.
Industrial Ethernet
257
Gateways
8.1 IE/PB Link PN IO
8.1
IE/PB Link PN IO
Design
Compact synthetic housing with degree of protection IP20 for mounting on an S7-300
standard rail.
A 9-pin D-sub socket for connection to PROFIBUS.
An RJ-45 jack for connection to Industrial Ethernet.
24 VDC power supply via 2-pin terminal strip.
Optional use of the C-PLUG memory medium (does not ship with the product) for storage
of device parameters. This makes fast device replacement possible if there is a fault.

Ethernet transmission rate 10/100 Mbps full/half duplex, autosensing.
Data transmission rate PROFIBUS 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps incl. 45.45 kbps for PROFIBUS
PA.
By using the PROFINET IO proxy function, existing PROFIBUS devices can continue to
be used in a PROFINET environment. PROFIBUS DP slaves are connected to the
PROFINET IO controller with real-time properties.
SNMP diagnostics and integration in the network management systems of the
PROFIBUS devices via the IE/PB Link PN IO.
Industrial Ethernet
258
Gateways
8.2 IWLAN/PB Link PN IO
8.2
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO
Design
Compact synthetic housing with degree of protection IP20 for installation on a DIN rail.
A 9-pin D-sub socket for connection to PROFIBUS.
R-SMA socket for connecting antennas.
24 VDC power supply via 4-pin terminal strip. As an option, redundant power supply via
the decoupled inputs is also possible.

Support of the wireless standards IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE
802.11h with data transmission rates up to 54 Mbps at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz.
Data transmission rate PROFIBUS 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps incl. 45.45 kbps for PROFIBUS
PA.
By using the PROFINET IO proxy function, existing PROFIBUS devices can continue to
be used in a PROFINET environment. PROFIBUS DP slaves are connected to the
PROFINET IO controller with real-time properties.
The IWLAN/PB Link PN IO supports iPCF (industrial Point Coordination Function). This
mechanism allows reduced handover times of significantly less than 50 ms when
changing from one wireless cell to another.
Communication with PROFIBUS automation systems in mobile applications, for example
driverless transport systems, high-bay conveyor systems or overhead monorails.
Industrial Ethernet
259
Gateways
8.3 IE/AS-i Link PN IO
8.3
IE/AS-i Link PN IO
Design
Compact synthetic housing with degree of protection IP20 for installation on a DIN rail.
Full graphics display and control buttons on the front of the housing for commissioning
the entire lower-level AS-i line and diagnostics on site.
Two switched Ethernet ports (RJ-45 jacks).
Power supply via the AS-interface cable or as an option, 24 VDC via screw terminals.

Ethernet transmission rate 10/100 Mbps, autosensing.
AS-Interface bus cycle time 5 ms with 31 slaves, 10 ms with 62 slaves.
Use as single and double AS-interface master for the connection of 62 AS-interface
slaves and integrated analog monitoring.
Integrated Web server via which configuration with Web-based Management is also
possible.
Integrated short-circuit to ground monitoring for the AS-interface cable.
Industrial Ethernet
260
Gateways
8.4 IE/WSN-PA Link
8.4
IE/WSN-PA Link
Design
Rugged metal housing with degree of protection IP65 for wall or mast mounting indoors
and outdoors
two RJ-45 jacks for connection to Industrial Ethernet and Modbus TCP/IP
one RS-485 interface (2-pin terminal strip) for connection to Modbus RTU
24 VDC power supply via 3-pin terminal strip
Antenna variants:
Integrated, non-detachable antenna
one N-Connect socket for connection of external antennas.

Support of the wireless standard IEEE 802.15.4 and the
Wireless HART standard HART V7.1
Up to 100 WirelessHART devices can be operated in the WirelessHART network with a
maximum latency time of 10 seconds (with the maximum configuration).
Ethernet transmission rate 10/100 Mbps, autosensing
System integration can be achieved with: TCP/IP via an HTTPS browser, OPC server,
Modbus TCP/IP over Ethernet or via the Modbus RTU over a serial connection.
THE IE/WSN-PA Link sets up a meshed wireless sensor network on the wireless side via
which the wireless measuring transducers communicate with the IE/WSN-PA Link. The
data of the wireless field devices is buffered on the IE/WSN-PA Link and transferred to
the connected systems via Ethernet.
The configuration of the IE/WSN-PA Link is via Web user interfaces generated by the
IE/WSN-PA Link. Device statuses and measured values can also be displayed using this
Web user interface.
Industrial Ethernet
261
Gateways
8.5 Order numbers for gateways
8.5
Order numbers for gateways
Order numbers
IE/PB Link PN IO
Gateway between Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS with

PROFINET IO functionality, TCP/IP, S7 routing and data record
routing.
10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet, 9.6 to 12 Mbps PROFIBUS
including electronic manual on CD-ROM in the following
languages: German, English, French, Spanish and Italian.
6GK1 411-5AB00
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO
Functionality and S7 routing according to IEEE 802.11 B/G/A.

Transmission frequencies: 2.4/ 5 GHz up to 54 Mbps 9.6 kbps to
12 Mbps PROFIBUS.
6GK1 417-5AB00
National approvals for operation outside the USA

National approvals for operation in the USA
6GK1 417-5AB01
6GK1 411-2AB10
Gateway between PROFINET / Industrial Ethernet and ASInterface with degree of protection IP20. Including plug-in screw
connectors COMBICON for connecting an AS-Interface cable,
with double masters, two AS-Interface cables, and an optional
power supply of 24 V. According to the AS-Interface specification
3.0.
Dimensions (width x height x depth): 90 mm x 132 mm x 88.5 mm
IE/AS-i Link PN IO
Single master with display

IE/WSN-PA Link
Double master with display
6GK1 411-2AB20
Gateway between WirelessHART and Industrial Ethernet.

Transmission frequency: 2.4 GHz
6GK1 411-6CA40-0AA0
With integrated antenna

N-connector for connection of external antennas
6GK1 411-6CA40-0BA0
Note
You will find the current approvals in the portal of Siemens AG under:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/46374734
Industrial Ethernet
262

9.1
Contacts for special cables and special lengths
Contacts for special cables and special lengths

For special cables and special lengths of the individual cable types please contact:
Jrgen Hertlein
SIEMENS I IA SC CI PRM 4
E-mail: juergen.hertlein@siemens.com
Tel.: + 49 (911) 750-4465
Telefax: + 49 (911) 750-9991
Industrial Ethernet
263
9.2
Electrical networks
9.2.1
Electrical cables
The following electrical Industrial Ethernet cables are available for different topologies,
requirements or areas of application.
Note
You will find detailed information and technical specifications on the products in the system
manual "Passive network components".
Cable
Cable type
Characteristics
Area of application
TP cord
IE TP cord 2x2
IE TP XP cord 2x2
IE TP cord 4x2
IE TP XP cord 4x2
Patch cable,
preassembled with RJ-45
connectors
For connection of nodes to network

components within a cabinet, up to 10
m cable length
FC installation cables
Insulation-piercing
technique
Sold by the meter
For direct connection between node

and network component, used for
structured cabling, fast and simple
attachment to FC contacts
Fast Connect
IE FC TP 2x2
4-wire cable for Fast
Ethernet networks
IE FC TP standard cable GP
Standard bus cable with solid wires

and special design for self-assembly; 4
solid wires twisted into a star quad
IE FC TP flexible cable GP
Flexible bus cable for special

situations with occasional movement;
4 wires (stranded) twisted into a star
quad
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP
Flexible, halogen-free cable for use in

buildings (FRNC= Flame Retardant
Non Corrosive); 4 wires (stranded)
twisted into a star quad for occasional
movement
IE FC TP trailing cable GP IE
FC TP trailing cable
Highly flexible bus cable for special

uses involving constant movement in a
drag chain, for example with
permanently moving machine parts; 4
wires (stranded) twisted into a star
quad
Flexible cable for special use with

constant movement in a cable festoon,
for example in cranes; 4 wires
(stranded) twisted into a star quad
IE FC TP food cable
Flexible cable specially for use in the

food and beverages industry; 4 wires
(stranded) twisted into a star quad
Industrial Ethernet
264
Cable
IE FC TP 4x2
8-wire cable for
gigabit Ethernet
networks
IE connecting cable
Cable type
Characteristics
Area of application
IE FC TP marine cable GP
Bus cable specially for use on ships; 4

wires (stranded) twisted into a star
quad, halogen-free, certified for
shipbuilding
IE FC TP torsion cable
Highly flexible bus cable specially for

use with constant movement, for
example when using robots; 4 wires
(stranded)
IE FC TP standard cable
(22 AWG)
For setting up Industrial Ethernet

networks up to 100 m in conjunction
with the IE FC Modular Outlet and the
TP cords
IE FC TP standard cable GP
(24 AWG)
For direct connection up to 60 m

without patching with IE FC RJ-45
Plug 4x2
IE connecting cable
M12-180/M12-180
Preassembled cable with

two 4-pin M12 plugs
Power connecting cable

M12-180/M12-180
Connecting cable with two 4-pin M12

plugs (D-coded) for connection of
Industrial Ethernet nodes with degree
of protection IP65/IP67
Connecting cable with one 4-pin M12
plug (A-coded) and one 4-pin M12
socket (A-coded) for 24 V power
supply
IE connecting cable
M12-180/IE FC RJ-45 Plug
Preassembled cable with

one 4-pin M12 plug and
one IE FC RJ-45 Plug
Connecting cable with one 4-pin M12

plug (D-coded) and one IE FC RJ-45
connector with 145 cable outlet. The
connecting cable is used to connect
Industrial Ethernet nodes
IE hybrid cable
IE hybrid cable 2x2
Hybrid cable for

simultaneous transfer of
data (10/100 Mbps) and
power (24 V/400 mA);
insulation piercing
technique
sold by the meter
Industrial and office environment; for

IE FC RJ-45 modular
outlet and access point
SCALANCE W with IP67 hybrid
connector
Power
Energy cable 2 x 0.75
Energy cable, sold by the

meter
For connecting a signaling contact or

24 VDC power supply
Industrial Ethernet
265
9.2.2
General
FastConnect (FC) twisted pair (TP)

For structured cabling within a factory, the FC TP cabling system is ideal. Using the
FastConnect (FC) assembly system for Industrial Ethernet, structured cabling from the office
environment has been further developed for use in the factories.
FC cables can be assembled quickly and simply on site. This means that RJ-45 cabling
technology, an existing standard, is also available in a version suitable for industry and
making such cabling possible in an industrial environment.
With the IE RJ-45 plug and FC cables, runs of up to 100 m cable length are possible without
patching.
Twisted pair (TP) cord

The TP cord is used to connect end devices to the Industrial Ethernet FC cabling system. It
is intended for use in cabinets and is used mainly as patch cables. TP cord is also known as
patch cable.
The maximum total length of the TP cord in a point-to-point link is 10 m.
Standards
The EN 50173 standard describes the structured cabling of office buildings. IEC 24702
describes the structured building networking of an industrial building. The general description
of networking an automated plant within an industrial building can be found in IEC 61918.
The the profile-specific networking rules for PROFINET can be found in IEC 61784-5-3.
Industrial Ethernet
266
Structured cabling
Structured cabling describes the cabling of building complexes for information technology
purposes regardless of the applications used. A building is divided into the following areas:
Primary area: Interconnection of buildings of a campus
Secondary area: Interconnection between floors of a building
Tertiary area: Information technology connectors for the end devices of a floor
TP Cords can be used as patch cables between devices and on patch panels.
The structured cabling that can be implemented with the Industrial Ethernet FC system
corresponds to tertiary cabling according to the ISO/IEC 11801, IEC 24702 and EN 50173
standards.
$FWLYHGLVWULEXWRU
HJ6&$/$1&(;
7HUPLQDOGHYLFH
HJ6
&RQQHFWLRQ
FDEOH
HJ,(73FRUG
,QVWDOODWLRQFDEOH
HJ)&73VWDQGDUGFDEOH[
&RQQHFWLRQ
VRFNHW
,()&5-
0RGXODU2XWOHW
&
&RQQHFWLRQ
VRFNHW
,()&5-
0RGXODU2XWOHW
$%
P
$%& P
Figure 9-1
Structured cabling
Table 9- 1
Cables for structured cabling to EN 50173
G_IK10_XX_10061
3DWFKFDEOH
HJ,(73FRUG
Use
SIMATIC NET cable
Maximum length
Patch cable
IE TP cord
A+C max. 10 m
Tertiary cable
B max. 90 m
B max. 75 m
B max. 45 m
B max. 75 m
B max. 75 m
IE FC marine cable
B max. 75 m
B max. 75 m
IE FC food cable
B max. 75 m
B max. 75 m
IE hybrid cable
B max. 75 m
Industrial Ethernet
267
100BASE-TX
The twisted pair interfaces of the SCALANCE products correspond to the standard IEEE
802.3u: 100BASE TX. Depending on the variant, the devices have one or more RJ-45 jacks
or M12 sockets.
Maximum lengths of twisted pair cables

The twisted pair cables to be used between two neighboring devices must not exceed the
following maximum lengths:
Cabling structure
Cable type
In one piece
100 m
They are used without

patch cables.
85 m
55 m
85 m
85 m
IE FC marine cable
85 m
85 m
90 m
10 m
75 m
10 m
45 m
10 m
75 m
10 m
75 m
10 m
IE FC marine cable
75 m
10 m
75 m
10 m
ITP standard 2 x 2
100 m
Structured
The set up is with patch IE FC flexible cable GP

cables and and IE FC
outlet RJ-45 or IE FC
RJ-45 modular outlet.
In one piece,
including D-sub plugs.
Max. length
Max. total of
the patch cables (TP
cord)
See also
Appendix (Page 359)
Industrial Ethernet
268
9.2.3
IE FC TP cable
The FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair (TP) cables are shielded cables with a symmetrical radial
design and 100 ohms characteristic impedance.
The combination of twisted cores, foil screen and braided shield makes the FC cables
especially suitable for installation in industrial environments subject to electromagnetic
interference. When installed, the design also ensures a high degree of stability of electrical
and mechanical data.
Using the IE FC stripping tool, the outer jacket and shield of the FC TP cables can be
stripped to correct lengths in a single action.
All FC TP cables are UL-listed products and suitable for use in the USA and Canada. Cables
with this certification have the letters GP (General Purpose) in their names.
IE FC TP cable 2x2
The 4-wire FC TP cables are suitable for a transmission rate of 10 / 100 Mbps. The 4 wires
are twisted into a star quad.
Cable cross-section
Figure 9-2
IE FC TP CABLE 2X2
The IE FC TP standard cable and the IE FC TP food cable have solid wires, the other cables
have stranded wires.
Note
You will find information about PROFINET conformity for the electrical cable types of the IE
FC cable 2x2 in the PROFINET Installation Guide. This document can be downloaded from
the portal www.profibus.com/downloads.
Industrial Ethernet
269
IE FC TP cable 4x2
To operate 1 gigabit Ethernet networks, 8-wire FC TP cables are required. The 8-wire FC TP
cables are category 6 (CAT6) according to the international cabling standards ISO/IEC
11801 and EN 50173.
The 8-wire FC TP cable can also be operated at lower data rates, for example 100 Mbps.
Cable cross-section
Figure 9-3
IE FC TP 4x2 22 AWG
Figure 9-4
IE FC TP 4x2 27 AWG
Industrial Ethernet
270
9.2.3.1
Description
The IE FC TP standard cable GP is the standard cable for Fast Ethernet. The cable with
solid copper wires (22 AWG) is intended for permanent, fixed installation.

Cable type 1)

(PROFINET type A)
Areas of application
Universal application
Cable specification
Cat 5e
Maximum cable length
with IE FC RJ-45 plug
100 m
with IE FC outlet RJ-45
90 m
Cable type (standard code)
2YY (ST) CY 2x2x0.64/1.5-100 GN
Jacket
PVC (6.5 0.2) mm, green
Permitted ambient conditions

Operating temperature
-40 to +75
Transportation/storage
temperature
-40 to +75
Installation temperature
-20 to +60
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant to UL 1685 (CSA FT 4)
Resistance to oil
Conditionally resistant
UV resistance
resistant
Product characteristics
Halogen-free
no
Silicone-free
yes
1)
Electrical characteristics at 20 C, tests according to DIN 47 250 Part 4 or DIN VDE 0472
Order numbers
IE TP standard cable GP 2x2
(PROFINET type B)
4-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC

outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 plug
PROFINET-compliant; with UL approval.
6XV1 840-2AH10
Industrial Ethernet
271
9.2.3.2
Description
The IE FC flexible cable GP 2x2 with its flexible wires is suitable for applications in which
occasional movement is required.

Cable type 1)

(PROFINET type B)
Occasional movement
Cable specification
Cat 5e
85 m
75 m
2YY (ST) CY 2x2x0.75/1.5-100LI GN
Jacket
PVC (6.5 0.2) mm

25 C to +75 C
temperature
-25 to +75
-10 to +60
Resistance to fire
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
no
Silicone-free
yes
1)
Electrical properties at 20 C, tested to DIN 0472
Order numbers
(PROFINET type B)

outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 plug for occasional movement;
PROFINET-compliant; with UL approval;
6XV1 870-2B
Industrial Ethernet
272
9.2.3.3
IE FC TP torsion cable 2x2
Description
In contrast to IE FC TP Standard Cable 2x2 with the IE FC TP torsion cable 2x2, the wires
are stranded copper. In conjunction with the special combination of braid shield, fleece foil
shield, and the sheath material of polyurethane (PUR), the cable achieves a torsional
strength of 180 and highly constant electrical characteristics. The cable has been tested
for 5,000,000 torsion movements on 1 m cable length (180).
The cable is suitable for networking moving plant parts, such as robots. The cable is not
suitable for festoons.

Cable type 1)
IE FC TP torsion cable GP 2x2

(PROFINET type C)
Constant motion when used with robots
Cable specification
Cat 5e
55 m
45 m
2YY (ST) CY 2x2x0.75/1.5-100 LI GN
Jacket
PVC (6.5 0.2) mm

-40 C to +80 C
temperature
-40 C to +80 C
-20 C to +60 C
Resistance to fire
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
no
Silicone-free
yes
1)
Order numbers
IE FC TP torsion cable GP 2x2
(PROFINET type C) 3)

outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 plug for use with robots; PROFINETcompliant; with UL approval;
6XV1 870-2F
Industrial Ethernet
273
9.2.3.4
Description
In contrast to the IE FC TP standard cable 2x2, with the IE FC TP trailing cable 2x2, the
wires are stranded copper. In conjunction with the special combination of braid shield, fleece
foil shield, and the sheath material of polyurethane (PUR), the cable achieves a bending
radius of 100 mm and highly constant electrical characteristics. The cable is designed for
4,000,000 bending cycles with a bending radius of 100 mm, a speed of 4 m/s and an
acceleration of 4m/s2.

Cable type 1)

(PROFINET type C)
Use in drag chains
Cable specification
Cat 5e
85 m
75 m
2YH (ST) C11Y 2 x 2 x 0.75/1.5-100 LI GN VZN FRNC
Jacket
PUR (6.5 0.2) mm

-40 C to +75 C
temperature
-40 C to +75 C
-20 C to +60 C
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant to IEC 60332-1-2
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
yes
Silicone-free
yes
1)
Order number
(PROFINET type C)

outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 plug 180/90 for use in drag
chains; PROFINET-compliant; with UL approval
6XV1 840-3AH10
Industrial Ethernet
274
9.2.3.5
Description
In contrast to the IE FC TP standard cable 2x2, with the IE FC TP trailing cable GP 2x2, the
wires are stranded copper. The cable is designed for 3,000,000 bending cycles with a
bending radius of 100 mm, a speed of 4 m/s and an acceleration of 4m/s2.

Cable type 1)

(PROFINET type C)
Use in drag chains
Cable specification
Cat 5e
85 m
75 m
2YY (ST) CY 2x2x0.75/1.5-100 LI GN
Jacket
PVC (6.5 0.2) mm

-25 C to +75 C
temperature
-25 C to +75 C
-10 C to +60 C
Resistance to fire
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
no
Silicone-free
yes
1)
Order number
(PROFINET type C)

outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 plug for use with drag chains;
PROFINET-compliant; with UL approval;
6XV1 870-2D
Industrial Ethernet
275
9.2.3.6
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP 2x2
Description
The halogen-free IE FC TP FRNC cable is suitable for installation in areas in which special
fire prevention conditions prevail, for example in buildings open to the public.
The jacket is FRNC (Flame Retardant Non Corrosive): FRNC materials are halogen-free,
flame-retardant or self extinguishing and do not release any aggressive gases or acids when
burned.

Cable type 1)
IE TP FRNC cable GP2x2

(PROFINET type B)
Occasional movement
Cable specification
Cat 5e
85 m
75 m
02YS (ST) C11Y 1 x 4 x 0.75/1.5-100LI GN VZN FRNC
Jacket
FRNC (6.5 0.2) mm, green

-25 C to +70 C
temperature
-45 C to +75 C
0 C to +50 C
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant IEC 60332-3-22

Category A/F
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
yes
Silicone-free
yes
1)
Order numbers
IE TP FRNC cable GP 2x2
(PROFINET type B)
4-wire, shielded, halogen-free TP installation cable for

connection to IE FC outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 plug for
occasional movement.
PROFINET-compliant, with UL approval.
6XV1 871-2F
Industrial Ethernet
276
9.2.3.7
IE FC festoon cable GP 2x2
Description
The IE FC festoon cable GP 2x2 with its stranded wires and a PUR outer jacket is
specifically designed for festoon applications on cranes.

IE FC festoon cable GP 2x2
(PROFINET type B)
Cable type 1)
Use in festoons
Cable specification
Cat 5e
85 m
75 m
2YY(ST)CY 2X2X0.75/1.5 LI GN
Jacket
FRNC (6.5 0.2) mm

-40 C to +75 C
Transportation/storage temperature
-50 C to +75 C
-20 C to +60 C
Resistance to fire
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
yes
Silicone-free
yes
Order numbers
IE FC TP festoon cable GP 2x2
(PROFINET type C)
4-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE 6XV1 871-2L

FC outlet RJ-45/IE FC RJ-45 plug 180/90 for food,
beverages and tobacco industry; PROFINET-compliant;
sold in meters; maximum length available 1000 m,
minimum length available 20 m
IE FC TP festoon cable GP 2x2

(PROFINET type B)
4-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE 6XV1 871-2S

FC outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 plug 180/90 for use in
festoon applications; PROFINET-compliant; with UL
approval
Industrial Ethernet
277
9.2.3.8
IE FC TP food cable 2x2
Description
The IE FC TP food cable 2x2 with its PE outer jacket and stranded wires is specifically
designed for use in the food, beverages and tobacco industry.

Cable type 1)
IE FC TP food cable 2x2

(PROFINET type C)
Food, beverages and tobacco industry
Cable specification
Cat 5e
85 m
75 m
2YH(ST)C2Y 2X2X0.75/1.5-100 LI
Jacket
PUR (6.5 0.2) mm

-40 C to +75 C
temperature
-50 C to +75 C
-20 C to +60 C
Resistance to fire
Flammable
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
yes
Silicone-free
yes
1)
Order numbers
IE FC TP food cable GP 2x2
(PROFINET type B))
4-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE 6XV1 871-2S

FC outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 plug 180/90 for use in
festoon applications; PROFINET-compliant; with UL
approval
Industrial Ethernet
278
9.2.3.9
IE FC TP marine cable 2x2 GP
Description
The halogen-free IE FC TP marine cable has a the following shipbuilding certifications:
American Bureau of Shipping Europe Ltd. (ABS)
Bureau Veritas (BV)
Det Norske Veritas (DNV)
Germanischer Lloyd (GL)
Lloyds Register of Shipping (LRS)
The jacket is FRNC (Flame Retardant Non Corrosive): FRNC materials are halogen-free,
flame-retardant or self extinguishing and do not release any aggressive gases or acids when
burned.

Cable type 1)

(PROFINET type B)
Marine and offshore use
Cable specification
Cat 5e
85 m
75 m
L-9YH (ST) CH 2 x 2 x 0.34/1.5-100 GN VZN FRNC
Jacket
FRNC (6.5 0.2) mm

-25 C to +70 C
Transportation/storage temperature -40 C to +70 C

0 C to +50 C
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant IEC 60332-3-22

Category A/F
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
yes
Silicone-free
yes
1)
Industrial Ethernet
279
Order number
(PROFINET type B) 2)
9.2.3.10
4-wire, shielded, halogen-free TP installation cable for

connection to IE FC outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 plug
180/90, certified for shipbuilding;
6XV1 840-4AH10
Description
The IE FC flexible cable GP 4x2 with its flexible wires is suitable for applications in which
occasional movement is required. The cable has the FC design and can be stripped with the
IE FC stripping tool. This allows the IE FC RJ-45 4x2 plug-in connector to be connected to
the IE FC flexible cable GP 4x2.

Cable type 1)
IE FC standard cable GP 4x2

(22 AWG)
Occasional movement
Cable specification
Cat 6
55 m
LI02YSH (ST) CY 4x2x0.22/1.1-100 GN
Jacket
PVC (8 0.2) mm; green

-40 C to +80
-40 C to +80
40 C to +80 C
Resistance to fire

(Category C)
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
no
Silicone-free
yes
1)
Industrial Ethernet
280
Order numbers
9.2.3.11
8-wire shielded TP installation cable for universal application;

with UL approval.
6XV1 878-2B
IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 4x2
Description
The IE FC TP standard cable GP 4x2 is available in two variants.
IE FC TP standard cable 4x2 (22 AWG)
The cable is used to set up Industrial Ethernet networks up to 100 m.
IE FC TP cable 4x2 (24 AWG)
The cable is used for direct connection up to 90 m without patch cables.

Cable type 1)

(22 AWG)

(24 AWG)
Cable specification
Cat 6
Cat 6
55 m
90 m
+ 10 m patch cable
2YH (ST) C 4x2x0.64/1.25-100 GN

4x2xAWG22
2YH (ST) CY 4x2x0.5/1.0-100 GN
Jacket
PVC (9.6 0.3) mm; green
PVC (8 0.2 mm; green
-40 C to +80
-40 C to +80
-40 to +80
-40 to +80
-40 to +80 C
-40 to +80 C
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant to IEC 60332-1
(Category C)
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
resistant
Halogen-free
no
no
Silicone-free
yes
yes
1)
Industrial Ethernet
281
Order numbers
IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 4x2
9.2.4
8-wire shielded TP installation cable for universal application;

with UL approval.
22 AWG
6XV1 870-2E
24 AWG
6XV1 878-2A
IE connecting cable M12
Description
The IE connecting cable M12 is an assembled connecting cable for connecting Industrial
Ethernet nodes. As the connecting cable, the IE FC TP trailing cable GP is used. Due to the
4-wire IE FC TP trailing cable GP that is used, the connecting cable is suitable for drag
chains. The IE connecting cable M12 is suitable for drag chains for 3,000,000 bending cycles
at a bending radius of 100 mm, a speed of 4 m/s and an acceleration of 4 m/s.
The IE connecting cable M12 is available in the following variants:

IE connecting cable M12-180/M12-180
Connecting cable with two 4-pin M12 plugs (D-coded) for connection of Industrial
Ethernet nodes with degree of protection IP65/IP67, e.g. SIMATIC ET 200, SCALANCE
X208PRO and SIMATIC RF systems.
IE connecting cable M12-180/IE FC RJ-45-145
Connecting cable with one 4-pin M12 plug (D-coded) and one IE FC RJ-45 connector.
The connecting cable is used to connect Industrial Ethernet nodes, for example SIMATIC
ET 200, SCALANCE X208PRO and SIMOTION.
Industrial Ethernet
282

Cable type 1)
IE connecting cable M12
For connecting Industrial Ethernet nodes
Cable specification
Cat 5e
with two M12 plugs
1m
with M12 plugs and RJ-45 plugs
10 m
2YY (ST) CY 2x2x0.75/1.5-100 LI GN
Jacket
PVC (6.5 0.2) mm, green

-25 to +75
25 to +75
25 to +75
Resistance to fire
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
no
Silicone-free
yes
1)
Order numbers
IE connecting cable
M12-180/M12-180
preassembled IE FC TP trailing cable GP, with 2 x

M12 plugs (D coded)
0.3 m
6XV1 870-8AE30
0.5 m
6XV1 870-8AE50
1.0 m
6XV1 870-8AH10
1.5 m
6XV1 870-8AH15
2.0 m
6XV1 870-8AH20
3.0 m
6XV1 870-8AH30
5.0 m
6XV1 870-8AH50
10.0 m
6XV1 870-8AN10
15.0 m
6XV1 870-8AN15
Industrial Ethernet
283
IE connecting cable
M12-180/IE FC RJ-45 Plug-145
9.2.5
preassembled IE FC TP trailing cable GP, with 1 x

M12 plugs (D coded) and 1 x IE FC RJ-45 plug
2.0 m
6XV1 871-5TH20
3.0 m
6XV1 871-5TH30
5.0 m
6XV1 871-5TH50
10.0 m
6XV1 871-5TN10
15.0 m
6XV1 871-5TN15
IE Hybrid Cable
Description
The IE hybrid cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 in conjunction with the IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet is the
ideal solution when a device such as SCALANCE W needs to be supplied with its operating
voltage and data at the same time.
The cable contains the following:
2x2 wires according to Cat 5e for data transfer
2x2 wires each with a wire diameter of 0.76 mm for transferring power
The power is transferred via the cable according to the Power over Ethernet standard (PoE).
The hybrid cable is halogen-free for universal application in an industrial and office
environment. The cable is UV-resistant according to UL 1581 Sec. 1200.
The maximum cable length between the IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet and the SCALANCE W
access point is 80 m with an additional 6 m of patch cable for the IE FC RJ-45 modular
outlet. For connection to the SCALANCE W, an IP67 hybrid plug-in connector is
recommended.
Cable cross-section
Industrial Ethernet
284

Cable type 1)
IE hybrid cable 2x2 + 4x0.34
Industrial and office environment; for IE FC RJ-45 modular

outlet and
SCALANCE W access point with IP67 hybrid plug-in
connector
Cable specification
Cat 5e (data wires)

22 AWG (power wires)
with IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet
IP67 hybrid connector
80 m
L-9YH(ST)CH 2X2X0.34/1.5-100 GN VZN FRNC
Jacket

-25 C to +70 C
-25 C to +70 C
-25 C to +70 C
Free of halogens
yes
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant to IEC 60332-3-24 (Category C)
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
yes
Silicone-free
yes
Order numbers
IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34
Flexible cable; 4 x Cu Cat 5e, shielded (22 AWG) and 4 x CU

(0.34 mm per wire ) for IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet with power
insert and hybrid plug-in connector IP67.
6XV1 870-2J
Industrial Ethernet
285
9.2.6
IE TP cord
9.2.6.1
Introduction to TP cord
The TP cords are used inside buildings for distances up to 10 m. TP cord is also known as
patch cable. A maximum of 10 m of TP cord can be used between two devices. With
structured cabling using two TP cords, this length is the maximum for both patch cables
together.
Compared with the IE FC TP cables, the TP cords are thinner and more flexible.
Standardized RJ-45 plugs are used as the connectors.
The TP cords 2x2 are suitable for a transmission rate of 10/100 Mbps.
The TP cords 4x2 are suitable for a transmission rate of 10/100/1000 Mbps.
The 2 wires are twisted into a pair (PIMF). Each pair of wires is shielded by a plastic
laminated aluminum foil with an external contact surface. All the pairs making up the cable
are surrounded by a braided shield of tinplated copper braid with coverage of approximately
88 %. The outer sheath is PVC.
IE TP cord and IE TP XP cord

The TP cords are available as straight-through cables with the name "IE TP Cord" and as
crossover cables with the name "IE TP XP Cord".
To distinguish straight-through and crossover cables, the RJ-45 plugs are color-coded.
not crossed over: RJ-45 plug, green at both ends
crossed over: RJ-45 plug, red at both ends
9.2.6.2
IE TP cord 2x2
Description
The TP cord 2x2 is available as a preassembled cable in the following variants:
IE TP cord RJ-45/RJ-45 and IE TP XP cord RJ-45/RJ-45
with two RJ-45 plugs.
Industrial Ethernet
286

Cable type 1)
IE TP (XP) cord 2x2
Cabling between an end device and a network component
Cable specification
Cat 5e
maximum cable length 2)
10 m
Device with RJ45 connector
10 m
LI 02YSCY 2x2x0.15/0.98 PIMF ICCS GN
Jacket
Environmental conditions
-40 C to +70
-40 C to +70
-40 C to +70
Resistance to fire
Resistance to oil
Halogen-free
no
Silicone-free
yes
1)
2)
With structured cabling using two TP cords, this length is the maximum for both patch cables together
Order numbers
IE TP cord RJ-45/RJ-45
IE TP XP cord RJ-45/RJ-45
Preassembled TP installation cable 2x2 with two

RJ-45 plugs.
0.5 m
6XV1850-2GE50
1m
6XV1850-2GH10
2m
6XV1850-2GH20
6m
6XV1850-2GH60
10 m
6XV1850-2GN10
Preassembled crossover TP installation cable 2x2

with two RJ-45 plugs.
0.5 m
6XV1850-2HE50
1m
6XV1850-2HH10
2m
6XV1850-2HH20
6m
6XV1850-2HH60
10 m
6XV1850-2HN10
Industrial Ethernet
287
9.2.6.3
IE TP cord 4x2
Description
The patch cable is required for gigabit Ethernet networks. The IE TP cord RJ-45/RJ-45 4x2
is available as a preassembled cable with two RJ-45 plugs. With XP, the send and receive
lines are crossed over.

Cable type 1)
IE TP cord RJ-45/RJ-45 4x2
Cabling between an end device and a network

component
Cable specification
Cat 6
maximum cable length 2)
10 m
IE device with D-sub connector
10 m
Device with RJ45 connector
10 m
LI 02YSCH 4x2x0.15 PIMF GN FRNC
Jacket
FRNC (6.2 0.3) mm; green

-25 C to +70
-25 C to +70
-25 C to +70
Resistance to fire
Resistance to oil
Halogen-free
yes
Silicone-free
yes
1)
1)
With structured cabling using two TP cords, this length is the maximum for both patch cables
together
Industrial Ethernet
288
Order numbers
IE TP cord RJ-45/RJ-45
IE TP XP cord RJ-45/RJ-45
Preassembled TP installation cable 4x2 with two

RJ-45 plugs.
0.5 m
6XV1 870-3QE50
1m
6XV1 870-3QH10
2m
6XV1 870-3QH20
6m
6XV1 870-3QH60
10 m
6XV1 870-3QN10
Preassembled, TP crossover installation cable 4x2 with two RJ45 plugs.
0.5 m
6XV1 870-3RH50
1m
6XV1 870-3RH50
2m
6XV1 870-3RH50
6m
6XV1 870-3RH50
10 m
6XV1 870-3RH50
9.2.7
Plugs
9.2.7.1
IE FC RJ-45 plugs 2x2
Description
The IE FC RJ-45 plugs 2x2 are compact and rugged plug-in connectors. The connectors
have a robust metal casing suitable for industry that provides protection from interference for
the data communication. The connectors comply with the standards EN 50173 (RJ-45) and
ISO/ IEC 11801
The IE FC RJ-45 plugs 2x2 are used to install 4-wire IE FC TP cables in the field.
The connector allows point-to-point connections (10/100 Mbps) to be implemented for
Industrial Ethernet between two end devices/network components up to 100 m without patch
cables.
Industrial Ethernet
289
The IE FC RJ-45 plugs 2x2 are available in three versions:

With 180 (straight) cable outlet
Due to its design, the IE FC RJ-45 plug 180 can be used both with devices with single
jacks and with devices with multiple jacks (blocks). The connector is particularly suitable
for connecting IE FC TP cables to SIMATIC NET modules and SCALANCE devices.
With 90 (angled) cable outlet

The connector is particularly suitable for connecting IE FC TP cables to ET200 or PN/PN
links.
Figure 9-5
IE FC RJ-45 PLUG 902X2
With 145 (angled) cable outlet

The connector is intended for connecting IE FC TP cables to SIMOTION and SINAMICS
modules.
Industrial Ethernet
290

Connection type
IE FC RJ-45 plug 180 (2x2)
Cabling specification
Cat5
Cat5
Cat5
Standards, approvals
RoHS conformity
yes
yes
yes
UL approval
yes
yes
yes
10 / 100 Mbps
10 / 100 Mbps
10 / 100 Mbps
Number of electrical
connectors for IE FC TP
cables
version IE FC TP
Integrated insulation-piercing Integrated insulation-piercing Integrated insulation-piercing

contacts for 4-wire IE FC TP contacts for 4-wire IE FC TP contacts for 4-wire IE FC TP
cables
cables
cables
Transmission speed
Industrial Ethernet
Interfaces
Version for network

RJ-45 plug
components or end devices
RJ-45 plug
RJ-45 plug
Design
Cable outlet
180
90
145
Housing material
Metal
Metal
Metal
-20 C to +70 C
-20 C to +70 C
-20 C to +70 C
temperature
-40 C to +80 C
-40 C to +80 C
-40 C to +80 C
IP20
IP20
IP20
yes
yes
yes
Product property
Silicone-free
Industrial Ethernet
291
Order numbers
IE FC RJ-45 plug 180
IE FC RJ-45 plug 90
RJ-45 cable connector for Industrial Ethernet with

rugged metal casing and integrated insulation piercing
contacts for connection of the 4-wire IE FC TP cables.
With 180 cable outlet.
1 pack of 1
6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0
1 pack of 10
6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0
1 pack of 50
6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0

1 pack of 1
6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA0
1 pack of 10
6GK1 901-1BB20-2AB0
1 pack of 50
6GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0

1 pack of 1
9.2.7.2
6GK1 901-1BB30-0AA0
1 pack of 10
6GK1 901-1BB30-0AB0
1 pack of 50
6GK1 901-1BB30-0AE0
IE FC RJ-45 plug 4x2
Description
The IE FC RJ-45 plugs 4x2 have a robust metal casing suitable for industry that provides
protection from interference for the data communication. The connectors comply with the
standards EN 50173 (RJ-45) and ISO/ IEC 11801
The IE FC RJ-45 plugs 4x2 are used to install 8-wire IE FC TP cables in the field.
The connector allows point-to-point connections (10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps) to be implemented
for Industrial Ethernet between two end devices/network components up to 90 m without
patch cables.
Industrial Ethernet
292

Connection type
Cat6
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
yes
Transmission speed
Industrial Ethernet
10/100/1000 Mbps
Interfaces
Number of electrical connectors for IE
FC TP cables
version IE FC TP
Integrated insulation-piercing contacts for

8-wire IE FC TP cables
Version for network components or end

devices
RJ-45 plug
Design
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Metal

-25 C to +70 C
Transport/storage temperature
-40 C to +70 C
IP20
Product property
Silicone-free
yes
Order numbers
RJ-45 plug for Industrial Ethernet with rugged metal

casing and integrated insulation piercing contacts for
connection of the 8-wire IE FC TP cables.
1 pack of 1
6GK1 901-1BB11-2AA0
1 pack of 10
6GK1 901-1BB11-2AB0
1 pack of 50
6GK1 901-1BB11-2AE0
Industrial Ethernet
293
9.2.7.3
IE FC RJ-45 plug PRO (push-pull)
Description
The connector with the push-pull device connection can be used in conjunction with end
devices and network components with degree of protection IP65/67 in plants without
cabinets.
The IE FC RJ-45 plug PRO is used to install 4-wire IE FC TP cable in the field.
Figure 9-6
IE FC RJ-45 plug PRO
The push-pull mechanism allows simple plugging and pulling of the plug-in connector IE FC
RJ-45 plug PRO to SCALANCE X-200IRT PRO, ET 200pro and SIMATIC RF systems. The
mechanism also increases the bending and tensile strength of the plug-in connector and
protects the RJ-45 jack of the device from mechanical strain in an industrial environment.
In contrast to the plug-in connector IE FC RJ-45 plug PRO (push-pull), assembly of the
electrical connector with the IE RJ-45 plug PRO is not FastConnect.
Figure 9-7
IE RJ-45 plug PRO
Industrial Ethernet
294

Connection type
IE RJ-45 plug PRO (push pull)
IE FC RJ-45 plug PRO (push-pull)
Cat 5e
Cat 5e
RoHS conformity
yes
yes
UL approval
no
no
10 / 100 Mbps
10 / 100 Mbps
Number of electrical connectors for IE

FC TP cables
version IE FC TP
Integrated insulation-piercing contacts

for 4-wire IE FC TP cables
Integrated insulation-piercing contacts

for 4-wire IE FC TP cables

devices
RJ-45 plug (push-pull device connector)
RJ-45 plug (push-pull device

connector)
Cable outlet
180
180
Housing material
Plastic
Plastic
-40 C to +70 C
-40 C to +70 C
-40 C to +70 C
-40 C to +70 C
Chemical resistance to water
resistant
resistant
IP65/67
IP65/67
yes
yes
Transmission speed
Industrial Ethernet
Interfaces
Design
Product property
Silicone-free
Order numbers
IE RJ-45 plug PRO
(push pull)
RJ-45 cable connector with push-pull device connection

with rugged plastic casing and integrated insulation
piercing contacts for connection of Industrial Ethernet
installation cables. With 180 cable outlet for
SCALANCE X-200IRT PRO switches, ET 200pro and
SIMATIC RF systems with an Industrial Ethernet
interface
1 pack of 1
IE FC RJ-45 plug PRO

(push pull)
6GK1 901-1BB10-6AA0
RJ-45 cable connector with push-pull device connection

with rugged plastic casing and integrated insulation
piercing contacts for connection of the IE FC TP cables.
1 pack of 1
6GK1 901-1BB20-6AA0
Industrial Ethernet
295
9.2.7.4
IP 67 hybrid cable connector
General
The IP67 hybrid plug-in connector is used to connect SCALANCE W700 to Industrial
Ethernet. In conjunction with the IE hybrid cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 and the IE FC RJ-45 modular
outlet with power insert, the supply voltage can also be transferred to the target device along
with the data. Connection of a voltage is possible with Power over Ethernet (PoE). The IP67
hybrid plug-in connector ships with the SCALANCE W700.

Connection type
Cat 5
Transmission speed
Industrial Ethernet
10 / 100 Mbps
Interfaces
Number of electrical connectors for hybrid
cables
version IE FC TP
integrated insulation-piercing contacts for 4-wire TP FC installation cables
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Plastic

Ambient temperature
-40 to + 70
IP67
Order numbers
Plug-in connector for connecting SCALANCE W700 to

Industrial Ethernet and Power over Ethernet (PoE), with
assembly instructions.
Can be ordered directly from:
HARTING Deutschland GmbH & Co KG
Postfach 24-51
D-32381 Minden, Germany
Tel. +49 571-8896-0
Fax. +49 571-8896-354
E-mail: de.sales@HARTING.com
Internet: http://www.HARTING.com
1 pack of 1
09 45 125 1300.00
Industrial Ethernet
296
9.2.7.5
IE FC M12 plug PRO 2x2
Description
The plug-in connector IE FC M12 plug PRO 2x2 can be used in conjunction with end devices
and network components with degree of protection IP65/67 in systems without cabinets.
The connector is a 4-pin M12 plug with which you can connect industrial Ethernet devices
with M12 Fast Ethernet sockets via a 4-wire IE FC TP cable to a Fast Ethernet network, for
example SCALANCE X208 PRO, IM 154-4 PN and SIMATIC RF systems.
With IE FC cable 2x2 and IE M12 plug PRO 2x2, an overall cable length of up to 100 m is
permitted between two devices depending on the cable type.
Figure 9-8
IE FC M12 plug PRO

Connection type
Cat5
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
yes
Transmission speed
Industrial Ethernet
10 / 100 Mbps
Interfaces
Number of electrical connectors for IE FC TP cables
Integrated insulation-piercing contacts for 4-wire IE FC TP

cables
Version for network components or end devices
M12 plug (D-coded)
Design
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Metal

- 40 to + 85
- 40 to + 85
IP 65/67
Product property
Silicone-free
yes
Industrial Ethernet
297
Order numbers
9.2.7.6
M12 plug-in connector 4-pin, D-coded, for fitting to 4wire IE FC TP cables with rugged metal casing and
FastConnect technology; 180 cable outlet.
1 pack of 1
6GK1 901-0DB20-6AA0
1 pack of 8
6GK1 901-0DB20-6AA8
IE FC M12 Plug PRO 4x2
Description
The IE M12 plug PRO is a 4-pin, D-coded M12 plug with degree of protection IP67. The plug
is particularly suitable for use with devices with the relevant degree of protection such as the
SCALANCE X208PRO. The plug can be fitted to cables with an outer diameter of 6 mm to 8
mm. The plug is suitable for assembling IE FC cables with transmission rates of up to 100
Mbps. This allows the IE FastConnect stripping tool to be used. By using the insulation
piercing technique, assembly is simple and fast and requires no additional special tools.
With IE FC cable 2 x 2 and IE M12 plug PRO, an overall cable length of up to 100 m is
permitted between two devices depending on the cable type.
Figure 9-9
IE FC M12 plug PRO 4 x 2
Industrial Ethernet
298

Connection type
Cat6
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
no
Transmission speed
Industrial Ethernet
10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps
Interfaces
Number of electrical connectors for IE FC TP
cables
Integrated insulation-piercing contacts for 8-wire

IE FC TP cables
M12 plug (X-coded)
Design
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Metal

- 40 to + 85
- 40 to + 85
IP 65/67
Product property
Silicone-free
yes
Order numbers
M12 plug-in connector 8-pin, X-coded, for fitting to 8-wire

cables with rugged metal casing and FastConnect
technology; 180 cable outlet
1 pack of 1
6GK1901-0DB30-6AA0
1 pack of 8
6GK1901-0DB30-6AA8
Industrial Ethernet
299
9.2.8
Outlets
9.2.8.1
IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet
Description
The rugged metal casing allows the IE FC modular outlet to be connected to a DIN rail.
Direct mounting on a wall is also possible.
Figure 9-10
IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet - base module
There is an industrial Ethernet FC RJ-45 modular outlet base module with three
exchangeable inserts:
Insert 2 FE: Base module with insert for two Fast Ethernet connections for connection of
two 10/100 Mbps end devices/network components
Figure 9-11
Modular outlet, 2 x LAN
Insert 1 GE: Base module with insert for a gigabit Ethernet connection for connection of a
10/100/1000 Mbps end device/network component
Figure 9-12
Modular outlet insert 1GE
Outlet power insert: Base module with insert for connecting a power supply and a 10/100
Mbps end device/network component.
Figure 9-13
Modular outlet, power insert
Industrial Ethernet
300
By changing the insert, a 100 Mbps double connection can be upgraded to a gigabit
connection. This is only possible if the wiring was done with the IE FC standard cable GP
4x2. In this case, only the insert 2FE needs to be replaced with an insert of the type 1GE.
To supply distributed nodes with power and data, the IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet with the
power insert is connected to the IE hybrid cable 2x2 + 4x0.34. A maximum distance of 80 m
can be bridged between the outlet and the IP67 hybrid plug-in connector. The connection
between the outlet and end device can be established with a patch cable with the maximum
length of 6 m.

Connection type
IE FC RJ-45 modular
outlet insert 2FE
IE FC RJ-45 modular
outlet insert 1GE
IE FC RJ-45 modular
outlet power insert
Cat 5e
Cat 6
Cat 5e
RoHS conformity
yes
yes
yes
UL approval
yes
yes
yes
10 / 100 Mbps
10 / 100 /1000 Mbps/
10 / 100 Mbps
Number of electrical connectors

for IE FC TP cables
version IE FC TP
integrated insulation-piercing
contacts
for 8-wire TP FC installation
cables
integrated insulationpiercing contacts

for 8-wire TP FC
installation cables
integrated insulationpiercing contacts

for 8-wire TP FC
installation cables
Version for network components

or end devices
RJ-45 plug
RJ-45 plug
RJ-45 plug
24 VDC terminal
(2-pin)
Cable outlet
180
180
180
Housing material
Metal
Metal
Metal
20 C to +70 C
20 C to +70 C
20 C to +70 C
temperature
-40 C to +80 C
-40 C to +80 C
-40 C to +80 C
IP40
IP40
IP40
Transmission speed
Industrial Ethernet
Interfaces
Design
Industrial Ethernet
301
Order numbers
(base module)
IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet base module for industrial

Ethernet with an interface for an exchangeable insert
1 pack of 1

insert 2FE
6GK1901-1BE00-0AA0
IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet base module with insert; 2 x

RJ-45 for 2 x 100 Mbps interface
1 pack of 1

insert 1GE
6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA1

1 pack of 1

power insert
6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA2

RJ-45 for 1 x 100 Mbps interface and 1 x 24 VDC
1 pack of 1
Insert 2 FE
6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA3
Insert for IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet base module; 2 x

1 pack of 4
Insert 1 GE
6GK1901-1BK00-0AA1
Insert for IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet base module; 2 x

1 pack of 4
9.2.8.2
6GK1901-1BK00-0AA2
IE FC outlet RJ-45
Description
The IE FC outlet RJ-45 is used for the transition from the rugged IE FC cables used in an
industrial environment to the preassembled TP cord cables with an RJ-45 jack.
The IE FC outlet RJ-45 has a rugged metal casing and corresponds to category 5 of the
international cabling standards ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173. The IE FC outlet RJ-45 is
suitable both for installation on a DIN rail and for wall mounting.
The IE FC outlet RJ-45 can also be mounted behind a metal plate with a cutout, for example
a switching cubicle.
By arranging several IE FC outlet RJ-45 devices one after the other, it is possible to set up a
patch panel with any connector density.
Figure 9-14
Industrial Ethernet FC outlet RJ-45 (opened)
Industrial Ethernet
302

Connection type
IE FC outlet RJ-45
Cat 5
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
yes
Transmission speed
Industrial Ethernet
10 / 100 Mbps
Interfaces
Number of electrical connectors for
IE FC TP cables
version IE FC TP
integrated insulation-piercing contacts for 4-wire FC TP

installation cables
Version for network components or

end devices
RJ-45 plug
Design
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Metal

-25 C to +70 C
-40 C to +70 C
IP20
Order numbers
IE FC outlet RJ-45
IE FC outlet RJ 45 for connection of Industrial Ethernet

FC TP-cables and TP cords
1 pack of 1
6GK1 901-1FC00-0AA0
Industrial Ethernet
303
9.3
Optical networks
9.3.1
Optical transmission technology
Fiber-optic cables (FO cables)

On fiber-optic cables (FO) data is transmitted by modulating electromagnetic waves in the
range of visible and invisible light.
The materials used are highquality plastic and glass fibers
Only the fiber-optic cables intended for SIMATIC NET for Industrial Ethernet are described
below. The various FO cable types allow solutions for connecting the components with each
other adapted to the operating and environmental conditions.
The following fiber-optic cables are available for industrial Ethernet:
Glass FO cables
PCF FO cables (Polymer Cladded Fiber)
POF FO cables (Polymer Optical Fiber)
Compared with electrical cables, fiber-optic cables have the following advantages:
Advantages
Electrical isolation of nodes and segments
No grounding problems,
No shield currents,
Transmission path immune to external electromagnetic noise,
No lightning protection required,
No noise emission along the transmission path,
Light weight,
Depending on the fiber type, cables several kilometers long can be used even at higher
transmission rates.
The transmission rate does not affect the maximum permitted cable length
The meter markers printed on the cable make it easier to identify the length. (Serve as
orientation; accuracy 5 %.)
Point-to-point link
Fiber-optic technology only allows the implementation of point-to-point links; in other words,
one transmitter is connected to only one receiver. The transmission path between two nodes
requires two fibers (one for each transmission direction). With the optical components for
Industrial Ethernet, bus, star and ring structures can be implemented.
Industrial Ethernet
304
9.3.2
Optical cables
The following fiber-optic cables (FO cable) are available for different topologies,
requirements or areas of application.
Cable
Cable type
Fast Connect FO cable

FO standard cable GP
(50/125)
FO ground cable (50/125)
Characteristics
Area of application
Glass fiber, sold by the

meter
or pre-assembled with
4 BFOC or SC
connectors
Laying in indoor and outdoor areas

Rugged standard cable for universal
applications
Longitudinally and laterally watertight
cable for use outdoors; with nonmetallic rodent protection;
underground installation possible
FO trailing cable GP (50/125)

FO trailing cable (50/125)
Cable for use in drag chains
SIENOPYR duplex fiberoptic

marine cable (62.5/125)
halogen-free, can be walked on, flame

retardant and shipbuilding approved
cable for installation on ships and
offshore facilities
Plastic FO cables
POF Standard Cable GP
980/1000
POF Trailing Cable 980/1000
Plastic fiber-optic cable,

sold by the meter
or preassembled (PCF
FO cable) with 4 SC RJ
plugs
Laying in indoor and outdoor areas

POF standard FO cable for permanent
installation indoors up to 50 m with
PVC jacket
POF fiber-optic trailing cable for
moving applications (e.g. drag chain)
up to 50 m with rugged PUR jacket
PCF standard cable GP

200/230
PCF standard FO cable for permanent

installation indoors and outdoors up to
100 m with rugged PVC jacket
PCF trailing cable 200/230
PCF fiber-optic trailing cable high

mechanical strain indoors and
outdoors up to 100 m with rugged
PUR jacket
PCF trailing cable GP 200/230
PCF fiber-optic trailing cable for low

mechanical strain indoors and
outdoors up to 100 m with PVC jacket
Industrial Ethernet
305
9.3.3
Glass FO cables
9.3.3.1
FOC links
Standard Fast Ethernet

The switches equipped with interfaces for 100BASE-FX comply with the standard
IEEE 802.3u. They operate at a wavelength of 1300 nm.
Multimode glass fibers of the type 50/125 m are suitable for the connection.
Switches or media modules equipped with an optical interface for single mode glass fibers of
the type 10/125 m have the supplement LD in their names (Long Distance).
The length of an insertable FOC link is decided by:
The fiber type multimode/ single mode
The FO cable attenuation at the wavelength used
The bandwidth distance product of the fiber-optic cable
Requirements of multimode glass fiber-optic cables

Table 9- 2
Max. length of a link with multimode FO cables between two switches:
Fiber-optic cable type

50/125 m
FO power loss
Max. length
at 1300 nm
Bandwidth distance
product
<= 0.7 dB/km
>= 1200 MHz * km
3,000 m
Requirements of single mode glass fiber-optic cables

Single mode glass fiber-optic cables between two switches with suitable interfaces must
meet the following requirements in terms of power loss and the bandwidth distance product:
Table 9- 3
Max. length of a link with single mode FO cables between two suitable equipped
switches:

10/125 m
FO power loss
Max. length
at 1300 nm
Bandwidth distance
product
<=0.5 dB/km
No info
26,000 m
Industrial Ethernet
306
SIMATIC NET multimode glass fiber-optic cables

The SIMATIC NET product range for Industrial Ethernet includes various types of multimode
glass fiberoptic cables with 50/125 m fibers (see "Passive components for optical
networks").
FO Standard Cable
FO Ground Cable
FO Trailing Cable
FO Trailing Cable GP
SIENOPYR duplex marine fiberoptic cable
When connecting SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet switches using SIMATIC NET multimode
glass fiberoptic cables, distances of 0 to 3000 m are permitted between two adjacent
components.
Note
Single mode glass fiberoptic cables with fiber type 10/125 are available in customized
lengths. You will find contacts in the "Support and training" section of this manual.
Standard 1 Gbps Ethernet

In Gbps Ethernet, a distinction is made in much the same way as in Fast Ethernet between
two versions both of which are described in the IEEE 802.3z standard.
1000BASE-SX is the name of the version for multimode glass fiber. A wavelength of 850 nm
is used. Due to their properties, the same 50/125 m fiber from the SIMATIC NET product
range can be used as for 100BASE-FX. The range between two points is 750 m. As long as
this range is not exceeded, it is possible to upgrade from 100 Mbps Ethernet to 1
Gbps Ethernet over existing installed cable of this type without needing to install new cables.
The version for single mode glass fibers is 1000BASE-LX. A wavelength of 1300 nm is used
here. A single mode glass fiber-optic cable 10/125 m may be up to 10,000 m long.
In terms of the FO link length that can be included, the dependencies are basically the same
as for 100 Mbps Ethernet.
Table 9- 4
Maximum link length with multimode glass fiber-optic cables with 1 Gbps Ethernet:
FO power loss
Bandwidth distance
product
Max. length
50/125 m
Multimode
2.7 dB/km at 850 nm
600 MHz * km
750 m
9/125 m
Single mode
0.5 dB/km at 1310 nm
10,000 m
0.28 dB/km at 1550 nm
Industrial Ethernet
307
9.3.3.2
SM FO robust cable GP (4E9/125)
Description
The 4-fiber single mode (SM) FO robust cable can be used to bridge distances of more than
3 km.
The SM FO robust cable GP can be used to set up optical networks with devices that have
an LC (Lucent Connector) interface, for example SCALANCE X devices.
To connect to the LC interface, the SM FO robust cable GP is cemented to the SM FO LC
duplex plug.

Cable type
SM FO robust cable GP (4E9/125)
Cable for use indoors and outdoors and for direct installation
underground
Version of the preassembled

FO cable
BFOC plug
SC plug
LC duplex plug
AT-V(ZN)H(ZN)BH 2G50/125
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
yes
Mechanical data
Number of fibers
Fiber material
Single mode fiber 9/125 m, OS2
Maximum tensile load
1000 N
Optical data
Attenuation
805 nm
1300 nm
0.5 dB/km
1550 nm
0.5 dB/km

-40 C to +70 C
-40 C to +70 C
-20 to +60 C
Resistance to fire
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
yes
Silicone-free
yes
Rodent protection
yes
Cable length
100BaseFX
26 000 m
1000BaseLX
2000 m
Industrial Ethernet
308
Order numbers
SM FO robust cable GP
(4E9/125)1)
1)
Cable for outdoors; rodent protection, splittable, without

connectors, sold by the meter
6XV1 843-2R
Special tools and trained personnel are required to assemble glass fiber-optic cables.
9.3.3.3
MM FO robust cable GP (2G50/125)
Description
The 2-fiber multimode (MM) FO robust cable can be used to bridge distances up to 3 km.
The MM FO robust cable GP can be used to set up optical networks with devices that have
an LC (Lucent Connector) interface, for example SCALANCE X devices.
To connect to the LC interface, the MM FO robust cable GP is cemented to the MM FO LC
duplex plug.

Cable type
Universal cable for use indoors and outdoors and for direct
installation underground

FO cable
BFOC plug
SC plug
LC duplex plug
AT-V(ZN)H(ZN)BH 2G50/125
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
yes
Mechanical data
Number of fibers
Fiber material
Multimode graded-index fiber 50/125/245 m, OM 2
1000 N
Optical data
Attenuation
Bandwidth length
product
805 nm
2.7 dB/km
1300 nm
1 dB/km
805 nm
600 GHz *m
1300 nm
1200 GHz *m
Industrial Ethernet
309
Cable type

-40 C to +85 C
-40 C to +85 C
-5 C to +50 C
Resistance to fire
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
yes
Silicone-free
yes
Rodent protection
yes
Cable length
100BaseFX
5000 m
1000BaseSX
750 m
1000BaseLX
2000 m
Order numbers
MM FO robust cable GP
(2G50/125)1)
1)
Cable for indoors and outdoors; rodent protection, splittable,

without connectors, sold by the meter
6XV1 873-2R
9.3.3.4
FO Standard Cable GP 50/125 m
Description
The FO standard cable contains 2 multimode graded fibers of type 50/125 m. The FO
standard cable GP is the universal cable for use indoors and outdoors. The standard cable is
suitable for connecting optical interfaces operating in the wavelength range around 850 nm
and 1300 nm.
The FO standard cable GP is available in fixed lengths, preassembled with four BFOC plugs
or 4 SC plugs.

Cable type
FO standard cable GP 50/125
Universal cable for use indoors and outdoors
AT-W(ZN)YY 2x1G50/125

FO cable
BFOC plug
SC plug
Industrial Ethernet
310
Cable type
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
yes
Mechanical data
Number of fibers
Fiber material
Multimode graded-index fiber 50/125 m, OM2
500 N
Optical data
Attenuation
Bandwidth length
product
805 nm
2.7 dB/km
1300 nm
0.7 dB/km
805 nm
600 GHz *m
1300 nm
1200 GHz *m

-25 C to +80 C
-25 C to +80 C
-5 C to +50 C
Resistance to fire
Flame-retardant to IEC 60332 -1-2 and IEC 60332 -3-22 (Cat

A)
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Silicone-free
yes
Halogen-free
no
Rodent protection
no
Cable length
100BaseFX
5000 m
1000BaseSX
750 m
1000BaseLX
2000 m
Order numbers
FO standard cable GP 50/125 1)
Outdoor cable with rodent protection, splittable, without

Preassembled FO cable with 2x2 BFOC connectors.
1)
6XV1 8732A
100 m
6XV1 873-3AT10
200 m
6XV1 873-3AT20
300 m
6XV1 873-3AT30
Preassembled FO cable with 2x2 SC plugs.

100 m
6XV1 873-6AT10
200 m
6XV1 873-6AT20
300 m
6XV1 873-6AT30
Special tools and trained personnel are required to assemble glass fiber-optic cables
Industrial Ethernet
311
9.3.3.5
FO Ground Cable 50/125 m
Description
The FO ground cable contains 2 multimode graded fibers of type 50/125 m. The FO ground
cable is a standard cable for laying directly in the ground, in pipes, cable channels or on
cable racks, also suitable for cable ladders.
The FO ground cable is available in fixed lengths, preassembled with four BFOC plugs or 4
SC plugs.

Cable type
FO ground cable 50/125
Outdoors and for direct installation underground

FO cable
BFOC plug
SC plug
AT-WQ(ZN)Y(ZN)B2Y 2G 50/125
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
no
Mechanical data
Number of fibers
Fiber material
800 N
Optical data
Attenuation
Bandwidth length
product
805 nm
2.7 dB/km
1300 nm
0.7 dB/km
805 nm
600 GHz *m
1300 nm
1200 GHz *m

-40 C to +75 C
temperature
-40 C to +75 C
-5 C to +50 C
Resistance to fire
Flammable
Resistance to oil
resistant
UV resistance
resistant
Silicone-free
yes
Halogen-free
no
Rodent protection
yes
Cable length
100BaseFX
5000 m
1000BaseSX
750 m
1000BaseLX
2000 m
Industrial Ethernet
312
Order numbers
FO ground cable 50/125 1)
Standard cable; UL approval; splittable, without connectors,

sold by the meter
Preassembled FO cable with 2x2 BFOC connectors.
6XV1 8732G
0.5 m
6XV1 873-3AH05
1m
6XV1 873-3AH10
2m
6XV1 873-3AH20
3m
6XV1 873-3AH30
5m
6XV1 873-3AH50
10 m
6XV1 873-3AN10
15 m
6XV1 873-3AN15
20 m
6XV1 873-3AN20
30 m
6XV1 873-3AN30
40 m
6XV1 873-3AN40
50 m
6XV1 873-3AN50
80 m
6XV1 873-3AN80
100 m
6XV1 873-3AT10
150 m
6XV1 873-3AT15
200 m
6XV1 873-3AT20
300 m
6XV1 873-3AT30
Preassembled FO cable with 2x2 SC plugs
0.5 m
6XV1 873-6AH05
1m
6XV1 873-6AH10
2m
6XV1 873-6AH20
3m
6XV1 873-6AH30
5m
6XV1 873-6AH50
10 m
6XV1 873-6AN10
15 m
6XV1 873-6AN15
20 m
6XV1 873-6AN20
30 m
6XV1 873-6AN30
40 m
6XV1 873-6AN40
50 m
6XV1 873-6AN50
80 m
6XV1 873-6AN80
100 m
6XV1 873-6AT10
150 m
6XV1 873-6AT15
Industrial Ethernet
313
1)
200 m
6XV1 873-6AT20
300 m
6XV1 873-6AT30
9.3.3.6
FO trailing cable 50/125 m
Description
The FO trailing cable contains 2 multimode graded fibers of type 50/125 m.
The FO trailing cable is available in the following variants:
FO trailing cable (standard)
Cable for high mechanical strain, PUR outer jacket, without UL approval.
FO trailing cable GP (general purpose)
Cable for low mechanical strain, PVC outer jacket, with UL approval
The FO trailing cable is available in fixed lengths, preassembled with four BFOC plugs or 4
SC plugs.

Cable type
FO trailing cable 50/125
FO trailing cable GP 50/125
Use in drag chains
Use in drag chains

FO cable
BFOC plug
BFOC plug
SC plug
SC plug
AT-W(ZN)Y(ZN)11Y 2G50/125
50/125 2G AT-W(ZN)Y(ZN)Y
RoHS conformity
yes
yes
UL approval
no
yes
Number of fibers
Fiber material
Multimode graded-index fiber

50/125 m, OM2
Multimode graded-index fiber

50/125 m, OM2
Mechanical data
Number of bending cycles
5 000 000
3 500 000
800 N
800 N
805 nm
2.7 dB/km
2.7 dB/km
1300 nm
0.7 dB/km
0.7 dB/km
805 nm
600 GHz *m
600 GHz *m
1300 nm
1200 GHz *m
1200 GHz *m
Optical data
Attenuation
Bandwidth length product
Industrial Ethernet
314
Cable type
-40 C to +80 C
-25 C to +80 C
-40 C to +80 C
-25 C to +80 C
-5 C to +50 C
-5 C to +50 C
Resistance to fire
Flammable
Flame-retardant to IEC 60332 -1-2 and

IEC 60332 -3-22 (Cat A)
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
resistant
Halogen-free
no
no
Silicone-free
yes
yes
Rodent protection
no
no
5000 m
5000 m
Cable length
100BaseFX
1000BaseSX
750 m
750 m
1000BaseLX
2000 m
2000 m
Order numbers
FO trailing cable 50/1251)
Trailing cable, splittable, without connectors, sold by the meter
Preassembled FO cable with 2x2 BFOC connectors
FO trailing cable GP 50/1251)
6XV1 873-2C
3m
6XV1 873-3CH30
5m
6XV1 873-3CH50
10 m
6XV1 873-3CN10
20 m
6XV1 873-3CN20
50 m
6XV1 873-3CN50
100 m
6XV1 873-3CT10
3m
6XV1 873-6CH30
5m
6XV1 873-6CH50
10 m
6XV1 873-6CN10
20 m
6XV1 873-6CN20
50 m
6XV1 873-6CN50
100 m
6XV1 873-6CT10
Trailing cable, UL approval, splittable, without connectors, sold

6XV18732D
by the meter, minimum length available 20 m, maximum 1000 m
Industrial Ethernet
315
1)
3m
6XV1 873-3DH30
5m
6XV1 873-3DH50
10 m
6XV1 873-3DN10
20 m
6XV1 873-3DN20
50 m
6XV1 873-3DN50
100 m
6XV1 873-3DT10
3m
6XV1 873-6DH30
5m
6XV1 873-6DH50
10 m
6XV1 873-6DN10
20 m
6XV1 873-6DN20
50 m
6XV1 873-6DN50
100 m
6XV1 873-6DT10
9.3.3.7
FO FRNC Cable 50/125
Description
The FO FRNC Cable with two 50/125 m fibers is halogen-free and flame retardant and is
suitable for fixed installation in buildings. With this cable design, little smoke that is free of
halogens is produced in the case of fire therefore reducing secondary damage significantly.
The cable is splittable and therefore suitable for direct fitting of connectors.
Industrial Ethernet
316

Cable type
Halogen-free cable for fixed installation indoors and outdoors

FO cable
BFOC plug
SC plug
AT-W(ZN)HH 2G50/125 UV
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
yes
Mechanical data
Number of fibers
Fiber material
500 N
Optical data
Attenuation
805 nm
2.7 dB/km
1300 nm
0.7 dB/km
Bandwidth length
product
805 nm
600 GHz *m
1300 nm
1200 GHz *m

-40 C to +70 C
temperature
-40 C to +70 C
-5 C to +50 C
Resistance to fire
Flame-retardant to IEC 60332 -1-2 and IEC 60332 -3-22 (Cat A)
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
no
Silicone-free
yes
Rodent protection
yes
Cable length
100BaseFX
5000 m
1000BaseSX
750 m
1000BaseLX
2000 m
Order numbers
Halogen-free cable, splittable, for fixed installation,

6XV1 873-2B
Industrial Ethernet
317
9.3.3.8
FC FO glass fiber-optic cable 62.5/200/230 m
Description
Thanks to the fiber construction (62.5/200/230), it is possible to work with the FastConnect
FO fibers like traditional PCF fibers (Polymer Cladded Fiber). This means that users have
the advantages of glass FO cables (longer distances, resistant to temperature) and the
advantages of PCF cables when fitting connectors.
With the FastConnect cables, glass FO runs of up to 3 km (100 Mbps Industrial Ethernet,
PROFIBUS) can be set up and the cable assembled on site. A complete link, can be made
up of up to 3 subsegments (2 splices) (average coupling loss of a splice approx. 2.5 dB). The
combination of already installed, traditional 62.5/125 m multimode glass FO runs with the
new FastConnect FO cables is also possible.
The user can now assemble glass FO cable runs of the correct length for each specific
application easily and on site. Repairing installed FastConnect FO links is therefore simple
and can be performed without special service personnel (this does not apply to already
installed cables - it applies only when FastConnect FO cables and connectors were used).
The following cable types are available:
FO FC standard cable GP 62.5/200/230
FO FC trailing cable 62.5/200/230.

Cable type
Cable for use indoors and outdoors

FO cable
AT-V(ZN)YY 2X1 G 62.5/125
BFOC plug
Flexible cable for installation in drag

chains indoors and outdoors
BFOC plug
AT-W11Y(ZN)11Y 2 G 62.5/125
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
no
Mechanical data
Number of fibers
Fiber material
Multimode graded-index fiber 62.5/125

m, OM 2
Multimode graded-index fiber 62.5/125

m, OM 2
1500 N
1000 N
Bending cycles
--
100,000
805 nm
3.1 dB/km
3.1 dB/km
1300 nm
0.8 dB/km
0.8 dB/km
Optical data
Attenuation
Bandwidth length
product
805 nm
200 GHz *m
200 GHz *m
1300 nm
600 GHz *m
600 GHz *m
Industrial Ethernet
318
Cable type

-20 C to +60 C
-25 C to +60 C
temperature
-25 C to +70 C
-25 C to +70 C
-5 C to +50 C
-30 C to +60 C
Resistance to fire
Flame-retardant acc. to IEC 60332 -1-2

and IEC 60332 -3-22 (Cat. A)
acc. to IEC 60332-1, flammable
Resistance to oil
not resistant
UV resistance
resistant
resistant
Halogen-free
no
yes
Silicone-free
no
yes
Rodent protection
yes
no
100BaseFX
4000 m
4000 m
1000BaseSX
350 m
350 m
1000BaseLX
500 m
500 m
maximum
cable length
Industrial Ethernet
319
Order numbers
Fiber-optic standard cable 1)
Standard cable; can be walked on; splittable; without

connectors, sold by the meter,
6XV1 820-5AH10
1m
6XV1 820-5BH10
2m
6XV1 820-5BH20
3m
6XV1 820-5BH30
4m
6XV1 820-5BH40
5m
6XV1 820-5BH50
10 m
6XV1 820-5BN10
15 m
6XV1 820-5BN15
20 m
6XV1 820-5BN20
30 m
6XV1 820-5BN30
40 m
6XV1 820-5BN40
50 m
6XV1 820-5BN50
55 m
6XV1 820-5BN55
60 m
6XV1 820-5BN60
65 m
6XV1 820-5BN65
70 m
6XV1 820-5BN70
75 m
6XV1 820-5BN75
80 m
6XV1 820-5BN80
100 m
6XV1 820-5BT10
120 m
6XV1 820-5BT12
130 m
6XV1 820-5BT13
150 m
6XV1 820-5BT15
200 m
6XV1 820-5BT20
250 m
6XV1 820-5BT25
300 m
6XV1 820-5BT30
Industrial Ethernet
320
Flexible fiber-optic trailing cable 1)
Multimode cable; flame retardant, splittable, without connectors, 6XV1 820-6AH10

sold by the meter
preassembled with 2x2 BFOC connectors
1)
1m
6XV1 820-6BH10
2m
6XV1 820-6BH20
3m
6XV1 820-6BH30
5m
6XV1 820-6BH50
10 m
6XV1 820-6BN10
15 m
6XV1 820-6BN15
20 m
6XV1 820-6BN20
25 m
6XV1 820-6BN25
50 m
6XV1 820-6BN50
9.3.3.9
INDOOR FO indoor cable 62.5/125 m
Description
The INDOOR fiberoptic cable is intended for use indoors in areas protected from the
weather, for example in factories and in building automation.
The indoor cable is suitable for connecting optical interfaces operating in the wavelength
range around 850 nm and 1300 nm.
Can be supplied in fixed lengths, preassembled with four BFOC connectors.

Cable type
Non-crush, halogen-free and extremely flame-retardant cable

for use indoors

FO cable
I-V(ZN)HH 2x1 G 62.5/125
BFOC plug
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
no
Mechanical data
Number of fibers
Fiber material
Multimode graded-index fiber 62.5/125 m, OM 2
1000 N
Industrial Ethernet
321
Cable type
Optical data
Attenuation
Bandwidth length
product
805 nm
3.1 dB/km
1300 nm
0.8 dB/km
805 nm
200 GHz *m
1300 nm
600 GHz *m

-40 C to +70 C
-40 C to +70 C
-5 C to +50 C
Resistance to fire
Flame-retardant acc. to IEC 60332-1-2 , IEC 60332-3-22 (Cat.

A)
and DIN VDE 0472 Part 804, test type B
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
yes
Silicone-free
yes
Rodent protection
Cable length
no
100BaseFX
4000 m
1000BaseSX
350 m
1000BaseLX
550 m
Order numbers
INDOOR fiber-optic indoor cable1)
Cable for indoors; flame retardant, splittable, without

1)
6XV1 820-7AH10
0.5 m
6XV1 820-7BH05
1m
6XV1 820-7BH10
2m
6XV1 820-7BH20
3m
6XV1 820-7BH30
5m
6XV1 820-7BH50
10 m
6XV1 820-7BN10
15 m
6XV1 820-7BN15
20 m
6XV1 820-7BN20
25 m
6XV1 820-7BN25
50 m
6XV1 820-7BN50
75 m
6XV1 820-7BN75
100 m
6XV1 820-7BT10
Industrial Ethernet
322
9.3.3.10
Flexible FO trailing cable (62.5/125 m)
Description
The flexible fiberoptic trailing cable was developed for applications in which the cable must
be flexible enough to move, for example when attached to moving machine parts (drag
chains).
The cable is mechanically designed for 100,000 bending cycles through 90 (at the
specified minimum bending radius). The trailing cable can be used both indoors and
outdoors.
The trailing cable is available in fixed lengths, preassembled with four BFOC connectors.

Cable type
Flexible cable for installation in drag chains indoors and

outdoors

FO cable
AT-W11Y(ZN)11Y 2 G 62.5/125
BFOC plug
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
no
Mechanical data
Number of fibers
Fiber material
1000 N
Bending cycles
100,000
Optical data
Attenuation
Bandwidth length
product
805 nm
3.1 dB/km
1300 nm
0.8 dB/km
805 nm
200 GHz *m
1300 nm
600 GHz *m

-25 C to +60 C
-25 C to +70 C
-30 C to +60 C
Resistance to fire
acc. to IEC 60332-1, flammable
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Industrial Ethernet
323
Cable type
Halogen-free
yes
Silicone-free
yes
Rodent protection
no
Cable length
100BaseFX
4000 m
1000BaseSX
350 m
1000BaseLX
550 m
Order numbers
Flexible fiber-optic trailing cable 1)
Cable for indoors; flame retardant, splittable, without

1)
6XV1 820-6AH10
1m
6XV1 820-6BH10
2m
6XV1 820-6BH20
3m
6XV1 820-6BH30
5m
6XV1 820-6BH50
10 m
6XV1 820-6BN10
15 m
6XV1 820-6BN15
20 m
6XV1 820-6BN20
25 m
6XV1 820-6BN25
50 m
6XV1 820-6BN50
9.3.3.11
SIENOPYR Duplex FiberOptic Marine Cable 62.5/125 m
Description
The SIENOPYR Duplex FiberOptic Marine Cable has 2 multimode graded-index fibers
62.5/125 m. The cable also has 2 multiwire, rubber-insulated copper wires with 1 mm
cross section. The SIENOPYR duplex fiberoptic marine cable is intended for fixed installation
on ships and offshore facilities in all enclosed spaces and on open decks. The cable is not,
however, suitable for permanent installation in water.
The halogen-free cable is certified for shipbuilding by the following organizations:
Lloyds Register of Shipping
Germanischer Lloyd
Registro Staliano Navale
Bureau Veritas
Industrial Ethernet
324

Cable type
SIENOPYR duplex fiber-optic marine cable
Fixed installation on ships and offshore facilities in all

enclosed spaces and on free decks

FO cable
MI-VHH 2G 62.5/125 3.1B200 + 0.8F600 + 2x1Cu 300V
BFOC plug
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
no
Shipbuilding approval
yes
Mechanical data
Number of fibers
Fiber material
250 N
Bending cycles
100,000
Optical data
Attenuation
805 nm
3.1 dB/km
1300 nm
0.8 dB/km
805 nm
200 GHz * km
1300 nm
600 GHz * km

-40 C to +80 C
-40 C to +80 C
-10 C to +50 C
Environmental conditions for operation
At ambient temperatures of -10 C, the cables must not

be subjected to any motions beyond the normal
vibration and oscillation on ships.
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant acc. to IEC 60332-3 (Cat. A)
Resistance to oil
not resistant
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
yes
Silicone-free
yes
Rodent protection
no
Industrial Ethernet
325
Order numbers
SIENOPYR duplex fiber-optic
marine cable 1)
1)
Glass SIENOPYR fiber-optic marine cable, sold in meters,

without connectors
6XV1 830-0NH10
9.3.3.12
FC FO standard cable GP 62.5/200/230 m
Description
The FC fiberoptic standard cable GP contains two multimode graded fibers of type
62.5/200/230 m. Thanks to the fiber construction (62.5/200/230), the cable can be cut etc.
like normal PCF fibers (Polymer Cladded Fiber). This means that users have the advantages
of glass FO cables (longer distances, resistant to temperature) and the advantages of PCF
cables when fitting connectors.
With the FC cables, glass FO runs of up to 3 km (100 Mbps Industrial Ethernet, PROFIBUS)
can be set up and the cable assembled on site. The combination of already installed,
traditional 62.5/125 m multimode glass FO runs with the new FastConnect FO cables is
also possible.

Cable type
FC FO standard cable GP
Cable for fixed installation in cable channels and pipes

FO cable
FC FO BFOC connectors
FC FO SC connectors
AT-V(ZN)YY 2GK 62.5/200/230
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
no
Mechanical data
Number of fibers
Fiber material
Multimode graded-index fiber 62.5/200/230 m
100 N
Optical data
Attenuation
Bandwidth length
product
805 nm
3.2 dB/km
1300 nm
0.9 dB/km
805 nm
200 GHz *m
1300 nm
500 GHz *m
Industrial Ethernet
326
Cable type
FC FO standard cable GP

-40 C to +85 C
-40 C to +85 C
-5 C to +50 C
Resistance to fire
Flame-retardant acc. to IEC 60332 -1-2 and IEC 60332 -3-22

(Cat. A)
Resistance to oil
Conditionally resistant to mineral oils and fats
UV resistance
Resistant
Halogen-free
no
Silicone-free
yes
Rodent protection
no
Cable length
100BaseFX
3000 m
1000BaseSX
350 m
1000BaseLX
550 m
Order numbers
FC FO standard cable GP1)
1)
FC FO standard cable for fixed installation indoors with PVC

jacket
6XV1 847-2A
9.3.3.13
FC FO trailing cable 62.5/200/230 m
Description
The FC fiberoptic trailing cable is the universal cable for use in drag chains indoors and
outdoors. The FC fiberoptic trailing cable contains two multimode graded fibers of type
62.5/200/230 m. The outer jacket with the outer diameter 8.8 0.5 mm is made of TPE-U
(polyurethane).

Cable type
FC fiber-optic trailing cable
Cable for high mechanical load for use in drag chains indoors
and outdoors

FO cable
FC FO BFOC connectors
FC FO SC connectors
AT-V(ZN)Y(ZN)11Y 2GK 62.5/200/230
Industrial Ethernet
327
Cable type
FC fiber-optic trailing cable
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
no
Mechanical data
Number of fibers
Fiber material
Multimode graded-index fiber 62.5/200/230 m
800 N
Bending cycles
5 000.000
Optical data
Attenuation
Bandwidth length
product
805 nm
3.2 dB/km
1300 nm
0.9 dB/km
805 nm
200 GHz *m
1300 nm
500 GHz *m

-25 C to +70 C
-30 C to +75 C
-5 C to +50 C
Resistance to fire
Resistance to oil
resistant
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
no
Silicone-free
yes
Rodent protection
no
Cable length
100BaseFX
4000 m
1000BaseSX
350 m
1000BaseLX
550 m
Order numbers
FC fiber-optic trailing cable 1)
1)
Trailing cable, splittable, without connectors, sold by the meter
6XV1 847-2C
Industrial Ethernet
328
9.3.4
Plastic fiber-optic cables
9.3.4.1
Overview
The plastic fiber-optic cable is available with PCF fibers (Polymer Cladded Fiber) and POF
fibers (Plastic Optical Fiber).
Properties
Plastic fibers have several properties that differ from those of glass fibers. For example, the
maximum possible cable length is shorter with glass fibers due to the higher attenuation and
the bandwidth is smaller. Plastic fibers require far less effort to assemble on site compared
with glass fibers.
The use of plastic fibers is particularly attractive when networking islands for example with
the ET 200. In this case, small distances up to a maximum of 50 m can be covered with the
plastic fibers.
9.3.4.2
POF Standard Cable GP 980/1000
Description
The Plastic Optical Fiber (POF) standard cable GP consists of two plastic fibers with a
rugged polyamide inner jacket. The inner jacket is surrounded by Kevlar strengthening
elements and a green PVC outer jacket. The POF standard cable GP can be assembled on
site. The cable is fitted with SC RJ connectors for devices with an integrated optical
interface.
Devices with an integrated optical interface include, for example SCALANCE X200-4P IRT,
SCALANCE X201-3P IRT, SCALANCE X202-2P IRT, SCALANCE X101-1POF, ET 200S.

Cable type
Fixed installation indoors

FO cable
SC RJ plug
SC RJ POF Plug Pro
I-V4Y(ZN)Y 2P 980/1000
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
yes
Industrial Ethernet
329
Cable type
Mechanical data
Number of fibers
Fiber material
POF FO cable fiber 980/1000 m
100 N
Optical data
Attenuation
650 nm
160 dB/km
650 nm
1 GHz *m

-25 C to +60 C
-25 C to +70 C
-30 C to +60 C
Resistance to fire
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
no
Silicone-free
yes
Rodent protection
no
Cable length for Industrial Ethernet
50 m
Order numbers
POF Standard Cable GP
980/1000
9.3.4.3
Standard cable; without connectors, UL approval, sold by the

meter
6XV1 874-2A
POF Trailing Cable 980/1000
Description
The Plastic Optical Fiber (POF) trailing cable consists of two plastic fibers with a rugged
polyamide inner jacket. The inner jacket is surrounded by Kevlar strengthening elements and
a green PUR outer jacket. The POF trailing cable can be assembled on site.
Devices with an integrated optical interface include, for example SCALANCE X200-4P IRT,
SCALANCE X201-3P IRT, SCALANCE X202-2P IRT, SCALANCE X101-1POF, ET 200S
Industrial Ethernet
330

Cable type
POF trailing cable
For moving applications (e.g. drag chains)

FO cable
SC RJ plug
SC RJ POF Plug Pro
I-V4Y(ZN)11Y 2P 980/1000 FLEX UL
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
yes
Mechanical data
Number of fibers
Fiber material
POF FO cable fiber 980/1000 m
100 N
Bending cycles
5 000 000
Optical data
Attenuation
650 nm
180 dB/km
650 nm
1 GHz *m

-20 C to +70 C
-40 C to +80 C
-5 C to +50 C
Resistance to fire
Resistance to oil
resistant
UV resistance
resistant
Free of halogens
no
Rodent protection
no
Silicone-free
yes
50 m
Order numbers
POF trailing cable
Trailing cable; with poly-optic fiber; without connectors, sold by

the meter
6XV1 874-2B
Industrial Ethernet
331
9.3.4.4
PCF standard cable GP 200/230
Description
The PCF standard cable GP consists of two PCF fibers. The fibers are surrounded by
aramid strengthening elements and a green PVC outer jacket. The cable is intended for fixed
installation indoors and outdoors with cable lengths up to 100 m.
The PCF standard cable GP 200/230 is available in meters and is suitable for fitting
connectors directly.

Cable type
Fixes installation indoors and outdoors

FO cable
SC RJ plug
SC RJ PCF Plug Pro
AT-V(ZN)YY 2K 200/230
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
yes
Mechanical data
Number of fibers
Fiber material
Graded-index 200/230 m
100 N
Optical data
Attenuation
Bandwidth length
product
650 nm
10 dB/km
660 nm
10 dB/km
650 nm
17 GHz *m

-40 C to +90 C
-40 C to +90 C
-5 C to +50 C
Resistance to fire
Flame-retardant acc. to IEC 60332 -1-2 and IEC 60332 -3-22

(Cat. A)
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
no
Silicone-free
yes
Rodent protection
no
100 m
Industrial Ethernet
332
Order numbers
9.3.4.5
Standard cable; UL approval; without connectors, sold by the

meter
6XV1 861-2A
Description
The PCF trailing cable 200/230 consists of two PCF fibers. The fibers are surrounded by
aramid strengthening elements and a green PUR outer jacket. The cable is intended for
moving applications such as drag chains indoors and outdoors with cable lengths up to 100
m. The recommended wavelength is 660 nm.
The PCF Trailing Cable is available in meters and is suitable for fitting connectors directly.

Cable type
Cable for high mechanical load and moving applications, for

example drag chains

FO cable
SC RJ plug
SC RJ PCF Plug Pro
AT-V(ZN)Y(ZN)11Y 2K200/230
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
no
Mechanical data
Number of fibers
Fiber material
800 N
Bending cycles
5 000 000
Optical data
Attenuation
Bandwidth length
product
650 nm
10 dB/km
660 nm
10 dB/km
650 nm
17 GHz *m
Industrial Ethernet
333
Cable type

-25 C to +75 C
-30 C to +75 C
-5 C to +50 C
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant
Resistance to oil
resistant
UV resistance
resistant
Free of halogens
no
Rodent protection
no
Silicone-free
yes
100 m
Order numbers
9.3.4.6
PCF fiber-optic cable with plastic cladding,

6XV1 861-2C
Description
The PCF trailing cable GP 200/230 is a rugged round cable with a green PVC outer jacket
and Kevlar strengthening elements and two glass fibers with a rugged PVC inner jacket. The
cable is intended for moving applications such as drag chains indoors and outdoors with
cable lengths up to 100 m. The recommended wavelength is 660 nm.

Cable type
Cable for high mechanical load and moving applications, for

example drag chains.

FO cable
SC RJ plug
SC RJ PCF Plug Pro
AT-V(ZN)Y(ZN)Y 2K200/230
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
yes
Industrial Ethernet
334
Cable type
Mechanical data
Number of fibers
Fiber material
800 N
Bending cycles
5,000,000
Optical data
Attenuation
Bandwidth length
product
650 nm
10 dB/km
660 nm
10 dB/km
650 nm
17 GHz * km

-25 C to +75 C
-30 C to +75 C
-5 C to +50 C
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Free of halogens
no
Rodent protection
no
Silicone-free
yes
100 m
Order numbers
PCF fiber-optic cable with plastic cladding, without connectors
6XV1 861-2D
Industrial Ethernet
335
9.3.5
Plugs
9.3.5.1
BFOC plug
Description
The BFOC connector is used to assemble glass fiber-optic cables with the following fiber
type.
Glass fiber-optic cable 50/125 m
Glass fiber-optic cable 62.5/125 m

Connection type
BFOC plug
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
no
Transmission speed
Industrial Ethernet
100 / 1000 Mbps
Interfaces
Number of optical connectors for
POF fiber-optic cables
Version for optical interface
BFOC plug

end devices
no
Design
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Metal and plastic
IP20
Product property
Silicone-free
yes
Industrial Ethernet
336
Order numbers
Multimode FO BFOC connector
set
Connector set for on-site assembly of FO standard

cables (50/125/1400), FO ground cable (50/125/1400),
flexible FO trailing cable, INDOOR FO cable
(62.5/125/900)
1 pack of 20
9.3.5.2
6GK1 901-0DA20-0AA0
Single mode FO LC plug
Description
The SM FO LC plug is used to assemble SM FO robust cable GP. The connector is used to
connect to Ethernet/PROFINET devices with an integrated optical single mode interface, for
example SCALANCE XR-300EEC, SCALANCE XR-300, SCALANCE X308-2M.

Connection type
SM FO LC plug
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
no
Transmission speed
Industrial Ethernet
100 / 1000 Mbps
Interfaces
glass fiber-optic cables
Duplex plug (push-pull device connector)

end devices
no
Design
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Plastic
IP20
Product property
Silicone-free
yes
Industrial Ethernet
337
Order numbers
LC duplex plug for SM FO robust cable GP (4E9/125)
SM FO LC plug
1 pack of 10
9.3.5.3
6GK1901-0SB10-2AB0
Multimode FO LC plug
Description
The MM FO LC plug is used to assemble MM FO robust cable GP. Numerous SCALANCE
products support the Lucent Connector (LC) interface , e.g. X308-2M, XR-300 and X300EEC.

Connection type
MM FO LC plug
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
no
Transmission speed
Industrial Ethernet
100 / 1000 Mbps
Interfaces
glass fiber-optic cables
Duplex plug (push-pull device connector)

end devices
no
Design
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Plastic
IP20
Product property
Silicone-free
yes
Order numbers
MM FO LC plug
LC duplex plug for MM FO robust cable GP (2G50/125)

1 pack of 10
6GK1 901-0RB10-2AB0
Industrial Ethernet
338
9.3.5.4
FO FC SC plug
Description
The FO FC SC plug is used to assemble FO FC glass fiber-optic cables. A case is available
for on-site cable assembly. The case contains the tools required for cable assembly.

Connection type
FO FC SC plug
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
no
Transmission speed
Industrial Ethernet
100 / 1000 Mbps
Interfaces
POF fiber-optic cables
SC plug

end devices
yes, FC
Design
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Metal and plastic
IP20
Product property
Silicone-free
yes
Order numbers
FC FO SC plug
Screw connector for on-site fitting to FC cable

1 pack of 10 duplex plug + cleaning cloths
6GK1900-1LB00-0AC0
FC FO Termination Kit
Cable assembly case for on-site assembly of

FC plugs and FC glass fiber-optic cables
6GK1900-1GL00-0AA0
Industrial Ethernet
339
9.3.5.5
FO FC BFOC plug
Description
The FO FC BFOC plug is used to assemble FO FC glass fiber-optic cables. A case is
available for on-site cable assembly. The case contains the tools required for cable
assembly.

Connection type
FC FO BFOC plug
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
no
Transmission speed
Industrial Ethernet
100 / 1000 Mbps
Interfaces
Number of optical connectors for POF fiberoptic cables
BFOC plug

devices
yes, FC
Design
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Metal and plastic
IP20
Product property
Silicone-free
yes
Order numbers
FC FO BFOC plug
FC FO Termination Kit
Screw connector for on-site fitting to FC fiber-optic

cables
1 pack of 10 duplex plug + cleaning cloths
6GK1900-1GB00-0AC0
Cable assembly case for on-site assembly of FC plugs

and FC glass fiber-optic cables
6GK1900-1GL00-0AA0
Industrial Ethernet
340
9.3.5.6
SC RJ plug
Description
The SC RJ plug is used to assemble POF and PCF fiber-optic cables.
The SC RJ plug is available in two versions:

SC RJ POF plug
For assembling POF fiber-optic cables. The maximum cable length between two
Industrial Ethernet devices is 50 m.
SC RJ PCF plug
For assembling PCF fiber-optic cables. The maximum cable length between two
A case is available for on-site cable assembly. The case contains the tools required for cable
assembly.

Connection type
SC RJ POF plug
SC RJ PCF plug
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
no
Transmission speed
Industrial Ethernet
100 Mbps
Interfaces
Number of optical connectors for POF fiber-optic cables
SC RJ plug
(push-pull device connector)
no
Design
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Plastic
IP65/67
Product property
Silicone-free
yes
Industrial Ethernet
341
Order numbers
Screw connector for on-site fitting to POF fiber-optic
cable
IE SC RJ POF Plug
1 pack of 20
6GK1900-0MB00-0AC0
Termination Kit SC RJ POF plug
Assembly case for on-site assembly of SC RJ POF

plugs; consisting of stripping tool,
Kevlar scissors, SC RJ polishing plate, grinding and
polishing paper, grinding and polishing base,
microscope
6GK1900-0ML00-0AA0
IE SC RJ PCF Plug
Screw connector for on-site fitting to PCF fiber-optic

cable
Termination Kit SC RJ PCF plug
9.3.5.7
1 pack of 10
6GK1900-0NB00-0AC0
Assembly case for on-site assembly of SC RJ plugs;

consisting of stripping tool, buffer stripping tool, Kevlar
scissors, fiber breaking tool, microscope
6GK1 900-0NL00-0AA0
IE SC RJ Plug Pro
Description
The SC RJ plug Pro is a plug that can be assembled in the field for push-pull device
connection with a high degree of protection.
The SC RJ Plug Pro is available in two versions:

SC RJ POF Plug Pro
For assembling POF fiber-optic cables. The maximum cable length between two
SC RJ PCF Plug Pro
For assembling PCF fiber-optic cables. The maximum cable length between two
Industrial Ethernet
342

Connection type
SC RJ POF Plug Pro

SC RJ PCF Plug Pro
RoHS conformity
yes
UL approval
no
Transmission speed
Industrial Ethernet
100 Mbps
Interfaces
Number of optical connectors for POF fiber-optic cables
SC RJ plug
(push-pull device connector)
no
Design
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Plastic
IP65/67
Product property
Silicone-free
yes
Order numbers
IE SC RJ POF Plug PRO
Connector for on-site fitting to POF FO cable

1 pack of 1
IE SC RJ PCF Plug PRO
6GK1900-0MB00-6AA0
Connector for on-site fitting to PCF FO cable

1 pack of 1
6GK1900-0NB00-6AA0
Industrial Ethernet
343
9.4
Power supply
Different types of cables are required for the power supply in Industrial Ethernet.
The power cables are used for devices with degree of protection IP65/67 to connect the
signaling contact or 24 V supply of the SCALANCE X and SCALANCE W components
(energy cable 2 x 0.75) and to supply power (energy cable 5 x 1.5 for the ET 200).
Preassembled power cables are also available to supply power for the ET 200 in different
lengths (M12 power connecting cable).
9.4.1
Power cable
9.4.1.1
Description
Rugged cable suitable for trailing with 2 copper wires for connecting the signaling contact
and 24 VDC power supply to SCALANCE X and SCALANCE W components.
The energy cable 2x1.5 is assembled with the following M12 plug-in connectors:
Signaling contact M12 cable connector
For connection to SCALANCE X208Pro for signaling contact
Power M12 cable connector
for connection to SCALANCE X208Pro and SCALANCE W700 for the 24 VDC power
supply.
Industrial Ethernet
344

Cable type 1)
Energy cable 2x1.5
Connector for signaling contact and power supply
2YY (ST) CY 2x2x0.64/1.5-100 GN
Jacket
PVC (7.4 0.3) mm, gray
Electrical data
Operating voltage (rms value)
600 V
Continuous current of the power

wires
6A

-20 C to +80 C
temperature
-20 C to +80 C
-20 C to +80 C
Resistance to fire
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
no
Silicone-free
yes
1)
Order numbers
Energy cable 2x1.5
9.4.1.2
2-wire energy cable (2 x 0.75 mm2) for connection to M12 plugin connector.
6XV1 812-8A
Description
The energy cable 5x1.5 is used to connect the 24 V power supply for ET 200 modules via
7/8" plug-in connectors.
The power supply concept of the ET 200 involves power being supplied by a central power
supply unit and being looped through from device to device. The load and device supply are
over separate circuits. The devices have a 7/8" male connector on the input side and a
socket on the output side.
The energy cable 5x1.5 is available in meters for assembly in the field and also in various
lengths of assembled 7/8" plug-in cable with degree of protection IP65.
7/8" plug-in cable has a 5-pin 7/8" plug-in connector with pin insert at one end and a 5-pin
7/8" plug-in connector with socket insert at the other end.
Industrial Ethernet
345

Cable type 1)
Energy cable 5x1.5
Power supply of ET 200 modules with 7/8" power port
L-Y11Y-Z 5x1x1.5 GR
Jacket
PUR (10.5 0.3) mm, gray
Electrical data
600 V

wires
16 A

-40 C to +80 C
temperature
-40 C to +80 C
-40 C to +80 C
Resistance to fire
Resistance to oil
resistant
UV resistance
resistant
Halogen-free
no
Silicone-free
yes
1)
Order numbers
Energy cable 5x1.5
5-wire energy cable (5 x 1.5 mm2) for connection to 7/8" plug- 6XV1 830-8AH10
in connector
7/8" CONNECTING CABLE
Preassembled energy cable 5x1.5 with two 5-pin 7/8"

plugs/sockets. Maximum cable length 50 m
0.3 m
6XV1 822-5BE30
0.5 m
6XV1 822-5B E50
1.0 m
6XV1 822-5B H10
1.5 m
6XV1 822-5B H15
2.0 m
6XV1 822-5B H20
3.0 m
6Xv1 822-5B H30
5.0 m
6XV1 822-5B H50
10 m
6XV1 822-5B N10
15 m
6XV1 822-5B DN15
Industrial Ethernet
346
9.4.2
Power connecting cable M12-180/M12-180
Description
The Power connecting cable M12 is an assembled connecting cable for the 24 V power
supply of the ET 200.
The Power connecting cable M12 has a 4-pin M12 male connector at one end and a 4-pin
M12 female connector at the other. The M12 male connector and the M12 female connector
are A-coded and have a straight cable outlet.

Cable type 1)
Power connecting cable M12-180/M12-180
Connection of the 24 V power supply to ET 200eco PN with

degree of protection IP65/67
LI9YH-Y 4x0.75
Jacket
PVC (5.7 0.2) mm, gray
Electrical data
300 V

wires

-25 C to +80 C
For moving applications, the maximum operating temperature
range of -5 C to +80 C must be adhered to.
temperature
-25 C to +80 C
-5 C to +80 C
Resistance to fire
Resistance to oil
UV resistance
not resistant
Halogen-free
no
Silicone-free
yes
1)
Industrial Ethernet
347
Order numbers
Power connecting cable M12180/M12-180
Flexible 4-wire power plug-in cable, assembled with an Acoded 4-pin M12 male connector and an A-coded, 4-pin M12
female connector for supply of the ET 200 with 24 VDC.
0.3 m
6XV1 801-5DE30
0.5 m
6XV1 801-5D E50
1.0 m
6XV1 801-5D H10
1.5 m
6XV1 801-5D H15
2.0 m
6XV1 801-5D H20
3.0 m
6Xv1 801-5D H30
5.0 m
6XV1 801-5D H50
10 m
6XV1 801-5D N10
15 m
6XV1 801-5D DN15
9.4.3
Cable connectors
9.4.3.1
Power Plug Pro
Description
The IE power plug PRO is 5-pin power connector that can be fitted in the field for on-site
assembly. the plug-in connector is used for the 2 x 24 V power supply for SCALANCE X200IRT PRO switches and the SIMATIC ET 200 pro. The energy cable 5x1.5 is assembled
with the plug-in connector.
The silicone-free design allows it to be used in the automobile industry, for example in paint
spraying lines.
Industrial Ethernet
348

Connection type
IE power plug PRO
UL approval
yes
RoHS conformity
yes
Interfaces
Number of electrical connectors for network
components / end devices

devices
Power contacts (push-pull casing)
Feed-out to cable
integrated spring contacts for 5-wire power cables
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Plastic

- 40 to + 70
- 40 to + 70
IP 65/67
Silicone-free
yes
Order numbers
IE power plug PRO
5-pin power plug-in connector for on-site assembly with

push-pull device connection
1 pack of 1
6GK1 907-0AB10-6AA0
Industrial Ethernet
349
9.4.3.2
7/8" plug-in connector
Description
The 7/8" plug-in connector is 5-pin plug-in connector that can be fitted in the field for on-site
assembly. The plug-in connector is used for the power supply of PROFIBUS nodes (e.g.
SIMATIC ET 200) with IP65 protection. The energy cable 5x1.5 is assembled with the plug-in
connector.
The 7/8" plug-in connector is available in the following versions.

Pin insert
For feeding in the supply voltage
Socket insert
For looping through the supply voltage

Connection type
UL approval
no
RoHS conformity
yes
Interfaces
Number of electrical connectors for network components /
end devices
7/8" plug
(socket insert or pin insert)
Feed-out to cables
Screw terminal
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Plastic

- 40 to + 70
- 40 to + 80
IP 65/67
Silicone-free
yes
Industrial Ethernet
350
Order numbers
9.4.3.3
Plug-in connector with axial cable outlet for field

assembly for ET 200, 5-pin, metal casing.
Pin insert
1 pack of 5
6GK1905-0FA00
Socket insert
1 pack of 5
6GK1905-0FA00
Power M12 plug Pro
Description
The Power M12 plug PRO is a 4-pin A-coded M12 power plug-in connector for energy cable
2x0.75.
The Power M12 plug PRO is suitable for connection to power supply PS791-1PRO for 24
VDC power supply.

Connection type
Power M12 plug PRO
UL approval
no
RoHS conformity
yes
Interfaces

devices
M12 connector plug

(pin insert, A-coded, 4-pin)
Feed-out to cable
integrated screw contacts for 2-wire power cables
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Plastic
Industrial Ethernet
351
Connection type
Power M12 plug PRO

- 40 to + 70
- 40 to + 80
IP 65/67
Silicone-free
yes
Order numbers
Power M12 plug PRO
Plug-in connector for connection to power supply

PS791-1 PRO; 4-pin, A-coded, with assembly
instructions.
1 pack of 3
9.4.4
Power supply
9.4.4.1
Power supply PS791-1PRO
6GK1 907-0DB10-6AA3
Description
The power supply PS791-1PRO is an AC/DC power supply unit for input voltages from 90 to
265 VAC for all SCALANCE products. The rugged metal housing provides protection against
water and dust to IP65.
The PS791-1PRO power supply unit can be mounted in the following ways:
directly on the SCALANCE W700 devices and SCALANCE X200 devices
Wall
S7-300 standard rail
DIN rail
To connect the M12 socket X2 with the SCALANCE products W788 and W744 and the
SCALANCE X208PRO, the M12 power cord supplied with the products can be used. As an
alternative, a user-assembled cable can also be used.
Industrial Ethernet
352
Overview
Interfaces
AC Power 3+PE Cable Connector for 100-240 V

AC power supply
Power M12 Plug PRO or power cord M12 for 24
VDC output power
On/off switch
Electrical data
Input voltage
90 V to 265 V AC at 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Output voltage
24 V DC, +-7%, 0.42 A
Output power
10 W
Network disruption
Bridging min. 20 ms at 230 V AC
Perm. ambient conditions
-20 to 60
-40 to +85
Relative humidity
100%
Standards, approvals, degree of protection

Approvals
EMC:
EN 55022 Class B,
EN 61000-4;
UL 1950, EN 60950;
Degree of protection
IP65
Order numbers
AC/DC power supply unit for input voltages from 90 to 265 6GK5791-1PS00-0AA6
VAC for numerous SCALANCE products with degree of
protection IP65
AC Power 3+PE cable connector Connecting socket for connecting the PS791-1PRO power
supply unit to an AC power supply
1 pack of 5
6GK1 907-0FC10-0AA5
Industrial Ethernet
353
9.4.4.2
Power M12 cable connector PRO
Description
The Power M12 cable connector PRO is a 4-pin M12 power connecting socket that can be
fitted in the field. The connecting socket is used for the 24 VDC power supply of the
SCALANCE X208PRO or SCALANCE W788-xPRO devices

Connection type
UL approval
no
RoHS conformity
yes
Interfaces

devices
M12 male connector

(socket insert, A-coded, 4-pin)
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Plastic

- 40 to + 70
- 40 to + 80
IP 65/67
Silicone-free
yes
Order numbers
Connecting socket for connecting SCALANCE W700 for

24 VDC power supply; 4-pin, A-coded, with assembly
instructions.
1 pack of 3
6GK1 907-0DC10-6AA3
Industrial Ethernet
354
9.4.4.3
7/8" Power T-Trap PRO
Description
The plug-in connector consists of two 7/8" socket inserts and one 7/8" pin insert, in each
case 5-pin.
The 7/8" Power T-Trap PRO is used for supplying power and distributing power to ET200pro
modules.

Connection type
UL approval
no
RoHS conformity
yes
Interfaces
7/8" plug-in connector (2 x socket insert 1 x pin

insert)
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Metal

- 40 to + 70
- 40 to + 80
IP 65/67
Silicone-free
yes
Order numbers
Power T-piece for ET 200 with two 7/8" socket inserts and one
7/8" pin insert
Pin insert
1 pack of 5
6GK1 905-0FC00
Industrial Ethernet
355
9.4.4.4
Signaling contact M12 cable connector PRO
Description
The signaling contact M12 cable connector PRO is a 5-pin M12 cable connector that is Bcoded for the signaling contact. The component has degree of protection IP65 and is used
with the SCALANCE X208PRO.

Connection type
Signaling contact M12 cable connector PRO
UL approval
no
RoHS conformity
yes
Interfaces

devices
M12 connecting plug

(socket insert, B-coded, 4-pin)
Cable outlet
180
Housing material
Plastic

- 40 to + 70
- 40 to + 80
IP 65/67
Silicone-free
yes
Industrial Ethernet
356
Order numbers
Signaling contact M12 cable
connector PRO
Connecting socket for connecting SCALANCE

X208PRO for signaling contact; 5-pin, B-coded with
assembly instructions
1 pack of 3
6GK1908-0DC10-6AA3
Validity of the information

Note
Please note that the data provided here is only intended to give you general information.
Our products are in constant development and the specifications and reference data may
change in the course of this development. Despite all our efforts, it is possible that individual
items of information in this networking manual are out of date.
You will find the continuously updated data in the compact operating instructions of the
individual devices.
Industrial Ethernet
357
Industrial Ethernet
358
Appendix
A.1
Overview of the standards relevant for network installation
Introduction
This section provides with a basic overview of the standards generally relevant for
installation of networks in buildings and those particularly relevant for Industrial Ethernet.
Note
This section can only include basic information available at the time of going to print.
Fort more detailed and up-to-date guidelines, contact the PROFIBUS user organization e.V.
The PROFIBUS user organization

PROFIBUS User Organization e.V.
Haid-und-Neu-Strae 7,
D-76131 Karlsruhe, Germany
Tel. +49 (0) 7 21 96 58 590, Fax +49 (0) 7 21 96 58 589
germany@profibus.com, www.profibus.com
Standards for general-purpose cable communications networks in an office environment

Standard
Area of application
ISO/IEC 11801
International standard for network planning in office buildings
EN50173
European standard for network planning in office buildings; adopted as national

standard
Due to the use of Ethernet in automation engineering, the existing standards needed to be
expanded to include the industrial sector.
Standards for general purpose cable communications networks in an industrial environment

Standard
Area of application
ISO/IEC 24702
International standard for planning general-purpose networks in industrial

buildings
EN50173-2
EN50173-3
European standard for network planning in industrial buildings; adopted as

national standard
Industrial Ethernet
359
Appendix
A.1 Overview of the standards relevant for network installation
For industrial applications, expanded standards are necessary that describe the constraints
for these applications
Cabling standards for industrial networks and their scope

Standard
Area of application
Scope
IEC 61918
International standard for communications

networks in industrial automation systems;
relevant for various fieldbuses, common
aspects of planning, installation, operation1)
Describes the network structure and

general requirements in and
between automation cells
IEC61784-5-x
International series of standards for special

requirements in industrial networks such as
PROFINET / PROFIBUS, supplementing
IEC 61918
Describes specific requirements of

the communication profile
1)
Fieldbus-specific aspects are described in separate, ancillary standards
The "PROFINET Cabling and Interconnection Technology" guideline

Among other things, the PROFIBUS User Organization has produced the "PROFINET
Cabling and Interconnection Technology" guideline that served as input for IEC 61918 and
IEC 61784 and that also references these standards.
It describes the technical benchmark values for cables and connectors (both electrical and
optical) for PROFINET networks. These are intended to help new manufacturers to produce
PROFINET-compliant products.
The guideline can be downloaded in English from the URL:
http://www.profibus.com/pall/meta/downloads/article/00327/
Industrial Ethernet
360
Appendix
A.2 Content of the standards
A.2
Content of the standards
Content of the IEC 24702 and EN50173-3 standards

The standards for general purpose building networking of buildings used for industrial
purposes describe:
The structure of the building network,
The requirements for cables (fibre-optic, electrical),
The requirements for connectors (fibre-optic, electrical),
Limit values for installed links.
IEC 24702 references IEC11801.
Technical aspects of installation described in IEC 14763 (EN50174).
Content of the IEC 61918 and IEC61784 standards

the standards for automation networks include a general section describing the following
points:
Design of the network (network structure, grounding, equipotential bonding),
Planning and installation,
Requirements of components (table connectors, cables, grounding, ...)
Acceptance of an installation,
Maintenance and service.
IEC 61918 contains general requirements common to all fieldbuses (PROFINET, PB,
Interbus,).
Fieldbus-specific aspects/requirements that differ from the general section described in

profile-specific standards, for example in IEC61784-5-3 for PROFIBUS, PROFIBUS PA and
PROFINET; IEC61784-5-6 for Interbus.
Industrial Ethernet
361
Appendix
A.3 Application of the standards
A.3
Application of the standards
Application of the EN standards 50173/50174

Standard
Project phase
Tasks
EN50173-1
Planning of cabling
Topology, cables, connection technology, limit

values for transmission links
EN50174-1
EN50174-2
EN50174-3
Planning phase
Management of the cabling, safety requirements,

laying of cables, equipotential bonding)
EN50174-1
EN50174-2
EN50174-3
Implementation phase
EN501714-1
Operational phase
Quality assurance, management of the cabling,

repair and maintenance
Description of the fieldbus-specific characteristics in IEC 61784

This standard references IEC 61918.
Standard
Fieldbus
IEC 61784-5-2
ControlNet, EtherNet/IP
IEC 61784-5-3
PROFIBUS, PROFINET
IEC 61784-5-6
Interbus
IEC 61784-5-10
Vnet/IP (Yokogawa)
IEC 61784-5-11
TCnet (Toshiba)
General-purpose cabling systems: EN 50173/EN 50174

Standard
Contents
EN50173-1
Part 1: General requirements
EN50173-2
Part 2: Office environment
EN50173-3
Part 3: Industrial area
EN50173-4
Part 4: Domestic environment
EN50174-5
Part 5: Computer centers
Installation of communication cabling: EN 50174

Standard
Contents
EN50174-1
Part 1 Specification and quality assurance
EN50174-2
Part 2 Installation planning and practices in buildings
EN50174-3
Part 3 Installation planning and practices outdoors
Industrial Ethernet
362
Index
Automated guided vehicle system, 52
Autonegotiation, 96
1
100BASE-TX, 268
5
50174
Standard, 362
5e
Category for twisted-pair cable, 13
6
6
Category for twisted-pair cable, 13
8
802.11
WLAN standards, 40
A
Access point, 46
Access Point, 95
Active network components
in PROFINET, 23
Ad hoc
Wireless network, 53
Ad hoc networks, 53
Advanced Encryption Standard, 44
AES, 44
Antennas
Antenna gain, 175
Directional, 175
Dual antennas, 176
MIMO antennas, 176
Omnidirectional, 175
Product overview, 177
Radiation characteristics, 175
RCoax, 181
RCOAX cable, 175
Autocrossover function, 96
B
Backbone, 55
C
Cable length, 97
Carousels, 39
Cell protection concept, 36
Client, 46, 95
Collision detection, 45
Collision domain, 37
Communications processor
CP 1604, 219
CP 1612 A2, 221
CP 1613 A2, 222
CP 1616, 220
CP 1623, 223
CSM 1277 unmanaged, 249
CSM 377, 247
LOGO!CSM 12/24, 252
LOGO!CSM 230, 252
Component-Based Automation, 15, 16
CP 1604
Characteristics, 219
Description, 219
Functions, 219
CP 1612 A2
Description, 221
Functions, 221
CP 1613 A2
Description, 222
Functions, 222
CP 1616
Description, 220
Functions, 220
CP 1623
Description, 223
Functions, 223
Industrial Ethernet
363
Index
Cranes, 39
CSM 1277 unmanaged
Functions, 250
CSM 377
Description, 247
Functions, 248
CSMA/CA, 45
CSMA/CD, 45
Cut through, 30
D
DCP protocol, 213
Denial of Service, 34
DLC protocol, 213
DoS, 34
DSSS, 40
Dynamic routing, 31
VRRP, 31
E
EAP, 44
E-mail, 33
EN 50173
Standard, 359, 362
ERTEC-ASIC, 30
Extensible Authentication Protocol, 44
F
Fast Ethernet, 13
FastConnect, 266
FastConnect twisted pair, 266
Fault mask, 96
FC twisted pair, 266
Fiber-optic cables (FO cables), 304
Firewall, 33
Formation of loops, 96
FTP, 33
Functions
SCALANCE X100 media converters, 114
SCALANCE X200/X200 IRT, 121
SCALANCE X300, 127
G
Gigabit Ethernet, 13
Glossary, 4
GPRS router, 95
GSM, 95
GSM/GPRS modem
SINAUT MD720-3, 193
H
High-Availability, 29
High-bay storage rack, 39
I
IEC 61784
Standard, 362
IEC 61918
Standard, 360
IEEE 802.11n
Channel bonding, 43
Frame aggregation, 43
Guard interval, 43
Maximum ratio combining, 41
MIMO, 41
Spatial multiplexing, 42
IEEE 802.3u, 268, 306
Industrial Ethernet, 11
Infrastructure mode, 47
Wireless networks, 47
iPCF, 12
iPCF-MC, 12
IRT, 102
ISO/IEC 11801
Standard, 359
ISO/IEC 24702
Standard, 359
Isochronous Real Time, 21, 102
IWLAN, 38
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO, 46
L
Layer 3 function
Dynamic routing, 31
Static routing, 31
LD, 101
Line
Network topology, 55
LOGO! CSM 12/24
Description, 252
Functions, 253
Industrial Ethernet
364
Index
LOGO! CSM 230

Description, 252
Functions, 253
M
M12, 268
Management functions, 101
Maximum lengths
Multimode glass fiber-optic cable, 306
Multimode glass fiber-optic cable for
1 Gbps Ethernet, 307
Single mode glass fiber-optic cable, 306
Twisted pair sections, 268
MDI/MDIX autocrossover function, 96
Media modules
SCALANCE X300, 132
SCALANCE X400, 138
SCALANCE X500, 146
MIMO, 40
Mobile wireless, 95
Monorail suspension track, 39
N
NAPT, 34
NAT, 34
Network Address Port Translation, 34
Network Address Translation, 34
Line, 55
Star, 57
O
OFDM, 40
Operating systems, 212
P
Packet filter, 33
Passive network components
in PROFINET, 23
Personal firewall, 34
Plug and play, 96
Point-to-point, 71
Port, 33
Power over Ethernet
IEEE 802.3af, 27
IEEE 802.3at, 27
Primary area
Cabling buildings, 267
PROFIBUS International, 15
PROFIBUS User Organization, 359
PROFINET, 11
Cable assembly, 25
Fault-tolerant systems, 29
Implementation, 15
Isochronous Real Time, 21
Ring redundancy, 29
Standard, 16
Switching mechanisms, 30
PROFINET Cabling and Interconnection Technology
Guideline, 360
PROFINET CBA, 15, 16
PROFINET IO, 15, 16
Pseudo random numbers, 44
R
RADIUS
Network authentication protocol, 44
Rapid roaming, 12
RCoax cable, 46
Redundancy manager, 38, 61
Redundancy methods
HSR, 69
MRPD, 69
MSTP, 72
PRP, 70
RNA, 70
RSTP, 71
STP, 71
Redundant ring, 38
Redundant systems, 29
Repeater, 37
Ring
RJ-45, 268
Roaming, 46
RTS/CTS, 45
S
SCALANCE M, 184
M873, 186
M875, 187
SCALANCE M873
Description, 186
Industrial Ethernet
365
Index
Functions, 188
SCALANCE M875
Description, 187
Functions, 188
SCALANCE S, 197
Configuration and administration, 199
How it works, 199
SCALANCE S602
Description, 202
Functions, 205
Interface, 205
SCALANCE S612
Description, 203
Functions, 205
Interface, 205
SCALANCE S623
Description, 204
Functions, 205
Interface, 205
SCALANCE W
Access points, 149
Antennas, 175
Client modules, 149
IWLAN controller, 149
IWLAN controller WLC711, 171
Overview of the antennas, 177
Performance classes, 150
W746-xPRO, Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.
W747-xRR, Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.
W748-x M12, 163
W748-x RJ-45, 163
W784, 155
W786, 159
W786C, 171
W788C, 171
W788-x M12, 163
W788-x R-45, 163
W788-xPRO, Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.
W788-xRR, Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.
SCALANCE W746-x PRO
Description, Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.
Functions, 169
Interfaces, 169
SCALANCE W747-xRR
Description, 167
Functions, 169
Interfaces, 169
SCALANCE W748-x M12
Description, 163
Functions, 165
Interfaces, 165
SCALANCE W748-x RJ-45
Description, 163
Functions, 165
Interfaces, 165
SCALANCE W784
Description, 155
Functions, 157
Interfaces, 158
SCALANCE W786
Description, 159
Functions, 161
Interfaces, 161
SCALANCE W786C
Description, 171
Functions, 173
Interfaces, 174
SCALANCE W788C
Description, 171
Functions, 173
Interfaces, 174
SCALANCE W788-x M12
Description, 163
Functions, 165
Interfaces, 165
SCALANCE W788-x RJ-45
Description, 163
Functions, 165
Interfaces, 165
SCALANCE W788-x RR
Functions, 169
Interfaces, 169
SCALANCE W788-xPRO
Functions, 169
Interfaces, 169
SCALANCE WLC711
Industrial Ethernet
366
Index
Description, 171
Interfaces, 174
SCALANCE X
Performance classes, 99
X005, 106
X100 media converters, 113
X100 unmanaged, 110
X200/X200 IRT, 119
X300, 125
X400, 134
X500, 142
XB000, 108
SCALANCE X005
Description, 106
Functions, 106
Interfaces, 107
Description, 113
Functions, 114
Interfaces, 115
SCALANCE X100 unmanaged
Description, 110
Interfaces, 112
SCALANCE X200/X200 IRT
Description, 119
Functions, 121
Interfaces, 122
SCALANCE X300
Description, 125
Functions, 127
Interfaces, 128
Media modules, 132
SFP transceiver, 133
SCALANCE X400
Description, 134
Extender modules, 140
Functions, 136
Interfaces, 137
Media modules, 138
SCALANCE X500
Description, 142
External power supply unit, 148
Functions, 144
Interfaces, 145
Media modules, 146
SFP transceiver, 147
SCALANCE XB000
Description, 108
Interfaces, 109
Secondary area
Security modules, 95
SFP transceiver
SCALANCE X300, 133
SCALANCE X500, 147
Shared LAN, 37
Shared medium, 46
Signaling contact, 103
Silent listener
Wireless network, 39
SIMATIC iMap, 16
SIMATIC NET, 11
SIMATIC NET glossary, 4
SIMATIC S7-1200
CP 1242-7, 242
SIMATIC S7-200
CP 243-1, 228
SIMATIC S7-300
CP 3431 advanced,
CP 343-1 Lean, 230
SIMATIC S7-400
CP 443-1, 237
CP 443-1 Advanced, 237
SINAUT MD720-3
Description, 193
Functions, 195
SINAUT MD74-1
Description, 190
SINAUT MD741-1
Functions, 192
Slip contacts, 39
Spanning Tree, 71
Multiple Spanning Tree, 72
Rapid Spanning Tree, 71
Special cables
Contacts, 263
Special lengths
Contact person, 263
SSH, 33
Standalone network, 47
Standards for general purpose cable communications
networks
Industrial environment, 359
Standards for general-purpose cable communications
networks
Industrial Ethernet
367
Index
Office environment, 359

Standby redundancy, 62
Star
Star coupler, 37
Stateful packet inspection, 34
Static routing, 31
Store and forward, 30
Structured cabling, 267
Switch, 36, 57, 95
Switched LANs, 37
T
Tertiary area
TIA, 18
Totally Integrated Automation, 18
Trailing cable, 39
Tunneling, 35
Twisted pair cord, 266
U
UMTS, 95
V
Virtual Private Network, 35
viruses
Computer, 33
VPN, 35
W
WEP, 44
Wi-Fi Protected Access, 44
Wired Equivalent Privacy, 44
Wireless cell, 46
Wireless networks
Unstructured, 53
WLAN, 38
WPA, 44
WPA2, 44
Industrial Ethernet
368

SYH IE-Net 76

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationSYH_IE-Net_76

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

SYH IE-Net 76

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SYH IE-Net 76

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

 Industrial Ethernet

Network structures and

Proper use of Siemens products

Order number: C79000-G8976-C242-08

Copyright Siemens AG 2007 - 2013.

Structure of the document

Structure of the Networking Manual

Content and target group

SIMATIC NET product lines

These chapters are also intended for decision-makers and planners.

Orientation in the documentation

Operating Instructions and other documents

SIMATIC NET glossary

System Manual, 02/2013, C79000-G8976-C242-08

Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet .................................................................................... 11

Technologies of Industrial Ethernet .............................................................................................22

Network security ..........................................................................................................................33

Switches and switched LANs.......................................................................................................36

Wireless LAN ...............................................................................................................................38

Network structures and network configuration ......................................................................................... 55

Network structures .......................................................................................................................55

Examples of applications ......................................................................................................................... 73

Optimization of a power screwdriver control ............................................................................... 73

Process automation in hazardous areas..................................................................................... 75

Automation of gantry cranes ....................................................................................................... 77

Controlling material transportation with SCALANCE components ............................................. 79

Crane carriage control for a high-bay warehouse....................................................................... 81

Connecting a PROFIBUS network to a PROFINET installation ................................................. 83

Redundant coupled rings with a connection to an office network............................................... 85

Data protection during mobile communication............................................................................ 87

Gigabit network in the pharmaceuticals industry ........................................................................ 91

Communications components for extreme climatic conditions ................................................... 93

SCALANCE network components............................................................................................................ 95

Common properties of all SCALANCE devices .......................................................................... 96

Web Based Management for configuring networks .................................................................... 98

SCALANCE X switches and media converters........................................................................... 99

System Manual, 02/2013, C79000-G8976-C242-08

SCALANCE X100 media converters .........................................................................................113

SCALANCE W components for Industrial Wireless LAN...........................................................149

SCALANCE M routers and modems......................................................................................... 184

SCALANCE S security module ................................................................................................. 197

Network management software ................................................................................................ 210

Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 214

Communications processors for PCs..................................................................................................... 217

CP 1604 .................................................................................................................................... 219

CP 1616 .................................................................................................................................... 220

CP 1612 A2............................................................................................................................... 221

CP 1613 A2............................................................................................................................... 222

CP 1623 .................................................................................................................................... 223

CP 1628 .................................................................................................................................... 224

Communications processors for SIMATIC S7........................................................................................ 225

Communications processors for SIMATIC S7-200 ................................................................... 228

Communications processors for SIMATIC S7-300 ................................................................... 230

Communications processors for SIMATIC S7-400 ................................................................... 237

Communications processors for SIMATIC S7-1200 ................................................................. 242

Compact switch module......................................................................................................................... 245

CSM 377 ................................................................................................................................... 247

Industrial Ethernet